<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/css" href="http://www.textpartnership.net/docs/code/pfs.css"?>
<!DOCTYPE ETS SYSTEM "http://www.textpartnership.net/docs/code/eebo2prf.xml.dtd">
<ETS>
<HEADER>
<FILEDESC><TITLESTMT><TITLE TYPE="245" I2="0">Three Middle-English versions of the Rule of St. Benet and two contemporary rituals for the ordination of nuns.</TITLE><TITLE TYPE="alt" I2="0">Regula. English (Middle English)</TITLE><AUTHOR> Benedict, Saint, Abbot of Monte Cassino.</AUTHOR></TITLESTMT><EXTENT> ca. 100 kB</EXTENT><PUBLICATIONSTMT><PUBLISHER>University of Michigan Library</PUBLISHER><PUBPLACE>Ann Arbor, Michigan</PUBPLACE><DATE>2006</DATE><IDNO TYPE="dlps">AHA2736</IDNO><IDNO TYPE="lccallno">820.6 E13 no.120</IDNO><AVAILABILITY><P>The University of Michigan Library provides access to these materials in furtherance of its educational and research mission. This work has been identified as being in the public domain, free of known restrictions under copyright law, including all related and neighboring rights. You may copy, modify, distribute and perform the work, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission. If you have questions about the collection, please contact Digital Content and Collections (mec-info@umich.edu). If you have concerns about the inclusion of an item in this collection, please contact Library Information Technology (LibraryIT-info@umich.edu).</P></AVAILABILITY></PUBLICATIONSTMT><SERIESSTMT><TITLE>Early English Text Society. Original series,</TITLE><NUM>no. 120</NUM></SERIESSTMT><SOURCEDESC><BIBLFULL><TITLESTMT><TITLE TYPE="245" I2="0">Three Middle-English versions of the Rule of St. Benet and two contemporary rituals for the ordination of nuns.</TITLE><TITLE TYPE="alt" I2="0">Regula. English (Middle English)</TITLE><AUTHOR> Benedict, Saint, Abbot of Monte Cassino.</AUTHOR><AUTHOR>Kock, Ernst A. (Ernst Albin), 1864-1943.</AUTHOR></TITLESTMT><EXTENT>221 p.    </EXTENT><PUBLICATIONSTMT><PUBPLACE>London,</PUBPLACE><PUBLISHER>Pub. for the Early English text society by K. Paul, Trench, Trübner &amp; co., limited,</PUBLISHER><DATE>1902.</DATE></PUBLICATIONSTMT><NOTESSTMT><NOTE>cop.1: Bound with Mirk, John. Instructions for parish priests. 1868 [Rev. 1902] (Original series, no. 31)</NOTE></NOTESSTMT></BIBLFULL></SOURCEDESC></FILEDESC>
<ENCODINGDESC><PROJECTDESC>
<P>Header created with script mrcb2teiutf.xsl on 2006-01-27.</P></PROJECTDESC><EDITORIALDECL N="4">
<P> Encoding has been done using the recommendations for Level 4 of the TEI in Libraries Guidelines. </P></EDITORIALDECL></ENCODINGDESC>
<PROFILEDESC>
<LANGUSAGE ID="eng">
<LANGUAGE>eng</LANGUAGE></LANGUSAGE>
<TEXTCLASS><KEYWORDS><TERM>Monasticism and religious orders -- Rules</TERM><TERM>Benedictines.</TERM></KEYWORDS></TEXTCLASS></PROFILEDESC></HEADER>
<EEBO>
<IDG S="marc" R="UM" ID="CME00000"><STC T="X"></STC><BIBNO T="oclc"></BIBNO><VID></VID></IDG>
<TEXT><FRONT>
<DIV1 TYPE="title page">
<P><PB REF="" N="t.p. recto"/>THREE MIDDLE-ENGLISH VERSIONS OF THE Rule of St. Benet AND TWO CONTEMPORARY RITUALS FOR THE ORDINATION OF NUNS.</P>
<P>EDITED, WITH AN INTRODUCTION, NOTES, AND GLOSSARIES, BY DR. ERNST A. KOCK.</P>
<P>LONDON: PUBLISHED FOR THE EARLY ENGLISH TEXT SOCIETY BY KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRÜBNER &amp; CO., LIMITED., PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING-CROSS ROAD. 1902.</P>
<P><PB REF="" N="verso"/>Original Series, No. 120.</P>
<P>RICHARD CLAY &amp; SONS, LIMITED, LONDON &amp; BUNGAY.</P>
</DIV1>
</FRONT>
<BODY>
<DIV1 TYPE="version"><PB REF="" N="1"/>
<HEAD>I. THE NORTHERN PROSE VERSION OF The Rule of St. Benet.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(Lansdowne MS. 378, British Museum.)</HEAD>
<DIV2 TYPE="prolog">
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<P><MILESTONE N="1b" UNIT="folio"/>Asculta, o fili! </P>
<P>Son, Herkyn þe commandementis of þe mastir, &amp; lay to þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS1">MS. þ<HI REND="sup">e</HI>; similarly p. 12, l. 32, p. 13, ll. 9, 36, etc.</NOTE> eere of thy herte, &amp; gladly take And spedily fulfil þe warnyng of þe meke fadir, þat þu mai turne a-gayne to hym by þe labur of obedience, fra whame þu had gane by þe slewth of inobedience.  Tharfore my worde be now directe to the, þat forsakis thy awne lustis &amp; takis þe ryght strang &amp; doghty armur of obedience to seryf our lorde Iesu criste, þe verrey kyng.  First þat þu aske of hym wid besy prayer alle gude thing þat þu begyns to do to be perfytely endid; þat he, þat hase vochyd safe to cownte vs in þe nummer of hys sons, be not greuyd ony tyme be our euyl dedis.  Sa, for soth, it is to obey hym at al tyme for hys aune gudis þat ere in vs, þat he, as a wrath fader, not alanly diseret vs os not hys sons, Bot also os a dredful lord, wrathid thoro our<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS2">MS. o<HI REND="sup">r</HI>.</NOTE> euyl dedys, betake vs to perpetual payne os ful wykkyd seruandis, whylk wald not folow hym to blis.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="1">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="2a" UNIT="folio"/>primum capitulum.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS3"><HI REND="I">primum</HI>; one of the downstrokes required to make <HI REND="I">-mum</HI> is missing.—After <HI REND="I">capitulum</HI>, and in several places on the seven first pages, the sign -:- is used instead of a plain stop.</NOTE></HEAD>
<P>Exurgamus ergo.</P>
<P>In þis first sentence bidis us sain benet þat we be wakande, and bidis we sal rise, þat es of ure sinne, als it es writen, and þat yure ehin be opin, and yure herte[s],<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS4">MS. <HI REND="I">yures herte</HI>; cf. p. 2, l. 2.</NOTE> til godis brih[t]nes,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS5">MS. <HI REND="I">brihnes</HI>.</NOTE> Godis uoice þat ȝe here and under-stande<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS6">MS. <HI REND="I">under. c. / stande.</HI>  At the end of several lines on the nine first leaves (but never afterwards) some strokes, sometimes apparently forming real letters or words, are added simply in order to give to the lines their full length.</NOTE><PB REF="" N="2"/> it, als it sais: "Hodie si uocem eius—Yef ye þe uoice of god herd o day, yure hertis ware noht hard; it munde ma þam neis;" Als haly writ says: "Qui habet aures<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS7">MS. <HI REND="I">aur/res</HI>.</NOTE> audiendi, audiat—Þat erin hauis,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS8">Between <HI REND="I">erin</HI> and <HI REND="I">hauis</HI> there is a blank large enough for about five letters; it seems to have been left thus by the scribe.</NOTE> herkins wat þe haly spirt sais in haly writ."  wat sais he? "Cumis to me, I sal yu lere þe dute of god, his wille þat ȝe may do.  Rennes fast do wilis ye haue liht, þat þe mirkenes<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS9">MS. <HI REND="I">mirken/nes</HI>.</NOTE> o ded our-take þe noht."  Þe haly spirt bidis us þat we trou his reed, þat we may cum to þe lif and se þe dais of godis sune in ioye wid-uten ende.  "yef þu will haue þat ioy, gete þi tunge, þu speke na scaþe, and tine lippis fra iuel.  Turne þe fra iuil &amp; do þe gode, þat ti lif folihe þaim. wen þat ȝe þus do, þan sal<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS10">MS. <HI REND="I">sa</HI>.</NOTE> min ezin be on ȝow. Til ȝure praier sa[l] I here, sal ȝe noht be for-getin.  Or þat ȝe calle to me, I sal saie: I es here."  My suete sistirs,  I saie to <MILESTONE N="2b" UNIT="folio"/>yu: es na sueter uoice þan of iesu; sua sais sain benet.  God al-mihti kenne us þe rihte gate til endeles ioy.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="2">
<HEAD>Secundum capitulum.</HEAD>
<P>Succinctis ergo fide.</P>
<P>In þis sentence mustirs sain benet us hu we sal lede ure lif, and sais þat we sal belt us wid chastiment, riht trouz þat ye haue wid gode dede, þat tu belte þine lendis sua, and þat tine fete be shod in riht gate, Als þe gospel tellis, in his tretes þat þu ga, til his rengne þat þu may cume, þare hise frendis sal euir be, þat here hauis wele wroht.  Yef þu wil to þat rengne cume, do þe dedis of godis sune; þu sal [be] þidir<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS11">MS. <HI REND="I">sal þidit</HI>.</NOTE> broht. we aske þe, lauerd, þurz þe muz of þe profete, Wha in þi tabernakil sal wne. "An wha sal wne wid þe in þe muntain þat es sua briht?" Lauerd, þan we haue askid þe, þe ancewer of þe sal we here: þe riht þidir at cume þai sal haue, entre þat ere wid-uten sinne; Þat rihtuis es of dede and rihtuis of speche in his hert of alle þing; þat wid tunge lezis noht, bot sothfastnes in his þoht; Þat euil dos til nan, ne reproues na man of þaire mis-dede.  He dos all to noht þe sinne þat wnis in<PB REF="" N="3"/> his þoht and quites him <MILESTONE N="3a" UNIT="folio"/>at te nede.  Lauerd, we prai<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS12">MS. <HI REND="I">praiþe</HI>.</NOTE> þe þat we may serue sua, in þi tabernakil þat we may wne. Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="3">
<HEAD>Tercium capitulum.</HEAD>
<P>Ergo preparanda.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS13">The Latin catch-words <HI REND="I">Ergo preparanda</HI> are placed in the right margin; they properly belong to l. 27.</NOTE></P>
<P>In þis sentence sais sain benet til þa þat luuis god &amp; dutes hym: yef þu findis ani god in þe, til god sal þe louing be, a[n]d<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS14">MS. <HI REND="I">ad</HI>.  The same slip was made in p. 6, l. 12, and p. 9, l. 29, in which latter place, however, <HI REND="I">ad</HI> was immediately crossed out, and <HI REND="I">and</HI> was added.</NOTE> grace til him giue, of whame we haue al þe gude; als þe prophete sais: "Non nobis domine—Lord, of us es it noht, bot til þi name ioy es broht"; Als sain paul sais: "Lauerd, of me haue I noht, bot þu sende it me."  In oþir stede sais he: "In god sal man be glad and loue him in dede."  And heris wat ure lauerd sais in þe gospel: "Qui audit—Wha sam heris my word and dos it in werke, Til þe wyis man sembils<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS15">MS. <HI REND="I">se m bils</HI>.</NOTE> he, þat fundes his hus opon þe stan fra þe water and te flod; for þi ne failed it noht, for it [was] wrht<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS16">MS. <HI REND="I">it wrht</HI>.</NOTE> o-pon þe harde stane." Þus kennis ure lauerd us his werkis, at folu his cumandementis.  For þi he giuis us respit, þat we sal mende ure sinne and siþin to þe ioy be sent; Als þe postil sais ȝur godes word: "An nescitis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS17">MS. <HI REND="I">nescitits</HI>.</NOTE>—Þe sufferans may þu noht wite of god her witerlike, þat he to þe hauis don?"  Als ure lauerd sais: <MILESTONE N="3b" UNIT="folio"/>"Of  þe sinfull will I noht þe dede, bot þat tay turne and liue." wen we aske þe, lauerd, wha in þi tabernakill sall wone, and we here þi cumandement, and dos te werkis þat fallis þar-to, þan sall we be ayris in þi ioye.  lord, for þi mercy þu gif us grace þare at be.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="4">
<HEAD>Capitulum IIII.</HEAD>
<P>Monachorum.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS18"><HI REND="I">Monachorum</HI> properly belongs to p. 4, l. 14.</NOTE></P>
<P>In þis sentence bidis us sain benet þat we make ure hertis redy, and ure bodis als-sua, in mekenes, yef we will wone wid god.  Þan ure force es gane us fra, we pray ure lauerd be ure help for his mikill miht.  Yef we þe painis of helle will fle, and cum till ioy þat ay sall be, Þanne full-fille we his wille.  Loke þat ȝe renne suiþe, yef<PB REF="" N="4"/> ȝe will to þe lange liue.  þare may help þe here to.  Þus sais sain benet: Mi scole wil i stablis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS19">MS. <HI REND="I">wilistablis</HI>.</NOTE> to godis seruise. Greue þing will i noht stablis,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS20">MS. <HI REND="I">sta = blis</HI>.</NOTE> na noht þat wrange es, bot a stresce will I make in mendnis of ȝoure sinne, And for to yeme charite, þat þer nan iuil lares by-gynne, Bot þat haly kirke ȝow lokis.  Loke þu folow þi domnum<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS21"><HI REND="I">domnum</HI>? the d is defective, and resembles an o; no contraction mark is distinguishable.</NOTE> in haly religiun; þan sall þi charge be liht; þan sal þi hert liht be, in godis trouht yef þu<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS22">Between <HI REND="I">yef</HI> and <HI REND="I">þu</HI> there are a couple of indistinct strokes slanting like the two first of a w.  Possibly the scribe was about to write <HI REND="I">we</HI> instead of <HI REND="I">þu</HI>.</NOTE> it se.  In mikill suetnes may þu  renne, wen þu can knau god and <MILESTONE N="4a" UNIT="folio"/>his cumandement.  Þan sall tu euir mare wone wid him in þat suete felazscap.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS23">MS. <HI REND="I">felazhap</HI> (thus h for sc).</NOTE> Þat here liuis in clene scrift and in paine, þai sall haue part wid him.  Lauerd, þu grante it us sua, til þi ioy þat we ga.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="1">
<HEAD>I.</HEAD>
<P>Quartum vero genus.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS24">The catch-words properly belong to l. 28.</NOTE></P>
<P>Foure maner of Munkis es in religiun, sais sain benet. Þe first maner þan er þa in cuuent es gadird for to liue in godis pais, vndir reul of dicipline, and a abbot ouir þam.  Þe toþir maner þan ere ermitis and reclusis, godis wille bi þam ane at do.  Þe ermitis and þe reclusis þat liuis sua, kenning bi-hus þam haue for to fezte wid þare miht a-gain þe deuil and a-gain þar sinne.  Þanane by-houis þam fezte þam ane, at god es tar best help.  Þe þridde er þa þat in na reul will ga, na hauis na kenning. Als es o þaim at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS25"><HI REND="I">þaim</HI>, i above the line.—<HI REND="I">at</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þat</HI>.</NOTE> saie als þe gold þu may se, þat semis gode and es noht: wen it es forht broht, þan es it als þe lede.  Bi-fore þe werld er þai semande, and fals-like liues, and tines þaire mede, And leris o-gain god of þar abit. þai er unwise; þai desaiue þam-self and oþir baþe.  Þe ferde maner er wel werre, þat nouþer will wone, bot gange  fra stede til stede wil þai, noure wone lange.  <MILESTONE N="4b" UNIT="folio"/>þair aue wille will þai do.  Glutunie luue þai. better es to be stille þan for to speke of þair lif.  Sain benet sais: now wil I blinne to speke of þaim, for it ne helpis noht, &amp; speke of<PB REF="" N="5"/> þa þat liuis in godis ordir.  þat we wid þaim may ga, god gif it us.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="2">
<HEAD>II.</HEAD>
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<P>Abbas qui preesse.</P>
<P>In þis sentence mustirs sain benet wat man az<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS26">MS. <HI REND="I">ar</HI>, for <HI REND="I">az</HI> or <HI REND="I">ah</HI>.</NOTE> at be abot.  Þe abot ah fo[r]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS27">MS. <HI REND="I">fo</HI>; cf. p. 6, l. 18.</NOTE> to wite what his name singnefiis and whi he beris þe curun.  He [ah] at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS28">MS. <HI REND="I">He at</HI>.</NOTE> mustir gode dedis and wel rede and singe in haly kirke, Gode a-saumpil til oþir at giue for to liue riht.  Þe name of þe abot bitakins fadir of maine.  For he sal be in haly kirke in godis stede for to lere his munkis wisdom and charite. He ah na þing at cumande bot þat he may haue warant at god.  Rihtuis ah he at be, and of charite, Als haly writ sais, wis of speche, Of gode cunsaile at þe nede; sua az abot at be.  He sal lere his cuuent þe riht gate, in godis troht þat þai be.  Euer sal be in his þoht þat his munkis be wel lered, þat þai dute god.  Þe abot sal be blamid if þe cuuent mis-ga.  Þa þat ere of ille dedis, he <MILESTONE N="5a" UNIT="folio"/>az at  chasti þam.  þan sall he be quit at þe iugement, And saie wid þe prophete: "Lauerd, I ne hid noht in me þe rehtuisnes of þe.  I bad þai sulde it gete.  Summe hauid me in despit, wen I lered þaim, And did þaire azen wille." Þanne sais saine benet of þaim þat ere unbuxum ogain god, þat þai sall to paine ga. lauerd de-fende us þar-fra.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<P>Ergo cum aliquis suscipit.</P>
<P>Sain benet spekis yet of þa þat sall be abotis: Gode a-saumpil sal he giue, Of twine maner at lere<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS29">MS. <HI REND="I">lers</HI>.</NOTE> his discipilis in religiun in halynes at serue god: baþe in word and dede, baþe to þe simplis and till þe harde of hart. His dedis az at be suilke als he cumandis til oþir.  He bidis þai sall nan euil do.  Yef he kennis gode till oþir, and him-self dos noht sua, God refusis him; Als haly writ sais: "Quare tu enarras &amp;c.;—Whi telles tu mi rih[t]uisnes<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS30">MS. <HI REND="I">rihuisnes</HI>.</NOTE> wid þi muz, and dos it noht?  Dicipline þu hatid, and keste mine wordis obac; þare for-gat tu þe.  In þi broþir ehe þu ses a stra, And noht a balke in þin azen."  Þabot az at loue nane mare <MILESTONE N="5b" UNIT="folio"/>þan oþ[i]r<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS31">MS. <HI REND="I">oþr</HI>; cf. p. 7, l. 26.</NOTE> for his heze kinredin, bot he be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS32"><HI REND="I">be</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE><PB REF="" N="6"/> buxum and religius bot ilkain oþir broþir.  For nede he may do an bi-fore an[o]þer<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS33">MS. <HI REND="I">anþer</HI>.</NOTE> for reuerance, yef he ne will noht ilkain in his ordir, als he takis.  Baþe yung and alde sall halde reul; til a god haue we tan.  Alle sal be louid eftir an in haly religiun, bot if þai bettir do; For þai az at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS34"><HI REND="I">at</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þai</HI>.</NOTE> be louid euin-like in charite, ilkain als tay ere. Scrif[t]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS35">MS. <HI REND="I">Scrif</HI>.</NOTE> sal he do on þaim, þare sinnis for to les. Lauerd, þu giue us sua at do, þat we may cume to þi regne.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<P>In doctrina sua namque.</P>
<P>Sain benet sais þat abot az at lere his cuuent, als sain pol bidis: Blame þat mis-do, a[n]d<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS36">MS. <HI REND="I">ad</HI>.</NOTE> do þam liue riht; chasti þaim fra iuil wne, als þe fadir dos his sune.  Þa þat ere fraward and recles, Lede þaim þe straiter.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS37"><HI REND="I">straiter</HI>?  The fifth character, at the end of a line, is blurred; possibly <HI REND="I">strat/ter</HI> (cf. p. 2, ll. 3, 7, footnotes).</NOTE>  Þa þat er buxum<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS38">MS. <HI REND="I">buzum</HI>.</NOTE> and meke, þai sall haue cumfort.  Yef ani faute be funden in þaim, þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS39"><HI REND="I">þat</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þai</HI>.</NOTE> it be sone mendid.  He sall vmbe-þinke hym of þe prest of sylo, þe ire of god com to, fo[r]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS40">MS. <HI REND="I">fo</HI>.</NOTE> he ne chastid noht hise childir, bot lete þaim in þaire wille.  Þe gode sall he chasty wid word and amonesce þaim.  Þat er prude and kene, þai sall be chastid wid  wand.  For it is writen <MILESTONE N="6a" UNIT="folio"/>þat man sall chasti þaim: "Percute filium &amp;c.;—Smite þi sune wid þi wand, and make him meke, and deliuir his saul fra paine."  Lauerd, þu deliuer us fra paine.  Amen.</P>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<P>Meminisse.</P>
<P>Ay, sais sain benet, þabot az at þinke þat, wat his name es.  Þe mare he hauis in pouste, þe mare hauis he at yelde.  Abot az at be wis; greueus þing es hym bi-taht: Þe sauls for to gete, And mony þing for to wite.  Wid summe sal tu faire speke, and summe gete wid chastiment &amp; haue þam under wand, and lere þaim ilkain eftir þar maner wid resun.  Þan þar þe noht be calanged of þe cuuent þat es undir þe, þat es giuin [þe] at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS41">MS. <HI REND="I">giuin at</HI>; cf. p. 7, l. 2, and p. 41, l. 15.</NOTE> yeme.  Þurȝ þe dute þat þai haue þe ioy of god, may þai ler at serue<PB REF="" N="7"/> him to will.  For nan erþelike<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS42">MS. <HI REND="I">er þe like</HI>.</NOTE> pouste az he at for-gete þe sauls þat es bitaht him at yeme.  Þe tresur of god er þai. Resun sal he yelde to god of þaim.  Yef þu be of litil uresun, be of riht trouz, and here what haly boke sais: "Primum querite regnum dei—First sal tu seke godis rengne and his rihtuisnes, þan sall þing multeplii þe." He þat made þis salme sais: <MILESTONE N="6b" UNIT="folio"/>"wha sua liuis riht, þai  sal haue na ned.  Nichil de-esse—Na þing sal faile þaim þat wil luue god."  Þabot az at under-stande of þe sauls he hauis at yeme, þat he sall yelde resun of þaim.  Loke þe numbir of his cuuent: Als well az he to yeme þaim als his azen saul, yef he wil be sauf.  Þan he for oþir sal ancewer swa, full riht az he at ga, And mende him in dede.  Þe mare he mendis his cuuent, Till mare ioy sall he be sent, til god at take his mede.  Lauerd, giue us sua at liue, þat we may yelde þe resun for us-self at þe day of dome. Amen.  Qui uiuis &amp; regnas.</P>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="3">
<HEAD>III.</HEAD>
<P>De adsc[i]endis ad consilium sororibus.—Quociens aliqua.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS43">MS. <HI REND="I">adscendis</HI>.—<HI REND="I">Quociens aliqua</HI> fills up the blank at the end of Chapter II, thus apparently preceding the heading of the next chapter.</NOTE></P>
<P>Sain benet mustirs in þis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS44"><HI REND="I">þis</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">his</HI>; cf. the beginnings of most chapters.</NOTE> sentence Hu þabes<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS45"><HI REND="I">þabes</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þabas</HI> with an e over the second a.</NOTE> sal take hir cunsale.  Scho sall calle þe cuuent to-gidir and muster þaim þe nede, and loke whilke sais best resun, and proue þair wit sua.  Þan ilkain hauis said þair auis, Þat es best, halde þar-to.  Sua bidis haly writ, þat alle be cald til cunsaile, yung and alde, in hali religiun; For ofte sendis god resun til þe yunge þat a-noþ[i]r<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS46">MS. <HI REND="I">a noþr</HI>.</NOTE> ne can noht. Þat all consentis <MILESTONE N="7a" UNIT="folio"/>to sal nan gain-saie, bot halde it in  obedience.  Als te decipill es at his maister cumandement, Als sal þabes consent til þaire cunsale þat resun es. Alle sal folihe þe maister of þe reule, baþe yung and alde. Þat nan folu þair ahen wille, ne nan bere þaim sua heze, þat tay striue ogain þair abes.  Yef any sal take discipline, gruching sal sho make nane, bot halde þe cumandement.<PB REF="" N="8"/> Þe dedis of þabbesse sal be in þe dute of god, for sho [sal] be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS47">MS. <HI REND="I">sho be</HI>.</NOTE> set til resun of all hir iugemens and of al hir dedis bi-for god, þat es rihtuis of iugement.  Þar es priue cunsale be at do, þe alde sal sho calle þar-to; Als haly writ bidis: "Omnia<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS48">MS. <HI REND="I">Omnis</HI>.</NOTE> fac cum consilio—Alle þing do wid cunsale, and eftir þe dede sal þe noht mis-like."  Lauerd, we pray þe þat we may suilke cunsal take, þat we may do þi wille.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="4">
<HEAD>IV.</HEAD>
<P>Que<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS49">MS. Quo.</NOTE> sunt in-strumenta bonorum operum.—In primis dominum.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS50"><HI REND="I">In primis dominum</HI>, cf. the footnote on <HI REND="I">Quociens aliqua</HI>, p. 7, l. 18.</NOTE></P>
<P>In þis sentence spekis sain benet, and mustirs til his cuuent what þaire god dedis ah at be.  First sal ye luue god wid al yure herte and wid al yure saul and wid al yure uertu, And ti prome als ti-self; sua ah ye at do.  Man <MILESTONE N="7b" UNIT="folio"/>ah ye noht at sla; na to licherie ga; Na til þifte; Na cuuatus;<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS51">MS. <HI REND="I">Na cuuatus</HI> twice.</NOTE> Ne bere fals witnes, bot onur alle men; &amp; do til na man bot als tu walde man did to þe; And leue þin ahen wille, and foliz godis wil; and halde þe in<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS52">MS. <HI REND="I">þein</HI>.</NOTE> chastite, and iuil langingis do away; luue fasting; þe pouir help bi-for þe ga; þat ere nakid claþe; wisit þat er seke; þe dede winde and til eryd bringe; Sahtil þat ere wraze; And uncuþe be wid þe dedis of<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS53">MS. <HI REND="I">þe dedis of</HI> twice.</NOTE> þe werld; luue god ouir alle þing.  when þu es in ire, heuin þe noht; þar-of cumis ille ending.  Halde na feluni in þi harte; Ne giue na fals pes; Charite felle þu noht; Iuil for iuil sal tu noht do, Ne wrang to na man; Til god uengance fallis it.  Yef ani do yu wrang, ye sal take it in pacience, Als hali boke cumandis.  Ye sal luue yure enemis &amp; striue noht ogain þam, ne banne þam noht, bot blisce þam and suffir iugement.  Ye ne sal noht be prude in herte; Ne ete our-mikil; Ne drinc ouir-mikil; Mesurlike slepe; Ne be noht slau, Ne gruchande; In god al yure trouz, and  ful of <MILESTONE N="8a" UNIT="folio"/>charite; And yef ye finde ani gode in yu, till god sal þe louing be, and grace til him giue.  ye sal dute<PB REF="" N="9"/> domis-day And te fir of helle; And haue god trouz til þe lif þat lastes ay; And ilke day þat ye þinke o-pon þe ded; And haue bi-fore yu þat god in alle stedis may se; wicke þohtis do oway þat to yu cume, and bide þaim ga forz, and quite yu wid scrift; And gete yure muþes fra unait wordis; haly lescun bliþelike here; And clene uresun for to lere; wid teris and wid sizing knau yure sinne, sua sal ye amende yu o-gain god; leue þe wille of yure fles, sua sal ye yure sinnes les.  þat yure abes cumandis yu, sal ye do, and be not þar-o-gain, Als ure lauerd bad his deciplis; his cumandement do noht oway; luues chastite and kaste pride oway; loke ye do sua.  þe alde men sal ye onur, þe yunge luue in god; And pray for yure enmis; and for-giue þaim þaire fautes þat mis-do ogain yu.  yef ye be wrad þan þe sune rises,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS54">MS. <HI REND="I">sunerises</HI>.</NOTE> make pes are it ga to rest.  þat ye ne falle in na mis-hope, bot in godis trouz to liue.  þis is þentendement of haly kirke for to wirke godis wille; <MILESTONE N="8b" UNIT="folio"/>þan sal it come be-for us at þe day of  dome; he giuis us ure mede.  God giue us þat ilke mede þat he hizte til hise freendis, þat nan eye may se, ne erin here, ne herte forz telle, what god hauis graid til þa þat luues him.  [L]uues haly kirke and yure cloister; þanne<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS55">22 ff. On this page several rubrics were never entered in the blanks left for them.  On the preceding pages the usual red strokes in the black letters are entirely wanting.</NOTE> may ye do godis wille.  [L]auerd, giue us sua þir cumandemens at do, þat we may cum to þi ioy!  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="5">
<HEAD>V.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence spekis sain benet of obedience, what it is at saie.  [Þ]at es te<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS56">MS. <HI REND="I">este</HI>.</NOTE> firste mekenes: wid-uten duelling til þat man bidis yu do.  [M]eke bi-houis yu be for þe luue of god, for he mekid him for yu.  [M]eke yu to godis seruise in hali kirke and do yure miht þar-to, þat ye may fle þe fir of helle and cum til heuin-rike; þare es faire at be.  [Þ]at yure abes cumandes yu at do, þat ye do it suiftlike; als god cumandis: "Ob auditu &amp;c.;—[Þ]urz þe wordis ye here o me, þan ah ye at be meke"; als yure maistiresse leris yu, als it sais: "Qui uos audit—<PB REF="" N="10"/> wha sam heris yu, þan heris me."  for þi sal ye understande þaim: þat of mekenes wil lere, þai sal here þe cumandemens, and do als man bidis þam.  ye sal leue  <MILESTONE N="9a" UNIT="folio"/>yure ahen propir will, and do oþir mens.  þoz ye be in labur, and yure maistires cumande yu at do a-noþir þing, ye sal laie it dune, &amp; do þat scho bidis; þan er ye buxum under reule.  ilkain sal take discipline at oþir, als hir mastiresse þoz scho ware, in þe dute of god.  ye sal wne yu til strate gate, for þe luue of god; Als ure lauerd sais: "Angustia &amp;c.;—Straite gatis toke I me for to giue yu a-saumpil at liue."  ye ne sal noht liue in yure ahen wille, bot giue yu til mekenes.  ye sal do oþer mens wille, yef ye wil cum to god.  Þa þat wil liue in cuuent, þai sal haue maistiresse ouir þam for to yeme þaim, þat tay foliz þe wordis of god, als he sais: "Non veni &amp;c.;—I ne come not in-til erþe for to do mi wille, bot my fadirs þat me sent."  þat es godis wille, þat ye foliz yure ordir, and luue til yure prome, and do with-uten gruching þat yu es cumandid.  þe mekenes þurz god ye can, als he sais him-self: "Qui uos audit—þat heris in yu,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS57"><HI REND="I">yu</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">me</HI>.</NOTE> þai here me."  For þi bi-houis þe decipils do þe mekenes, als þai haue tane to; þat es godis wille.  þoz þu gruche, þe cumandement sal be haldin.  And yef þu gruches &amp; dos  þat ilke þing, god es noht paid þar-of; <MILESTONE N="9b" UNIT="folio"/>for he ses ty herte, &amp; for ty hauis þou no mede of þat þing þat tu dos gruchande; for þi sal tu quite þe wid scrift; ye, it bi-cimis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS58"><HI REND="I">bi-cimis</HI>, see Notes.</NOTE> yu.  lauerd gif us sua meke at be, þat we may halde ure ordir, and syne cume til þe ioy þat lastes ay.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="6">
<HEAD>VI.</HEAD>
<P>Sain benet spekis in þis sentence of silence, how ȝe sal it halde.  he bidis þat ȝe do als þe prophete sais: "kepe ȝour tunge, it sp[e]ke<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS59">MS. <HI REND="I">spke</HI>.</NOTE> no scaþe, &amp; ȝour lippis fra iuil, &amp; kepe ȝow fro dedly synne."  for þi sal ȝe seldin speke, for ȝe sal speke nan unat, ne vse yow noht þar-to. &amp; in oþir stede es writen: "Mors &amp; uita &amp;c.;—In þe pointe of þe tunge es lif &amp; ded."  loke wheþer ȝe wil take to.  þe maistires aw at speke for to lere hyr dicipils wisdom.  þe decipils sal here þar lesson &amp; understand it.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="7"><PB REF="" N="11"/>
<HEAD>VII.</HEAD>
<P>yet</P>
<P>Of mekenes spekis sain benet in þis sentence, &amp; sais with hali scripture:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS60"><HI REND="I">scripture</HI>, i above the line.</NOTE> "Omnis qui se exaltat &amp;c.;— þaþat heyes þam, þai sal be mekid; &amp; þai þat mekes þam sal be heyed."  vre lord saide þat it es pride in þaim þat hyes þaim.  Til mekenes he bides yu se, &amp; say als þe prophete saide, when he spac til ure lauerd with muþe: "Domine, non est &amp;c.;—lauerd, my hart es not heyid in me, ne min eyen.  Mikil o me ne held I noht to praise me-self.  yef I leuid at se to mekenes &amp; heyid me, My lauerd munde do <MILESTONE N="10a" UNIT="folio"/>to my saul als þe barne þat is done  fra his modir milke ouir-arlike."  Mikyl walde he fle pride, þe prophete, als hali writ sais.  Yef ye wyl be hezid, lokes þat ye be meke, And make yure stize to he heuin wid yure gode dedis, þat iacob saz slapande: he saz gode wid his angels cume dune and vp in þe stede þare he lay.  yef ye wil se to mekenes, þare sal ye be hezed, and gang vp wid þat stize.  þat bitakins, þan þai com dune, ye sal be lazed, yef ye be prude; and tan þai yede vp, þat ye sal be hezed, yef ye to mekenes can se.  Þe stize betakins vre lif here.  þe stize hauis tua tres, bitakins þe body and te saul, ayþar at helpe oþir.  þe stelis bytuixe bitakins oure gude dedis, þat sal bere vs vp to god. þe tres betakins mekenes to goddis seruise and vnder discipline.  Lauerd, we prai þe for þi misericorde þat we mai sua yeme þis reul o mekenes, In þe felazscap of þin angels þat we may be.  amen.  Qui viuis &amp; regnas deus per omnia secula.</P>
<P>Sain Benet sais þat te dedis of mekenes ere ful suete; sua kennis he us; And sais þat ye sal haue firste þe dute of god, þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS61">The first <HI REND="I">þat</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þa</HI><HI REND="sup">t</HI>.</NOTE> ye liue sua, þat ye be noght for-getil and fle evil dedis, And tat ye recorde wel þe cumantemens of god.  Loke þat ye fle sinne, <MILESTONE N="10b" UNIT="folio"/>yef ye wile cume to þe  ioy of heuin fra þe pines of helle; þat yure wyl be euir at gete yu fra scaþe; þat ye gete yu fra iuil þohtes, yure tunges fra iuil speche, yure eyen, yure hend, yure fete fra vnait gate, fra iuil wylle; And scere o-way al þe langing of yure fleis.  God ses al yure þoght and al yure dedis.<PB REF="" N="12"/> þe angel þat here yemis yu dos hym at wit all yure dedis; sua sais te prophete.  Alle yure þohtes may he se; And whyder þai wyl lede yu,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS62"><HI REND="I">yu</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">ye</HI> (or <HI REND="I">þe</HI>).</NOTE> resun sal ye yelde of þam.  for þi ah ye at gete yu fra iuil þohtes, þat ye may cume to þe ioy of heuin.  god gyf it us!  amen.</P>
<P>Of propir wyl spekis sain benet; and ye sall do it als god bidis in haly writ and sais: "Et a voluntatibus—Turne yu fra yure wille and gete yu fra iuil; þan may ye liue in pais."  Of yure ahen wylle sall ye blinne, al þat wil do yu sinne; Als it is wrytyn: "Sunt vie que—þe rihte gate, it es til þe lyf þat lastes ay."  þa gates sal ye fle þat wicke men gas to hell by.  for þi ar þai rotyn þat folyzed wicke wylle; hauid tay na bettir mede.  sua sal yure antente be, þat god may se al yure wylle; Als te prophete sais.  He sais: "all his langing  es by-fore god."  for þi <MILESTONE N="11a" UNIT="folio"/>es gude þat ye doe o-way yure wicke dedis &amp; þohtes; þe dede is set to chasti þaim. for witte ye wele þat god may se baþe iuil and gude; es noght hyd be-fore hym.  God lokis ut of heuin in-tyl erþe tyll hise at visit þaim, and lokes yef man askys hym ohte.  For þi lokys þat ye do wel, þat yure angel may do yure nedis to god of al þat ye haue nede.  And getes yu wel, yure fautes be noght musterd by-fore god. Lauerd, þu do vs sua at liue, þat we may deliuir vs of al vre fautes, And siþin to ioy cume.  Amen.</P>
<P>Þe toþir maner o mekenes is, sais sain benet, For to hate yure ahen propir wyl, And fulfil noght yure langing, bot do godis wylle, and his desire fulfille; Als him-selfe sais: "Non veni &amp;c.;—I ne cume noght for to do my wille, bot my fadirs þat me sent."  And in odyr stede sais he: "Voluntas habet &amp;c.;—Wille he hauide paine at do, at haue þe curune þat lastes ay, als it was hys wille." Lauerd, we pray þe þat we may sua halde þis mekenes, þat we may do þi wille.  amen.</P>
<P>Of þe þridde maner o mekenes spekys sain benet to þa in his reul wyl be, And bidis þat ye sal be meke vnder yure abbes and do godis seruise; Als ta-postil saide of godis sune, þat he was meke riht tyl þe ded.  God  giue vs þat <MILESTONE N="11b" UNIT="folio"/>we may sua be.  amen.</P>
<P><PB REF="" N="13"/>Of þe ferþe maner o mekenes spekys sain benet, hu ye sal meke yu of þingis þat yu þinc es igainis yu, þat fallis to yure ordir.  yef man dos yu ani wrang, ye sal take it in pacience, and noht fle þar-fore, ne leue yure gode dede; Als haly boke sais: "Qui perseuerauerit &amp;c.;—Wha sua wel wirkis til endyng, þai sal be sauf of alle þing"; Als þe prophete sais: "Confortetur &amp;c.;—ye sal haue cumfort in yure hertis of god."  For þi sal ye be of pacience, for þe luue of god, of þing þat es o-ganis yure fleis; Als te prophete sais to god: "Lauerd, we ere ilke day, for þe luue of þe, in þe dute of dede als te shep þat ere driuin to ded, for we folih þe; bliþelike we suffir it, for we sal haue mede of þe"; Als haly writ sais: "Probasti nos &amp;c.;—Lauerd, þu prouis vs here als te siluir þat es brind; þu did vs in þe lay and noy opon vre bak."  for we sulde lere vnder maistires hu we sulde liue; Als te letter sais: "Inposuisti &amp;c.;—Ouir vs hauis þu don men," þi wylle at fulfille.  Þa þat ere vnbuxum, þai sal be done to paine.  Of þaim spekis sain paul, and sais þat tay ere fals.  Þai caste þair mantil and rennis a-mise.  þat bytakins, þai sal liue here bot <MILESTONE N="12a" UNIT="folio"/>a while.  Alle be blisced þat weris taim.  God  giue vs sua meke at be, and sua his wille at do, þat we his ioy cum to.  amen.</P>
<P>Of þe fifte maner o mekenes spekis sain benet for to lere hys sistirs hu þai salle scriue þaim to þair abbes, baþe nunne and sistir.  Loke þat ye be buxum and scriue yu of alle þe sinnis þat ye haue don; Als haly writ bidis yu: "Reuela domino &amp;c.;—Mustir til god al þi gate, &amp; he sal make it in pes."  And in odir stede sais he: "Confitemini &amp;c.;—Knaus to god al yure sinne, for he es of mercy and gude at al nede."  yet sais þe prophete: "Delictum meum &amp;c.;—Lauerd, I mustird þe myne dedis, I ne hid tam noht and alle my herte."  þan ye do þus, þan sale yure sinnes be for-gyvin.  Lauerd giue vs grace sua for to muster vre dedis, þat we may til his ioy cum.  amen.</P>
<P>Sain Benet spekis of þe sexte de-grece of mekenes Til his sistirs, and sais þat ilkain sal halde þaim-selfe lest of alle odir.  And al þingis þat man bidis yu do, þat ye do it mekely, þat resunnabil es. þu sal þinke in þi herte þat tu es vndinge to gode dede; Als þe prophete saide:<PB REF="" N="14"/> "Ad nichilum &amp;c.;—Til na þing es I made <MILESTONE N="12b" UNIT="folio"/>bot for to doe godis wylle.  ic<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS63"><HI REND="I">ic</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">it</HI>; similarly 9 and 10.</NOTE> is like tyl a mere þat beris þat man lais on hir bak."  In what dede sam ye be, loke þat yure þoht and ȝure herte [be] to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS64">MS. <HI REND="I">herte to</HI>; cf. p. 38, l. 7.</NOTE> god almihten.  Lauerd, we praie þe, what sam we do, þat we to þe be broht.  amen.</P>
<P>Sain benet spekis yet til his sistirs of þe seuind degrece o mekenes, and bidis þat ye sal meke yu ilka in-til oþir, baþe mare &amp; lesse, And saie als te prophete saide: "Ego sum &amp;c.;  Ic es wrmis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS65"><HI REND="I">wrmis</HI>, see Glossary.</NOTE> and na man,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS66">MS. <HI REND="I">naman</HI>.</NOTE> And ut-castyng o men.  First was ic hezed, and siþin lazed þur scrifte, and ouir-cumin."  sua sal ye do, &amp; tanne mai ye sai with þe prophete: "Bonum michi &amp;c.;—Lauerd, god it es to me þat þu mekyd me to lere þine cumandemens." God giue vs sua his cumandemens at lere, þat we may cume til his mekenes.  Amen.</P>
<P>Of þe ahtend maner o mekenes spekis sain benet til his cuuent, and bidis þat ye sal do als te reul sais, And als it cumandis, And meke vnder þare maistres in alle þaire dedis.  Lauerd, ye giue vs at halde þis mekenes til þending.  amen.</P>
<P>Sain benet spekis til his cuuent of þe nihend degrece  o mekenes, And biddis <MILESTONE N="13a" UNIT="folio"/>þat ye ne sal noght vse yu tyl mekil speche.  for hali writ spekis þare-of, and sais þat naman may mikil speke, bot yef þare be sinne i-mang, Na naman wil prayse þaim þat es of mikil speche; Ofte speke þai wrang.  Lauerd, þu giue vs sua vre silence to yeme, þat we may serue þe to-queme, in yuþe and in elde.  amen.</P>
<P>Of þe tende maner o mekenes spekis sain benet til his cuuent, And bidis þat ye ne sal noght be ouir-lazand; and þinkes what þe prophete sais: "Stultus in risu &amp;c.;—þe fool turnes hys þoght in-til lazter, and helpis noht."  Lauerd, we pray þe þis resun be halden with vs, and send vs þi wit.  AMeN.</P>
<P>Sain benet spekis yet til his cuuent Of þe ellofte maner of mekenes, And biddis þat ye sal mekely speke when ye speke, &amp; wid-vten lazter, and o fa wordis &amp; stabil, and speke wiselike.  þan þu sal speke to þi felahe,<PB REF="" N="15"/> crie noght o-pon hir, bot faire aske þin erand, als haly boke sais: "Sapiens verbis &amp;c.;—þe wyse man musters hym wid fa wordis &amp; welle sitande."  Lauerd, we pray þe Of þis maner þat we may be.  Amen.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="13b" UNIT="folio"/>Saint benet spekis in þis sentence Of þe telfete maner  o mekenes, And bidis þat ye sal meke yure herte til alle men, baþe to mare &amp; les.  In what labur sam ye be, þoz ye be in þe kirke, Ouþir in þe garde, Ouþir in gate, Ouþir in felde, ouþir what labur sam ye do, þat ye haue yure heuidis enclind to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS67">MS. <HI REND="I">heuid is enclin do</HI>.</NOTE> þerþe, And þeneke<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS68"><HI REND="I">þe/ncke</HI>, originally <HI REND="I">þencke</HI>?</NOTE> on yure synnys for to mende þaim, And tat ye be als rad als ye saz þe iugiment of god, And þinke what þe puplicane saide, when he laide hym by-hinde þe dore, Als te gospel telles: "Domine, non sum dignus &amp;c.;—Lauerd, I ne is noght digne at lifte mine ezin til heuin for mine sinnes."  loke what þe prophete sais til oure lauerd in haly writ: "Incuruatus sum &amp;c.;—Ic is lazed and mekid til alle þat mine ezin se." When ye haue fulfild þis al, þire mekenes, þan sal ye cume til perfite charite, til þe ioy þat god hauis graid til mannis sunis.  Lauerd, graunt it vs, þat we may sua þir mekenes halde, þat we to þi ioy may cume.  amen.  Qui viuis &amp;c.;</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="8">
<HEAD>VIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þe tyme of wintir, þat es fra þe Kalandis of nouembir til þe paskys, als it is forlokyd wyd resun, þanne sal ye ryse at þe aztend time <MILESTONE N="14a" UNIT="folio"/>of þe nyght,  þat it be litil ouir mid-nyght; þan es tyme at rise, als it is set, til godis seruise; And siþin, þe space eftir matins, til sauters and til haly lescuns at here.  Þat es hele of þa þat ere in<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS69">The first <HI REND="I">in</HI> is above the line.</NOTE> sekenes, þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS70">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">t</HI>/<HI REND="I">þat.</HI></NOTE> es at say in sinne.  And fra þe paskis til þe Kalandis of nouembir sal þe tyme be sua set, þat tare be lytil entirual, þat ta þat sal ga til laburs, þat tay may haue þe morning in þe begining of þe lyth to þair labur.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="9">
<HEAD>IX.</HEAD>
<P>In þe tyme of wintir, þan sal þe first vers be at matins: "Deus, in adiutorium"; And in þe toþer tyme þris þis vers: "Domine, labia mea aperies"; at þe<PB REF="" N="16"/> þridde tyme aiont wid þe "gloria patri"; and siþin efter þe nihend-ferþe salme wid þe antefen ouþir wid-vten; and syþin efter þe ymne; And tare-eftyr sexe salmis wid þe antefens.  Wen þai ere said and te verset, þabbasse saie þe benecun; þan sal alle site, And nym þre lescuns, red o-pon þe lettrun, &amp; by-tuixe þe lescuns þre respuns; and eftir þe þridde respun þe vers wid þe "gloria patri," standande alle for þe onur of the haly trinite.  þe boke of þe halizes sal be red, baþe of þe newe lay &amp; of þalde testament, and te exposiciuns of þaim Of oure fore-fadirs þat ware in stabil trouz.  Eftir þe þre lescuns wid þe respuns, Oþir sexe salmis sungen wid alleluia.  And eftir salbe redde þe lescun of þa-postils wid gude deuocion, and te vers,  and siþin þe letanie "Kyrieleison."  And sua <MILESTONE N="14b" UNIT="folio"/>finise matins.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="10">
<HEAD>X.</HEAD>
<P>Fra þe paskis til þe kalandis of nouembir sal be halden a quantite of þe salmis, als is said bi-fore; for þe nihtis er scorte als mikil, þat te þre lescunis be noght red, bot an for þa þre of þalde testament, wid a scort respun; Bot al þe toþir finist, als it sais by-fore, þat na nyht be lesse saide þan tuelue salmis, vt-takyn þe þridde and te nihende-ferþe salme.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="11">
<HEAD>XI.</HEAD>
<P>In þe sunendais es for to ryse arliker, And halde yure mesur o waking; þat es þat ye syng<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS71"><HI REND="I">ye syng</HI> twice.</NOTE> þe sexe salmes and te vers, als is ordainde by-fore, sitande alle wid ordir, and foure lescuns red wid respuns, als es ordainde, and eftir þe "gloria patri"; þan sal alle stande for þe reuerence; And efter oþir sexe salmis wid þe antefens, als by-fore, wid þe werset; And efter oþir foure lescuns wid þe respuns, wid þat ilke ordir by-fore; And tare-eftir þre cantikils of þe prophetis, als te abes stablis, and songen wid "alleluia"; siþin þe verset, and te abes te benicun; And siþin foure lescuns red of þe new lay wid þat ilke ordir by-fore.  Efter þe ferþe Respun, þabbes sal by-gynne þis ymne: "Te deum laudamus."  When it is finist, þanne  sal þabbes by-ginne a lescun of þe <MILESTONE N="15a" UNIT="folio"/>gospel wid honur and<PB REF="" N="17"/> wyd þe dute of god; þan sal alle stande.  when it is red, þe oþir sal say amen; And tabbesse by-ginne: "Te decet laus"; And giue þe benicun, and biginne matins.  Þis ordir sal be haldin euin-like opon þe sundais als wel in sumir als in winter, bot if it sua be, þat ye rise ouir-late; þan may ye make lesse lescun; bot loke þat it be-time yu noht.  Loke þat it be endid wid al þat fallis þar-to.  And yef it fallis yu ani time, On waim þe for-getilnes es on-long sal man take amendis for þat faute in þe kirke.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="12">
<HEAD>XII.</HEAD>
<P>At matins on þe feste-dais, First sal ye saie sexe salmis wid-vten antefens, And siþin þe fyftyd salme wid "alleluia."  wen þai ar said, þe hundred seuintende and þe sextid þe secunde, siþin þe benichune, and a leschun red of þa apocalips wid gude deuocion, &amp; te respun, and te ymne ambrosine, and te uerset, and te antefen of þe gospel, &amp; te letanie, and sent forz.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS72"><HI REND="I">forz</HI>; z has a peculiar shape, reminding of the sign for <HI REND="I">and</HI>.</NOTE></P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="14">
<HEAD>XIV.</HEAD>
<P>In þe haly dais al sal be als we haue bi-fore saide id on þe sundais, Bot þat te salmis and te antefens and te lescuns be saide als <MILESTONE N="15b" UNIT="folio"/>fallis to þe day.  Bot te vse  bi-fore be haldin.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="15">
<HEAD>XV.</HEAD>
<P>Fra þe paskis til þe witsundai salle "alleluia" be saide wid-vten entirual als wel at te salmis als at te respuns.  And fra þe witsunday til þe lentyn sal it ilke niht be saide wid þe sexe last salmis of te nocturne.  Ilke sunday wid-uten lentin sal þe cantikils be said wid "alleluia," Matins, Prime, Vndrin, Midday, Noon; Al be saide wid "alleluia"; Bot te respuns noht Bot fra þe paskis til þe witsunday.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="16">
<HEAD>XVI.</HEAD>
<P>Als te prophete sais: "Sepcies in die laudem dixi tibi—Seuin siþe o-po day saie I louing to þe." Whilke haly seuin syþe er þa þat sal be ful-fild wid vs o þis maner, yef we folih þe vris of god: Of Matins, Of prime, of Vndrin, Of Midday, Of noon, Of euensang, Of<PB REF="" N="18"/> cumplin.  Of þes times sais he: "seuin syþe o-po day saie I louing to þe."  Til þa þat rysis o night and wakis Sais vre lauerd: "My frende, o niht ras I for yu and wakid." For þi sal ye giue louing til hym, in þe iugiment of hys  rihtvisnes,<MILESTONE N="16a" UNIT="folio"/> at matins, at prime, at vndern, At midday, at noon, at euensang, at cumplin; And<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS73"><HI REND="I">And</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">At</HI>.</NOTE> o nith ryse for to loue hym.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="17">
<HEAD>XVII.</HEAD>
<P>Now haue we deuisid þe ordir of þe salmis on þe niht, at matins.  Loke we now tyl þe vris þat folihis.  At prime þre salmis ilkain by þam ane.  Þe ymne of þis ilke vre sal be saide efter þis verse: "Deus in adiutorium meum," Are ye beginne te salme.  when þe þre salmis ere saide, a lescun sal be red, and siþin þe vers, And "Kyryeleison," and finist þe hure.  Vndern, Midday, Noon wid þat ilke ordir be sungen, þat is, wid vers, wid ymnis þat fallis to þaim, þre salmis, and lescuns, and vers, and "Kyryeleison"; And sua finise þe vres.  Þe salmis sal be sung wid antefens, yef þe cuuent be mikil; And yef þai be fa, saie it plane forde.  Bot euensang sal be saide wid foure salmes And te Antefens, And efter þe salmis A lescun, &amp; siþin þe respun, and siþin þe ymne and te verset, þe cantikyl of þe gospel, and te letanie, And syþin þe "Pater noster."  O þis maner sal þe vris be sent forde.  Cumplin <MILESTONE N="16b" UNIT="folio"/>sal be saide wid þre salmis wid-vten antefens, &amp; siþin þe ymne þat fallis þar-to, A lescun, and te verset, &amp; siþin "Kyryeleison," and te benicun, and sent forde þe vris til god.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="18">
<HEAD>XVIII.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet cumandis þat tis þing be haldin, þat yure "Pater noster" be saide hezelike at matins and at euinsang, for þe sclandir þat hauis ben of religiun þat cuþe not noht<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS74"><HI REND="I">not noht</HI>, evidently wrong, possibly for <HI REND="I">not all</HI>.</NOTE> þaire "pater noster."  Ilkain ah at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS75">ah at, MS. ahat to; cf. p. 22, l. 11 and footnote.</NOTE> quite þam of þis vice.  Alle ah at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS76"><HI REND="I">ah at</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">ahat to</HI>; cf. p. 22, l. 11 and footnote.</NOTE> cune þair "Pater noster" þat in religiun wil be als god cumandis. for ye sal vmbeþinke yu what resun fallis to þis vers, when ye it saie: "Et dimitte nobis debita nostra, sicut &amp; nos dimittimus<PB REF="" N="19"/> debitoribus nostris."  Þan prai we þus: "Lauerd, þu forgiue vs ure sinnis, als we for-giue þaim þaire fautes þat hauis mis-don a-gain vs."  When ye here þis vers at matins, ye sal for-giue alle men þaire trespas for þe loue o gode.  And als-sua at euinsang sal ȝe for-giue. for þi wil sain benet þat it be saide hezlike, for alle wrezis sal be for-giuin.  Lauerd giue vs sua at liue, &amp; sua at forgiue, þat we may ga þe riht gate til heuin.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="19">
<HEAD>XIX.</HEAD>
<P><MILESTONE N="17a" UNIT="folio"/>In þis sentence tellis sain benet hu ye sal do yure office,  when ye cume in-to þe kyrke.  Ye sal true þat god may se in alle stedis baþe vyl &amp; gude.  Ye az at say yure seruise als ye stode by-fore god, wyd als gude deuocyon, And think wat te prophete saide: "Seruite domino &amp;c.;—Ye sal serue god wyd ahe, &amp; here hym wyd dowte." And in oþir stede sais he: "Psallite—ye sal singe god wyslike"; Als haly write sais: "In conspectu &amp;c.;—Lauerd, I sing to þe in þe siht of þin angels to loue þe."  loke ye do yure seruise als ye stode by-fore god almihti.  And lokis, when ye sing, þat yure herte acorde wid yure voice; þan sing ye riht.  Lauerd, þu giue vs sua vre seruise at do, to þe felazscap of angels þat we may cum.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="20">
<HEAD>XX.</HEAD>
<P>Sain benet spekis in þis sentence til hys cuuent, and kennys þam how þai sal make þair prayer to god &amp; wid what reuerence.  When ye wyl aske any thing at a ryche man in ertht, ye aske ful mekelike yure erande. wyd mekil mare deuociun ahte ye þanne at pray to god, of whaim þat al þe gude cumis. yure antente sal be þat ye ne sal noght be herde for yure many wordis; bot scort vrisun, <MILESTONE N="17b" UNIT="folio"/>and wyd deuocion, and wyd terys of herte; for þi  sal yure vrisun be breue &amp; clene, Bot yef it sua bi-tide, þat any falle in mis-trouz; þan sal scho pray gerne to god. Bot te cuuent vrisun sal be breue, þat ere in stedfast trouz. Lauerd, we prai þe þat we may suilke vrisun make, þat it be to þi<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS77"><HI REND="I">þi</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þe</HI>.</NOTE> wil.  AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="21"><PB REF="" N="20"/>
<HEAD>XXI.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence spekys sain Benet of þa þat sal be in officis, and bidis, yef þe cuuent be mikil, þat tay sal be chossin þat sal þe officis yeme, And by-kenne it taim þat best can serue god &amp; te cuuent; als tabbesse cumandis taim sal þai do.  Þabbes ah at set nan þar-to bot þat scho is sikir offe, þoz þai be noht þe ordenest, bot þat tay be of clene lif and leel.  Yef any waxe prude in hir office, man sal byd hyr amend hyr Ane tyme, and a-noþir tyme, And þe þirdde tyme.  Yef þai wil noht a-mende sua, man sal do þam ut of þair bayly, And do a-noþir in hir stede, þat man ses es dingne.  Sain benet cumandis, yef priuresse be prudde, þat man sal do sua wid hir.  Lauerd, þu giue vs sua vre office at do and  resun at yelde, þat we may cume til ioy <MILESTONE N="18a" UNIT="folio"/>þat lastes ay. Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="22">
<HEAD>XXII.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet spekys here, and kennis yu hu ye sal slape ilkain in bedde by þam ane, al wid ordir, als tabbesse lokys taym.  Yef yt sua may be, alle sal lie in a hus, þat ilkain wite of oþir.  Yef þe hus be ouyr-litel, summe sal lie in a-noþir huse, ten ouþir tuenty.  Bot te eldest be wyd þam for to yeme þaim. &amp; þat ye haue liht al þe nyht brinnande.  Ye sal lie clad and beltyd. Knyvys sal ye haue nane by yure bed, nouþir gret ne smal.  When þe bel ringis, þat ye be redy, and ilkain help oþir, and ga in-to þe kyrke til godys seruise.  Þe nouice beddis sal be þat nane þaire may nehe oþir; Bytuix þalde þai sal lie.  Man sal wakin þaim faire til godis seruise.  Lauerd giue vs sua for to lie and sua for to rise, þat we may haue þe ioy þat lastes ay.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="23">
<HEAD>XXIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence leris sain Benet hys cuuent hu þaire fautes sal be amendid.  Yef any be of grete herte and wyl noht be buxum, ouþir prud, ouþir ani greuching  make aigain haly religiun, ouþir þe cumandement <MILESTONE N="18b" UNIT="folio"/>hauis in despit, þa þat ere of suilke dedis, Priuelike man sal amoneste þam, þat tay amende þaim. yef þay wyl noht<PB REF="" N="21"/> amende sua, þai sal be broht by-fore þe cuuent and tare amende hir faute.  Yef sho wyl not yet amende, sho sal be cursyd. yef sho be a fole &amp; ful of iuil, and mas na force of þe cursing, sho sal be berid ful wel, and do hir<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS78"><HI REND="I">hir</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">it</HI>; cf. p. 25, l. 16.</NOTE> a-mende it sua.  Lauerde schilde vs fra þat cursing; and yef ani þar-inne be, god for his grace bringe þam vte. AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="24">
<HEAD>XXIV.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence mustirs sain Benet Hu man sal do wid þaim þat es in sentence, &amp; bidis þat man sal do þaim efter þaire faute es.  Yef þe faute be litil, þai sal make þe cuuent at wite and a-ioingne hir þar-eftir.  Wylys sho is in sentence, sho ne sal noht be in cuuent, til it be amendid, In kirke ne salme beginne ne antefin, lescun nan rede. sho sal [ete] when<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS79">MS. <HI REND="I">sal when</HI>.</NOTE> alle hauis etin.  Yef þai ete at midday, sho salle ete at noon; yef þai ete at noon, sho sal ete at euin, als te ordir sais, til sho haue amendid hir faute.  Lauerd giue vs sua vre scrifte at do, þat we may hys rengne cum to.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="25">
<HEAD>XXV.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet spekys in þis sentence til þa þat ere fallen in greuer faute, <MILESTONE N="19a" UNIT="folio"/>Hu þai sal amende.  Þai ne  sal noht cum in þe kirke, na in fraitur, Bot yef þabbesse cumande hir.  Nan sal comun wid hir, Bot an þat es set til hir.  Wid greting sal sho do, and wyd reuþe of herte, þe penance þat es laid on hir; sua salle hir fautes be mendid. for sain paul sais þat þai þat dos wicke dedis, þat tay giue þam-selfe til þe deuil. for þi ah þai at be chastid, þat te saule ga noht til helle.  And ta þat ere in cursing, þai ah at dreze þaire penance wid reuþe of herte and be sari of þair dede, þat te deuil haue na pouste ouir þaim. sho sal ete al-ane suilke als tabes cumandis hir; nan sal blisse hir mete.  Lauerd for his grace, he silde vs fra suilke paine.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="26">
<HEAD>XXVI.</HEAD>
<P>Sain benet sais in þis sentence: yef any sistir ouþir broþir of þordir be sua hardi at comun wid hir, wid-vten cumandement of þabbes, wid speche, ouþir ani<PB REF="" N="22"/> erand sendis til hir, suil[ke]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS80">MS. <HI REND="I">suil</HI>, for <HI REND="I">suilke</HI>, or <HI REND="I">suilk</HI>, or possibly <HI REND="I">suik</HI>; cf. p. 31, l. 32.</NOTE> sentence sal sho haue.  Lauerd for his grace, he gete vs fra þat sen[ten]ce<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS81">MS. <HI REND="I">sence</HI>.</NOTE> and fra alle oþir.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="27">
<HEAD>XXVII.</HEAD>
<P>In al maner, sais sain benet, sal þabbesse ta yeme of  þa þat mis-dose; for þe hale hauis <MILESTONE N="19b" UNIT="folio"/>na mister o miri, Bot te seke hauis mister.  For þi sal sho do als te wyse miri dos, þat wyl hele þe seke.  Priuelike sal sho sende an ordane nunne til hir þat es in sentence at comforth hir, and for to turne hir wylle til amendement and til mekenes, and for to moneste hir þat sho haue reuþe in herte of hir misdedis and riht trouz; Als sain paul þapostil sais: "Mikil charite mustirs he."  al ah at<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS82">MS. <HI REND="I">ahat</HI>.</NOTE> prai for hym.  On alle maner sal þabbes entirmete hir Al maner of sentence at muster til hir sep, þat nan be tint. for wyte sho wel sho hauis vnder-tan þe saules at gede, And noht at striue o-gain þaim.  Bot sho sal haue dute of þat vre lauerd saide wyd þe prophete til þe hirdis of haly kirke: "Quod crassum videbatis &amp;c.;—Þat fat ere, sal ye ta; þat ere febyl let ga."  Þis is at vnder-stande, þat so ne sal noht entirmete hir sua mikil of þa þat ere strang and hale als of þa þat ere febyl and seke.  O þis maner sal þabbesse folize þe saumpyl of Iesu, þe gude herde, þat lefte in þe munte ane wane of a hundrez sep, and yede at seke þis ane þat was want.  When he hauid funden it, sa fain he was; he toke it on his haly schuldirs and broht it til  þoþir.  Þis is at vnderstande <MILESTONE N="20a" UNIT="folio"/>þat he lefte in heuin þe felascap of angels and com in-til erþe at laite þe man þat was tint; sua mekyl pyte hauid he of hym, þat he þurz his haly grace by-com man &amp; bar manes kinde til þe felazscap of angels til paradis, where-in Adam fel for hys synne. Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs grace sua at wirke, þat we til þat felazscap may cume.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="28">
<HEAD>XXVIII.</HEAD>
<P>Sain benet sais: yef any be tane ofte in faute, and sho be cursid, and wyl noht yet amende, wyd smerte beting sal sho be chastyd.  Yef sho wyl noht o<PB REF="" N="23"/> þis maner a-mende, bot wid pride defende hir dede, þan sal þabbes do als te sleze miri: wen sho hauis laid hir plaisters and hir vinemens wid faire wordis and te medicinis of haly writ, and cursid hyr, &amp; berid, And may noht helpe do hir best, þabbes &amp; al þe cuuent sal pray for hir to god, þat he make hyr hale.  Yef sho may noht be hale of þat maner, sho sal be done oute of þair felahscap; Als te apostil sais: "Auferte malum &amp;c.;—Do a-way þe wycke fra yu."  And in oþir stede sais he: "Infidelis &amp;c.;—yef so be vnleel, do hyr A-way." for a wicke shep may spille al þe flok.  Lauerd, yef it be þi wille, þu <MILESTONE N="20b" UNIT="folio"/>gete vs fra þis sentence. </P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="29">
<HEAD>XXIX.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence sais sain Benet þat wha sam es þurz þaire dedis don out of þe kirke and wil cum i-gain, At te begining sal sho haite a-mendement of hir faute warfore sho was don ut; þanne sal so be recaiuid, And don at te laste ende for to loke hir mekenes.  Yef sho gas ut a-noþir tyme, þris shal sho be recaiuid sua; bot siþin wite sho wel es tare<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS83"><HI REND="I">es tare</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">eftare</HI>.</NOTE> na cuming a-gain.  Lauerd for his grace defend vs fra þis vice.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="30">
<HEAD>XXX.</HEAD>
<P>Þis sais sain benet, þat ta þat ere of elde and vnderstandis, þai sal haue þaire mesur; &amp; for þi þe barnis þat ere yunge, þat vnderstandis noht what paine fallis til cursing, when þai misdo, wid fasting ouþir wid smerte beriing sal þai be chastid; þar-þurz sal þai be helid. Lauerd, for yure pite ye gete vs fra sinne, baþe yunge &amp; alde.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="31">
<HEAD>XXXI.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence sais sain benet þat te celeresse sal be chosin of þe cuuent, þat sho be meke, and sobur, and noht of mekil mete, ne prude, ne noius, ne wrangdoande, ne latte, ne wastande, Bot god dutande; Of al þis <MILESTONE N="21a" UNIT="folio"/>sal ye ta yeme.  Wid-vten þe cumandement of þabbes  sal sho na þing do.  Þat sho cumandis hir sal sho do,<PB REF="" N="24"/> bot sho sal [noht] noy<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS84">MS. <HI REND="I">sal noy</HI>.</NOTE> hir sistirs.  Par auenture yef ani man askis hir ohte þat es a-gain resun, sho sal noht for þi haue þam in despit, ne mis-ancewer þam, Bot mekelike saie naie of þaire ful asking.  Ouir al thing sal sho gete hir saul &amp; þincke what ta apostil sais: "Qui bene &amp;c.;—wha sua seruis wel, mede by-fore god sal he haue."  Of þe seke, and of þe barnis, And of gestys, and of þe pouir sal sho take yeme eftir hir miht.  For wite ye wel þat sho sal yelde resun o domes-day of alle hir dedis.  Þe vassels þat fallis til hir mester sal sho yeme als onestelike als te vassels þat ere halized obute þauter. for-getil ah sho noht to be, Ne ouir-mikil haue, Ne ouir-mikil waste of þat fallis to þe huse, Bot alle þingis do wid mesur, als tabbes cumandis hir.  Ouir þat sho be buxum.  And when sho hauis noht at giue, þat sho anscewer þaim faire, als hali writ bidis: "Sermo bonus &amp;c.;—Gode speche es better þan grete gifte"; And do þat tabbes cumandis hir; and tat sho defendis, do it noht.  Sho sal graiþe þe cuuent mete wid-vten greuching<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS85">MS. <HI REND="I">greuehing</HI>.</NOTE> and wid-vten duelling, þat tay  be noht sclaundird; And þincke what vre <MILESTONE N="21b" UNIT="folio"/>lauerd sais in þe gospel of þaim þat sclandirs ani of his barnis: "him ware wel bettir," he sais, "þat a milnestane ware a-bute his hals in þe deppest of þe se."  Yef þe cuuent be mikil, þe celeresse sal haue a felaze at helpe hir, þat sho wid gode wil may do hir labur þat es bitaht hir, þat sho may do in time þat sho ah for to do, þat nan be wre[t]hid<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS86">MS. <HI REND="I">wrehid</HI>.</NOTE> ne noid in godis hus.  Lauerd, for þi merci giue hir sua hir office at do, þat so may haue þanc o god and of þe cuuent.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="32">
<HEAD>XXXII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat tabbesse sal ta yeme of alle þing þat fallis til þe hus, and of vstilement and oþir þingis sal sho<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS87"><HI REND="I">sho</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">mo</HI>.</NOTE> puruaie o lif and ded þat so be sikir, and cumande til ilkain þat sho ses ned at do.  Sho sal haue þam enbreuid, alle þingis þat fallis til þe hus, for to wite what sho recauis and what sho giuis, when sho sal remue þat ere in officis. yef ani haue ille<PB REF="" N="25"/> wroht wid þe þing þat was bitaht þaim at yeme, sho sal be apreuid;<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS88">MS. <HI REND="I">aperuid</HI>.</NOTE> yef sho wil noht mend, þe iugiment sal sho suffir.  Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs wel at yeme þis sentence And alle þe oþir.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="33">
<HEAD>XXXIII.</HEAD>
<P><MILESTONE N="22a" UNIT="folio"/>Of propirte spekis sain Benet, and sais þat of alle  oþir vices sal man fle þis, þat nan be sua hardy, þat tay o-way do ne giue na þing wid-vten leue of þabbesse, ne þat nane haue þing in propirte, boke ne tabils, ne nan oþir þing; for nan may haue þair ahen body at hys wylle ne at tair pouste.  þai sal haue alle þingis at tabbes þat tay haue nede of.  þai sal haue na thing bot þat tabbesse deliuirs taim.  Þat ane hauis sal be comun til alle; Als haly boke cumandis: nan sal calle þat tay haue þair azen.  Yef it be an þat delitis tam in þis vice, And wil not do it, Man sal saie til hir an time, and a-noþir time, and te þridde.  Yef so wil noht amende sua, Man sal do hir amende on oþir maner.  Lauerd, for þi pite defende vs fra þis vice.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="34">
<HEAD>XXXIV.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat tabbes sal do als ta-postils did at te begining of cristiante: þai departid þair þing til þa þat hauid nede.  "þai departid," als hali writ sais, "til ilkain, als tay hauid ned." sua salle þabbes do.  sho salle noht loke what man he es and of what kinredin, Bot te sekenes of ilkain, and do þam efter þat tay haue ned.  til god sal sho yelde grace, and noht be sari of <MILESTONE N="22b" UNIT="folio"/>hir gifte þat so hauis giuin til þa þat hauis mare  nede þan sho.  Tyl þe nedful sal sho meke hir for in ire sekenes, And noht bere hir heze for þe helpe þat god hauis lent hir; And o this maner sal al liue in pais.  Ouir al þing sal þai loke þe wicke þat ere imangis þaim; and yef þare be ani funden, wid smerte beriing sal þai be amendid. Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs miht at fle al iuils.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="35">
<HEAD>XXXV.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence bidis sain Benet þat ye sal serue sua, þat nan be quit of þe seruise of þe kichin, Bot yef þai be acumbird wid sekenes ouþir wid odir laburs; for<PB REF="" N="26"/> man sal haue grete mede for þat seruise.  Til þa þat ere febil sal ye finde helpe and cumforth,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS89"><HI REND="I">cumforth</HI>, r above the line, t apparently expuncted.</NOTE> þat tay ne serue noht wid ouir-mikil noye.  Al sal haue comfort eftir þat þe cuuent is mikil, and efter þai ere in ese to serue.  Yef þe cuuent be mikil, þe celeresse sal be quit of þe seruise of þe kichin, And ta þat ere acumbird wid laburs.  Þis oþir sal serue al wid luue.  Þa þat ere out of þaire wuke sal opo þe setirday ma þe maunde, and waisse þe tuailis þat tay sal wipe þaire hend opon and taire fete.  Þa þat ga ut of þe wuke, and te toþir þat cumis in, sal waisse þe oþir fete  at te <MILESTONE N="23a" UNIT="folio"/>maunde.  þe vassels þat tay serue wid, sal þai ta yeme to, &amp; yelde þame til þe celeresse clene and hale; and sho sal loke what sho yeldis &amp; what sho recaiuis.  Þa þat serue o þe kichin sal miste bi-fore þe mikil mete bred, butter, þat tay may serue wid-vten gruching and wid-vten noy.  And so þat gas vt of þe wuke, and so þat cumis in, sal recaiue þe benichun at morne at matins.  Sho þat gas ut sal say þis vers þris by-for þauter, and al þe cuuent eftir: "Benedictus es."  Þan so hase rechaiuid þe benichun, þan sal þe toþir, þat sal serue eftir hir, cume by-fore þauter and saie þis vers þris, and alle þe cuuent eftir: "Deus, in adiutorium"; And siþin rechaiue þe benichun, þat god giue hir grace at serue þaim to pay.  Lauerd, for þi grace giue vs sua at serue, þat we may [haue] vre<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS90">MS. <HI REND="I">may vre</HI>; cf. p. 37, l. 4.</NOTE> mede of þe.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="36">
<HEAD>XXXVI.</HEAD>
<P>Of þe seke spekis sain benet in þis sentence, And cumandis ouir al þing þat man sal ta yeme of þaim, þat tay be serued als it ware god him-selfe.  For he sal say on domis-day: "I was seke, ye visit; þat ye did til an of myne, ye did it me."  Bot tay sal recaiue in þe onur of god þe seruise þat man dos tam; þai ne sal noht þurz  þair surfait noy þaire sistirs þat seruis tam.  Bot <MILESTONE N="23b" UNIT="folio"/>yef it sua be, þat taire iuil be sua mikil, man sal suffir þaim þe mare and be of pacience, for of þaim sal man haue grete mede of god.  Þabbesse tal ta yeme of þe seke þat tay haue na defaute.  A hus sal þai haue bi þam ane.  And tat so þat sal serue þam dute gode, and do hir miht for to<PB REF="" N="27"/> serue þam wel and wid luue.  Þai sal haue at ete alle timis þat tay haue mister of; bot til þe hale, þat mai wel ete, and til þe yunge sal man giue latter.  Þe seke þat ere febil sal man giue fleis at ete at couir þam wid-al.  Þabbes sal do hir antente to þe seke, þat tay haue na defaute for þe forgetilnes of þe celeresse and of þe fermerier; For sho sal a-mende al at tay misdo.  Lauerd, for þi merci gete vs fra alle iuils of body &amp; sal.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="37">
<HEAD>XXXVII.</HEAD>
<P>Of þe alde &amp; of þe barnis spekis sain benet in þis sentence, And sais þat taire elde prais þat man sal giue þam charite, als te reule es set to þaire mete; bot mikil pite birs man haue, þat tay sal ete ar þe oþir.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="38">
<HEAD>XXXVIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain benet þat te lescun sal noht faile at mete.  O þis maner sal þis be stabilist, þat nan ta þe boke at <MILESTONE N="24a" UNIT="folio"/>rede bot sho þat sal rede al þe  wuke; sho sal beginne o-po þe sunday.  sho sal cum by-fore þauter o þe sunday efter þe messe and say þris þis verse, and al þe cuuent eftir: "Domine, labia mea aperies," And recaiue þe benediccion, þat gete hir fra pride.  Þai sal halde silence at te borde, þat na uoice be herde bot of hir þat redis.  Þa þat serue sal ta yeme til þam þat etes, þat tay haue na defaute of þat tay sal haue, wharfore þai make na noise.  Yef <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS91">The subject (<HI REND="I">ani</HI>, or the like) is omitted.</NOTE> wil aske ani thing, sho salle make sinis and noght speke.  Nane sal speke of na demande in þe lescun, whar-of noise may rise.  Bot tabbesse, yef sho wille, sho may breuelike,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS92">Possibly the verb <HI REND="I">speke</HI> is omitted before or after <HI REND="I">breuelike</HI>.</NOTE> a sentence for to amende.  sho þat sal rede sal miste ay litil, be-fore sho rede, þat sho ne be not ouir-mikil engreuid.  Ye sal ordain nane for to rede bot þat can do þe ofice, þat may pai al þat it heris. Lauerd, for his grace, he giue vs sua for to rede and singe, þat we may pai hym and al þat vs heris.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="39">
<HEAD>XXXIX.</HEAD>
<P>Of þe mesur of þe mete spekis sain benet in þis sentence, And sais þat it es inoh, twane maner of<PB REF="" N="28"/> potage al þe wuke in þe tweluemonez, what tyme sam<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS93">MS. <HI REND="I">sain</HI>.</NOTE>  ye ete, at midday ouþir at none, þat tay þat may <MILESTONE N="24b" UNIT="folio"/>noght ete of þe tane, lat þaim ete of þe toþir.  þir tua mese sal þai ilke day haue.  Yef þai haue whar-of, þe þridde<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS94">MS. <HI REND="I">þrid de</HI>.</NOTE> may þai haue of frute ouþir of oþirkin felazscap.  A lafe of brede mesurde es inoh o day baþe at none and at euyn. Yef þai sal supe, þe celeres sal take þe þridde parti of þe lafe &amp; laie it by-fore þam at te super.  Yef tabbes ses þai haue mikil trauaile, yef scho wil, scho may mende þam; Bot gete þar be nane owtrage, þat nane be costiue, ne nane oþir wil, þurz surfait o mete.  for na þing es<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS95">MS. <HI REND="I">þinges</HI>.</NOTE> als mikil igain cristen men als gluterie; sua sais vre lord: "Videte &amp;c.;—Loke yure hertis be noght noyd þurz gluterie o mete ne drinke."  Til barnis sal man noht giue sua mikil als til þalde for to gete mesur ouir al.  Of þe beste þat beris foure fete sal nane ete bot ta þat ere seke and febil. Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs sua mesur-like at ete, þat we alle wils o bodi &amp; saul mai fle.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="40">
<HEAD>XL.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence spekis sain Benet Of þe mesur o drink, and sais þat ilke man hauis propir gifte o god in al maner; And for þi stabelis sain Benet with mikil doute þe mesur of oþir mens liflade.  Na-for-þi, for þe  febilnes <MILESTONE N="25a" UNIT="folio"/>of þa þat may noht for-bere, hauis he for-lokid til ilkain a mesur of wyne of þe day, Ouþir suilke als tabbesse may furde; þe mesur es callid eminan; þai ne mai noht haue bot mesurlike anis þar-of.  Þa þat may be of abstinens, mede of god sal þai haue.  Yef þam by-houid mare ouþir for trauaile ouþir for hete, In þe forloking of þabbesse sal it be.  Bot sho sal loke þat þai ne be not ouir-ful ne drunkin.  We rede þat wyne, ne na drinke þat wil make man drunkin, ne feris noht til men of religiun. for þi þat te tyme is sua þat ye ne mai noht al for-bere, for þi consentis sain Benet þat ye drinke ay litil, bot noht sua mikil þat ye be ful; for ouir-mikil drinke dose man ofte do folie.  Yef it be ani þat dar noht drinke hir mesur, þai sal grace god and gruche noht.  Ouir alle þinges loke ye<PB REF="" N="29"/> ne be noht gruchande of na þing.  Lauerd, for þi pite gete vs fra gruching and fra ouir-mikil drinke, sua þat we mai haue þi grace.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="41">
<HEAD>XLI.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence sais sain Benet þat ye sal ete twise of þe day ilke day fra þe haly paskis til þe witsunday; and siþin til þe <MILESTONE N="25b" UNIT="folio"/>hali rodis dai in semtembir, Al þe  wukis in þe summir,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS96"><HI REND="I">summir</HI>; one of the four downstrokes required to make <HI REND="I">-mi-</HI> is missing.</NOTE> sal ye faste ilke wuke tua dais, þe wedenisdai and te fryday, bot yef ye haue mikil trauaile, ouþir feeste-day, ouþir it be mikil hete; þan relesses sain Benet yu þe fasting of þa tua dais, Als tabbesse forlokis. sua sal sho ordain and a-tempir al hir þingis, þat þe saulis of hir disciplis mai sauf be; And at tay do wid-vtyn gruching þat tay sal do.  Fra þe haly rodes day til þe lentyn sal ye fast ilk day, bot if it be for heze feste.  Fra þe beginning of lentyn til þe paskis sal ye ete eftir euensang, bot it sal be sua, þat yu ne þarf na candil, bot al be don by day alle tyme, baþe when ye faste and when ye ete tuis.  sua sal þe time be sett.  Lauerd, for þi grace giue vs sua at be of discreciun baþe of fastyng and of mete, þat we mai be sauf.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="42">
<HEAD>XLII.</HEAD>
<P>Of silence eftir cumplin spekis sain Benet in þis sentence, and bidis þat ye sal do yu payne at halde silence eftir cumplin.  yef þe cuuent etis tuise, Als tite as tay rise fra þe supere, þan sal þai site wid ordir in þe cloistir.  when colaciun ringis, þan salle alle asembil in þe chapitir.  an <MILESTONE N="26a" UNIT="folio"/>sal rede þe lescun of þe halizis, ouþir  of haly writ, for to comforth þaim þat it heris.  In þat tyme sal ye noht rede þe boke of þe kingis, for nan vnait sal be herde þat tyme for þa þat ere of febil þoht; In oþir tyme mai it be red.  yef it be fasting day, þai sal haue gode entirual, And when colaciun ringis, Alle þat þe belle heris ga til to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS97"><HI REND="I">to</HI>, for <HI REND="I">te</HI> (= <HI REND="I">þe</HI>)? or redundant (= <HI REND="I">til</HI>)?</NOTE> colaciun; And siþin eftir at cumplin; siþin be nan sua hardy to speke. yef ani es tan wid-al, þat hauis brokin silence eftir cumplin, smerte correccion salle man take of hir.  yef gestis cume, and tabbesse cumandis at<PB REF="" N="30"/> speke, þat tare be nane vtrage.  Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs miht at halde þis sentence als sain Benet cumandis.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="43">
<HEAD>XLIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence spekis sain Benet of þa þat cumis late til þair seruise o god and til þe borde.  Als tite als te belle es herde, ilkain sal leue þe werke þat es in þaire hende, and rinne hastelike til þe ure<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS98">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">e</HI><HI REND="I">ure</HI>.</NOTE> of god, þat na man may telle foly to þam.  For na þing sal man leue þe seruise o god.  þa þat cumis noht at te begining of matins by-fore þe "gloria patri" of þe "Venite," sal noht ga in-til þaire  stalle, bot sho sal ga til þe grece by-fore þe <MILESTONE N="26b" UNIT="folio"/>autir, þat tabbes mai se and al þe cuuent; þare sal sho be til þabbes giue hir leue at gange in-til hir stalle.  And for þi wil sain Benet þat ta þat cume late ga til þe grece, þat tay haue shame of þair faute and sua salle be amendid.  for suilke mai it be þat duellis, þat þai wil slape, Ouþir þinke vnait, whan þat þe deuil mai finde a-chesun in þam; for þi shal sho ga to þe grece for to amende hir faute, þat sho amende hir siþin forward.  At te huris als-sua, yef sho ne cumis noht by-fore þe "gloria patri" of þe first salme, sho sal ga to þe grece and cum noht in hir stalle, are þabes cumande hir; Bot sho sal haue nane oþir penance for þat faute. At te verse by-fore þe mete sal alle be asembild at te borde; sho þat is noht tar-at, for hir neccligence man sal say til hir ane tyme, and a-noþir tyme.  Yef sho wylle noht a-mende, sho ne sal noht ete wyd þe cuuent, bot by hir ane, and þarne hyr part of þe drinke, suilke als te oþir haue, til sho haue amendid hir faute.  Als-suilke sal sho haue þat es fra þe vers eftir þe mete; for þi es it forlokid, þat ta þat er noht at te vers sal ga til þe grece bi-fore  <MILESTONE N="27a" UNIT="folio"/>þe dese at say hir verse and aske leue at ete; siþin mai sho ga at ete in hir ordir.  Nan sal ete ne drink bot at te tyme þat oþir ete, bot yef it be wyd leue.  Yef þabbesse offirs ani þing til ani of hir sisturs and sho refuse it, when sho walde haue it, man salle noght giue it hir, Til sho haue amendid hir faute.  Lauerd, for þi grace giue vs sua at yeme þis sentence and al þe oþir, þat we til þe ioy of paradise mai cume.  AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="44"><PB REF="" N="31"/>
<HEAD>XLIV.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence kennis sain Benet vs what amendement þai sal do þat es in cursing, þat es don owte of þe kirke for greue faute and owte of þe fraitur.  At ilke owre, when þe belle ringis, sal sho lie by-fore þe kirke dore til alle þe cuuent be cumen in, And siþin rise vp and obied wid-vten þe kirke dore to þe vre be sungen.  When þe cuuent cumes forz owte of þe kirke, sho sal lie dun agayne by-fore þe dore til þai be passid.  Þus sal sho do ilke day til þabbesse bidde hir leue.  When sho sal be asoilid, sho sal cume in-til þe chapitir and take hir veine by-fore þabbesse and crie hir merci.  When þabes asoiles hir, sho sal falle til hir fete, &amp; siþin by-twixe tua and tua o knees, and take <MILESTONE N="27b" UNIT="folio"/>hir veine.  Þan salle sho site þar þabbes  cumandis hir, bot noht in hir ordir; bot sho ne salle noht by-ginne in kirke antefin ne Respun, ne rede lescun, Bot yef þabbes cumande hir.  Eftir "Benedicamus" at ilke vre sal sho take hir veine on knes, whare sum sho standes in þe quer.  þis sal sho do ay til þabbes cumande hir at leue of þat penance. sho þat es done owte of þe fraitur for lesse faute, In þe kirke sal sho amende o þis maner: At ilke vre, when þai say "Kirieleison," sal sho take hir veine by-fore þe auter at te grece, &amp; ligge þare til þe "Benedicamus" be saide. sua sal sho do til þabbes asoile hir, And recaiue þe benecun.  Lauerd, for þi pite giue vs sua at mende vre fautis, þat we may haue þi benicun.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="45">
<HEAD>XLV.</HEAD>
<P>Sain benet cumandis in þis sentence þat ta þat faile in þe kirke at te minning of þe salmes, Ouþir of þe Respuns, Ouþir Antefens, Ouþir lescuns, At te erþe sal sho take hir veine by-fore þam al. yef sho wil noht do it, Greuer correccion sal man take of hir, for sho walde noht with mekenes amende hir faute.  Þe barnis sal man chasty wid wande for suik mis-dede.  <MILESTONE N="28a" UNIT="folio"/>Lauerd, yef it be þi wil,  giue vs welle at halde þis sentence.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="46">
<HEAD>XLVI.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet sais: þa þat ere in laburs, In kichin ouþir in calgard, in gard ouþir wid-vten, in ani labur, and sho trespasse, Tinis þingis ouþir brekis, yef sho misdo,<PB REF="" N="32"/> o þis maner sal sho amende: sho sal cum in-til þe chapitir bi-fore alle þe cuuent and take al hir veine, And knaw hir faute wid hir azen wille.  Yef sho hydes it, and a-noþir sais hir owte, Greuer correccion sal man take of hir þan sho hauid mustird it wid hir azen wille.  Yef it be priue sinne þat wille a-noy þe saul, sho sal ga priuelike til þabbesse and schriue hir, Ouþir til a preste þat kan hele hir of hir sinne.  Lauerd for his grace giue vs sua at schriue vs, and sua at mend vre sinne, þat we til his rengne mai ga.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="47">
<HEAD>XLVII.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet cumandis in þis sentence þat þabbes sal take gude yeme þat þe vris of godis seruise be finist right baþe day and niht.  Ouþir sho hir-selfe sal finise þam, Ouþir set a nunn in hir stede þat wil ententiuelike do þe office o god.  Þe salmes and te antefens sal þai biginne eftir hir wid ordir.  Nane sal be don til þat office  bot þat may singe and <MILESTONE N="28b" UNIT="folio"/>rede welle, þat alle þat heris be edefied þer-of.  sho þat þabbes cumandis þis office, wid mekenes sal sho do it, And stabelike wid-vten pride, And wid þe dowte of god.  Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs sua for to singe and rede, þat we mai do þi wille.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="48">
<HEAD>XLVIII.</HEAD>
<P>Of þe trauaile spekis sain Benet in þis sentence, and sais þat vnait sete es il to þe saule.  For þi salle ye trauaile times, And in þe times at lescuns, als it es ordaind.  Fra þe paskis til þe Mihelmesse, when matins es done til heze vndirn sal ye wirke, ilke day when time es, þat es nede to do.  Fra vndirn to midday at lescuns. Eftir midday, when þai haue etin, sal ye reste in yure bedde alle wid silence.  Yef any wille þat tyme loke lescun, loke þat sho rede sua, þat sho ne noy noht þe oþir. Noon sal be rungen by tyme, And siþin wirke til euensang. Yef þai haue mikil at do, corn at gadir and oþir laburs at do, þai salle noht gruche for þi; for þan liue ye right, yef ye liue wid þe labur of yure hende, Als haly men did bi-fore yu, &amp; ta-postils; bot mesurlike sal ye wirke for þa þat ere febil.</P>
<P><PB REF="" N="33"/>Fra þe feeste of þe Mihthel til þe lentin, when prime is sungen til vndern salle <MILESTONE N="29a" UNIT="folio"/>ye studie in lescuns.  fra vndern til noon salle ye wirke suilke as ye haue at do. When noon ringis, ilkain sal lay downe þat es in þaire hende, and ga til þe kirke; And eftir mete til lescuns ouþir salmes.  In lentin, fra prime til heze vndern sal ye entende yure lescun, And syþin wirke til noon.  At te bigining of lentyn sal be broght in-til þe chapitur alle þe bokis, and ilkain take þaris &amp; rede it ouir.  Þabbesse sal loke a simpil nunne ouþir tua for to ga imangis taim atte timis þat tay sal saie for to loke þat nane site vnait, And for to loke wilke attendis mare til vnait þan til hir lescun. Þa þat ere funden suilke, for þi þat tay do iuil til þamselfe and til<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS99">MS. <HI REND="I">and til</HI> twice.</NOTE> oþir als-sua, þai sal be warnid ane tyme, and a-noþir time.  Yef sho wil noht a-mende, Man sal take suilke amendis of hir, þat te oþir be warnid þurz hir.  At te timis þat es set efter euensang til lescuns, þa þat ere acumbird wid laburs sal noht studie on þe sundais, ne on þe oþir feste-dais, Bot toþir alle at lescuns.  Yef it be ani þat mai noht studie ne rede, Oþir labur sal þai do, þat tay ne sitte noht al dom.  Þa þat ere noht in ese, man sal giue þaim sum þing at do, þat tay ne sitte noht vnait, Ne þat tay ne be noght <MILESTONE N="29b" UNIT="folio"/>ouir-mikil greuid wid trauaile; þabbes  sal loke þaire sekenes.  Lauerd for his pite giue vs sua to wirk, and sua vre lescuns at vnderstande, þat we at te ende til heuin be broght.  Amen.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="49">
<HEAD>XLIX.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence kennis vs sain Benet how we sal gete þe tyme of lentin.  Alle timis of þe yer, he sais, sulde we wid rihte halde þe liflade o lentin, bot faa it es þat te vertu mai haue.  And forþir<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS100"><HI REND="I">forþir</HI>, "further," originally <HI REND="I">for þi</HI>, "therefore," Lat. "ideo."  The i was written above the line and easily changed into the abbreviation-mark for <HI REND="I">ir</HI>.</NOTE> cumandis he þat we sal in lentin gete vre lif in alle þing, þat we mai amende vre fautes of oþir times in þe dais of lentin.  Þan may ye sauflike liue, yef ye gete yu fra alle ille vices, And yef we do vre entente til vresun wid teris And til lescuns wid reuþe of herte and wid abstinens.  In þa dais sal we here sumþing of godis seruise mare þan we do an noþir tyme,<PB REF="" N="34"/> And priue vresuns, and o mare mesur of mete and drinke. Ilkain salle, wid þaire ahen gude wille, Offir sum þing to god mare þan þai es cumandid, wid þe ioy of þe haly sprite; þat es, ye draze yu mare fra mete and drinke, &amp; fra slepe, and fra speche, And fra gabbingis, þat ye mai haly paskis o-byde wid ioy of spiritel langing. bot ilkain  salle mustir til þabbesse what ye wille offir to god, <MILESTONE N="30a" UNIT="folio"/>wid yure azen wil, of vresuns; for yef ye ne do it wid leue of yure spiritel fadir, ye ne sal haue na mede þar-offe, bot turne yu to vanite.  For þi sal ye do als tabbesse cumandis yu at do.  Lauerd, for þi merci giue vs sua þis haly lentyn at yeme, þat we mai wid ioy of þe hali spirit hali paskis obide.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="50">
<HEAD>L.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat te sistirs þat ere in labur fer fra þe kirke, and mai noht cume in time til þaire vris, þabbes sal cumaunde þaim o þis maner, þat whare sam þai wirke, þat tay do godis seruise And taire veinis in þe dute o god.  And als-sua þa þat aier by þe gate, þai ne sal noht leue þe vris þat ere stablist, bot sua als tay mai, sai þaim And yelde god his seruise.  He giue vs for his grace, þat we mai yelde þe seruise þat we ah til hym.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="51">
<HEAD>LI.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet spekis of þa þat ere sent owte ani erand and sal cum o-gain þat ilke day, þat tay ne be noht sua hardy at ete owte, þoz man pray þaim, Bot yef þabbes giue þaim leue; yef þai do, þai sal be cursid.  Lauerd for þi, yef it be his wille, he kepe vs fra cursing.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="52">
<HEAD>LII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat þe ortorie be  nane oþir þing þan it es <MILESTONE N="30b" UNIT="folio"/>cald.  Of na þing sal it serue bot for to aure, man to god, inne.  When þe vris of god es done, þanne sal alle ga forth and make reuerence to god.  Yef any wille dwelle for to make priue vrisun, sho ne sal make noise for to sturbe þe oþir, Bot simpelike gange in and make hir vresun wid teris and wid reuþe of herte, And noht wid heze voice.  Þa þat wil noht do, þai ne sal noht dwelle eftir in þe kirke for to noy þe oþir.<PB REF="" N="35"/> Lauerd for his pite giue vs sua for to cuntaine vs in þe kirke, þat nane be desturbid for vs.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="53">
<HEAD>LIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat te gestis þat cumis to yu be als faire kald als it ware god hymselfe. for he salle say at te day of dome: "Hospes fui &amp;c.;—Í was geste, and ye recaiuid me."  Alle sal man comunlike recaiue, And men of religiun and pilgrims. Als tit als te gestis cume, þe priuresse ouþir a-noþir nunne sal gange againis tam wid luue &amp; charite.  Yef it be sistir, first sal þai anure to-gidir and siþin kis; bot bi-fore þe vre sal þai noht basse for þenticement of þe deuil.  Allekin mekenes sal man muster til þe gestis.  Ilkain, when þai ga and when þai cume, sal alure<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS101"><HI REND="I">alure</HI>, probably corrupt; see Notes.</NOTE> to-gidir ouþir wid þe heuidis ouþir <MILESTONE N="31a" UNIT="folio"/>wid al þe bodi, and Iesu crist sal aure  þam.  When þai ere rechaiuid and aurid, þabbesse sal sitte wid þaim, ouþir a-noþir nunne, wilke<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS102"><HI REND="I">wilke</HI>, i omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> sam sho cumandis, þat can speke wid þaim o godis lay for to comfort þaim and speke of man-hed.  Þe fasting sal þabbesse breke for þe gestis sake, yef sho will, Bot yef þe fasting be for hez feste, þat sho ne may nan gate breke; bot toþer sal foliz þe reule o fasting. þabbesse sal giue þe gestis water til þaire hende, And waisse þaire feet, And alle þe cuuent wid hir.  And siþin sal þai sai verse: "Suscepimus, deus &amp;c.;—Lauerd, we haue recaiuid þi merci I-middis ti tempil."  And ay ta yeme of þe pouir and of þe pilegrimis, for þai er kald godis men, And to þe rike als-sua baþe for aze &amp; for honur. þabbesse kychin and of hir gestis sal be bi it ane, þat te gestis þat cume noy noht te cuuent.  In þat kichin sal tua sistirs serue, þat tay may do þe office þat apendis þar-to.  Yef þai haue mikil at do, man sal finde þam helpe; And when þai haue lesse at do, ga til oþir laburs, whare sua man cumandis þam.  Þe howse to þe gestis sal man biteche a sistir at yeme þat dowtis god; sho sal puruay þat tare be beddis inne; sua sal godis howse be ordaind.  Wid þe gestis salle <MILESTONE N="31b" UNIT="folio"/>nane speke bot  þai þat hauis leue.  Yef ani sistir metis þam, mekelike sal<PB REF="" N="36"/> sho aske þair benicun and siþin passe forz, yef sho hauis na leue for to speke wid þam.  Lauerd for his grace giue vs sua for to herberz his gestis, þat we may herber wid him in þe ioy of heuin.  AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="54">
<HEAD>LIV.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat nane be sua hardy at recaiue lettirs ne erand þat cumis fra þair frendis, ne fra nane oþir man, ne noht recaiue giftis bot þurz þe leue of þabbesse.  Yef hir be sente ani þing fra hir frende, sho sal noht recaiue it, ar sho haue leue &amp; musterd it þabbesse.  Yef sho giuis hir leue at recaiue it, In þabbes pouste salle it be at giue whare hir þinke.  Bot wrez hir noht þat te þing es sent to; And yef þabbesse giuis it til a-noþir, loke þat sho ne wrez hir noht þat te þing es sent to, wharefore þe deuil finde a-chesun in hir; yef sho dos, þe reul of discipline sal sho fele.  Lauerd giue vs sua at yeme þis sentence and al oþir, þat te deuil finde nan achesun in vs.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="55">
<HEAD>LV.</HEAD>
<P>Of þair claþing spekis sain Benet in þis sentence, and  sais þat man sal <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS103">A verb seems to be omitted, possibly <HI REND="I">giue</HI> or <HI REND="I">puruay</HI>.</NOTE> clazing <MILESTONE N="32a" UNIT="folio"/>til ilkain eftir þat tay ere, and eftir þe temprance es of þe cuntre.  In caald cuntre es nede of warmer hend.  Þis sal be forlokid þurz þabbes.  Of þe culur of þe clad, na of þe mikilnes, sal nane speke, bot take suilke als man may finde in þe cuntre and of liht chepe bie.  Þabbesse sal loke þat tay be riht mesurd.  When þai ta þe newe, þan salle þai yelde þalde for to giue to þe pure.  Tuinne paire claþis sal ilkain haue for to scifte and for to waisse; yef þai haue mare, it sal be scorn.  Þair beddis sal þabbes ofte ripe, þat tay ne haue na propirte.  Yef sho findis ani þing wid-vten hir leue, wid greue discipline sal it be amendid; And for þi þat it es vice of propirte, sal it be scorn als þifte.  Þabbes sal giue til ilk-ain<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS104">MS. <HI REND="I">ilk ani</HI>, for <HI REND="I">ilk-ain</HI> or <HI REND="I">ilk-ane</HI>.</NOTE> als tay haue nede.  Þabbes sal ta yeme of þis sentence of þe dedis of þe apostils, þat sho depart til ilkain als tay haue mister.  Sua sal þabbes ta yeme of þe<PB REF="" N="37"/> sekenes of þe nedful, And noht to þe wikke<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS105"><HI REND="I">wikke</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">wilke</HI>.</NOTE> wille of þenuius.  In alle hir iugement sal sho umbe-þinke hir what mede sho sal haue at god.  Lauerd giue vs sua at do, þat we may haue owre mede of hym.  AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="56">
<HEAD>LVI.</HEAD>
<P><MILESTONE N="32b" UNIT="folio"/>Sain Benet sais þat te Abbes bord sal be ay wid  gestis and wid pilegrimis.  When sho hauis nane gestis, sho sal take wilke of hir sistirs sam sho wille; bot þat sho leue in þe fraitur an ordene nunne ouþir tua þe ordir for to gete.  Lauerd giue vs welle at gete oure ordir.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="57">
<HEAD>LVII.</HEAD>
<P>Yef þare be any þat can any labur, wid mekenes sal þai it do, als sain Benet cumandis, þat tabbes cumaundis taim at do.  gyf þai auantis taim of þair werke, for þi þat sho þinke sho dose gude tille þe howse, sho sal be don owte of hir mister, til sho haue amendid hir faute, yef sho wille noht be buxum til þat þe abbes cumandis hir at do.  Yef any makis any þinge þat sal be salde, Loke what it is wrz, þat ye ne sette na felun price þar-on.  And ȝe vmbe-þinke yu of ananie &amp; of sapher his wife, þat salde þaire lande in þe tyme of þa apostils; þai helde a partie of þe price, and a-noþir partie broht by-fore þa apostils; and sain petir was parcaiuid of þe tricherie, and askid þam why þai made propirte of þat þai <MILESTONE N="33a" UNIT="folio"/>hauid done in comun;  And tai felle baþe dede downe.  Mikil dowte birde þam haue þat dose in þing þat fallis til hali kirke, þat taire sauls suffir na dede, als te cors dose here.  In þe price of þe þing þat ȝe salle selle, loke þare be na cuuaitise inne; bot bettir chepe sal ye selle þan þe men of þe werld dose, þat god may be payde of yure sale.  He giue vs for his grace þat we may sua wirke and sua selle, þat he be payde þar-of.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="58">
<HEAD>LVIII.</HEAD>
<P>When any wymmen of þe sekil, sais sain Benet, cummis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS106"><HI REND="I">cummis</HI>; instead of the four downstrokes required to make <HI REND="I">-mi-</HI> there are five; the same inaccuracy occurs p. 40, l. 25.</NOTE> at aske þordir, man salle noght ligh[t]-like<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS107">MS. <HI REND="I">lighlike</HI>.</NOTE> gif it tam, þe entre, bot man sal do als ta-postil sais:<PB REF="" N="38"/> "proue þaire hertis, yef þai be to god."  yef sho be stabil in hir asking, And haitis for to suffir alle þe uiltez þat man wille put hir to, Efter þe fifte day sal sho be recaiuid in-til þe howse, And don in-til þe celle with þe nouicis. Þare sal sho studie and ete and slape.  suilk yeming sal sho haue, þat te saule be turnid to god allemihtye; And ta yeme to hir for to loke yef þe spirte be to god, and yef  sho dose hir entente to godis seruise, And buxum, <MILESTONE N="33b" UNIT="folio"/>and of suffrance.  Man salle muster hir harde þinges and smerte, þe riht gate to god.  Yef sho euir haitis stabilnes, eftir tua wukis sal hir be red þis reule of þordir, And saye to hir: "þis es þe rihte gate whare-inne þu salle life.  Yef þu may halde it, cum inne; and yef þu ne may, ga forz al deliuir."  Yef sho obidis yet, when sho is prouid o many maners, þan sal man rede hir þe reule, þat sho may wite witerli whar-to sho salle halde hir.  And at te tuelmonethes ende, when sho hauis herde þe reule þris, yef sho haitis for to halde it welle, all þat man cumandis hir, þanne sall sho be recaiuid i-mang þe cuuent.  bot witte sho welle, fra þat day forward may sho noht gange owte, Ne þe life of þe reule fle, ne caste it fra hir nek; For sho hauid bi-fore laiser for to gange owte.  When sho sall make hir professe, In þe Kirke bi-fore þame alle sal sho haite stabilnes and buxumnes, by-fore god and alle his haliȝes.  Þat sho euir-mare brekis þat cuuenant, witte sho welle þat god sal damne hir with-owtyn ende.  Þis þing  salle sho write with hir awne hande; And <MILESTONE N="34a" UNIT="folio"/>yef sho canne noht write, pray ane of hir sistirs; Bot sho hir-selfe sal make þe singne of þe croice, and lay it on þauter, And siþin say þis verse: "Suscipe me &amp;c.;—Lauerd, þu recaiue me, and I sal liue als te wordes es of þe; þat es myne entent, þat I confundid be noht."  at þis verse sal alle þe cuuent ansewere hir þris; and siþin "Gloria patri" at te laste.  When sho es blissed, Fra þat time forward sal sho be calde in cuuent.  Yef sho hauis ani katel, parte it i-mang þe pouir, Ouþir make offrand til þe kirke, þat sho ne halde na þing by-hinde; For fra þat day forward sal sho haue na pouste of hir Awne body.  Hir clathis þat sho broth sal man restore þe kirke with-alle, þat sho fra þat day forward haue na wille at gange owte of þe kirke þurȝe enticement<PB REF="" N="39"/> of þe deuil.  Þe bref of hir professe sal sho noht haue, bot in þe kirke sal be gete.  Lauerd for his grace giue vs herte and wille in owre ordir to duelle.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="59">
<HEAD>LIX.</HEAD>
<P>When any riche man of þe sekil, sais sain Benet, Offirs his doȝtir til god and til haly kirke, And þe childe be yunge, þat it ne kan noht aske þe peticiun, hir frendis <MILESTONE N="34b" UNIT="folio"/>sal aske for hir.  And when þai offir hir hande,  þai salle winde þe tuaile þar-a-bowte of þauter.  And tanne sal þai suere þat þai ne sal neuir mare, ne na man þurz þaim, o na maner giue þing to þe childe, ne sende, whare-þurz þat þe childe haue wille to propirte.  Bot yef þai wille ani almus do til þe kirke, do it al opinlike, þat þai wil giue.  Yef it be lande, and þai wil halde it þaim-selfe, þai sal make chartir, and yelde ilke ȝere þe ferme þat þai may liue with-alle.  And sua sal ȝe do wid alle þe þing þat fallis propirlie til þe child, þat na þing bi-leue with hir frende, whare-þurz þat sho haue wil til propirte; Sain Benet hauis te sperance of þoþir.  And on þis ilke maner sal þe pure man childe be offird: simpelie make þaire peticiun, and bi-fore whitnes offir þaire childir.  Lauerd for his grace giue þat we may wel gyde þe offerande þat owre frendis made of vs.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="60">
<HEAD>LX.</HEAD>
<P>Yef ani preste, sais sain Benet, prais ȝerne for to be recaiuid in-til þordir, ȝe ne sal noght hastelie graunt it hym.  Bot yef he duellis in his asking &amp;<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS108">MS. <HI REND="I">&amp;</HI> / <HI REND="I">and</HI>.</NOTE> <MILESTONE N="35a" UNIT="folio"/>prayis ȝerne, Man sal muster him alle þe disciplines of þe  reule, þat he salle yeme with-owtyn reles; þat it be done als it is writin, And say til hym: "Amice, ad quid venisti—Frende, wharto es þu cumen?"  Bot toȝ-wheþir sal þe howse be grauntid him, And recaiue benicun, and singe his messe, yef þabbes cumandis him.  And yef it sua bitimis, þat he ne wyl noght lere na sience, þe reule of discipline sal he fele; for he sulde giue oþir ensampil of mekenes.  Yef þar be ani labur at do in þe kirke, Of him sal man ta yeme what he dose, when he is entird in; And noght for þat he es preste and þai haue done him reuerence,<PB REF="" N="40"/> be vnbuxum.  Yef any clerke desiris to ordir, o þat ilke maner at be in felaȝscap, þai sal be done in mene stede, O þis maner, yef þai haite for to holde þe reule of discipline and stabil dwelling.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="62">
<HEAD>LXII.</HEAD>
<P>Yef þabbes prais for preste ouþir for dekin at be ordainde til hym-selfe, He sal loke, þat þai be dingne þer-to at be preste.  He salle fle pride &amp; leue alle  ille vices, ar he be preste.  And þat <MILESTONE N="35b" UNIT="folio"/>he do na þing bot þat man cumandis him to do; And yef he do, he sal be vndir þe reule of discipline.  Ne þat he for-gete noht þe ordir þat he hauis tane, na þe reule of obedience ne of discipline, And euir auance hym in godis seruise, And þinke þat he ne come noht to þe kirke, bot til godis seruise. And yef þe cuuent wille, &amp; þabes consentis þar-to, þai mai auance hym for þe godenes of his life.  Loke þat he neuirþe-later halde þe reule of stabilnes baþe in and owte in gudenes.  And if he oþirgate dose, and wil noht be buxum, bott rebel, whilk<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS109"><HI REND="I">whilk</HI> appears entirely out of place; cf. Notes.</NOTE> man salle repreue hym ofte.  Yef he wil noght sua amende, Man salle muster hym til þe bisschope. Yef he ne may do him amende, Man sal muster his fautes alle opinlie, and do him owte of þe kirke, yef he be prowde, þat he wil noght be buxum vnder þe reule of haly kirke.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="61">
<HEAD>LXI.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence leris sain Benet vs, how we sal recaiue þe vncunyng nunnis þat cummis<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS110"><HI REND="I">cummis</HI>, cf. p. 37, l. 32, footnote.</NOTE> owte of fer landis.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS111">MS. ferlandis.</NOTE> Yef sho wille als geste wne in þe kirke, and folow þe  custume als sho findes, <MILESTONE N="36a" UNIT="folio"/>And noy nan þat langes to þe kyrke with hir surfait, bot simpelike recaiue þat sho findis, sho salle be recaiuid ay to whilis þat sho wille dwelle.  Yef sho mustirs ani resun &amp; with luue, þabbes sal quaintelike drahe hir to hir, and þanc<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS112">MS. <HI REND="I">þane</HI>.</NOTE> gode þat hir sent.  yef sho wille þar stabilnes make, loke þat wille be noht refusid. And als-sua, yef man may persaue, to whilis þat sho es geste, þat sho es surfaitus &amp; il maner, Man sal noght felaȝscap with hir, bott faire and swetelike latte hir ga, þat<PB REF="" N="41"/> toþir haue na shame of hir.  Yef sho be of gude maner, Man sal noht abide hir asking for to duelle, Bott man sal prai hir at dwelle, þat þe toþir mai be amendid þurȝ þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS113">MS. The second <HI REND="I">þe</HI> twice.</NOTE> sampil of hir; For in alle stedis may man serue god.  Yef þabbes ses hir life be suilke, sho may do hir in heȝer stede, if sho wille, þan hir ordir askis.  Bot loke þe abbes þat sho knaw hir wel þat sho sal halde in þe kirke, Ouȝir ȝurh hir abbes ouþir þurȝ hir lettirs.  For hali write cumandis þat þu sal do to na man<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS114">MS. <HI REND="I">na</HI> / <HI REND="I">man</HI>.</NOTE> bot als þu walde man did to þe. Lauerd giue vs welle at gete þis cumandement<MILESTONE N="36b" UNIT="folio"/> And alle  þoþir.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="63">
<HEAD>LXIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat ilkain be with order als þai cume in, And als tabbes stablis þaim eftir þat þair lif es. þabbes sal noht greue þe cuuent, þoȝ þai be giuin hir at yeme, Ne deliuir pouste haue nane for to giue of þe þing þat es stablist in comun, Bott vmbe-þinke hir þat sho sal yelde resun of alle hir iugement til god. als tay ar ordainde, þat tay be stablist and gang in comun. Þai ne salle noht tine þaire ordir for yuȝhed; For samuel and daniel, when þai where barnis, þai demid þe alde men. alle sal be als þai cume in-til þordir, bot ta þat tabbes heȝis ouþir laȝis for a-chesun. sho þat cumis at te secunde owre of þe day sal be done with hir þat cumis at þe first, O what elde sam sho be.  Til þe barnis salle man halde discipline.  Þe yung salle onur þalde, and þe alde salle lufe þe yunge.  Nane sal calle oþir by þaire name, bot þe priures sal calle þaim hir "sistirs." Þabbesse, for sho es in godis stede, sal be callid "dame," noht for þe heȝnes þat sho es abbes, bot for þe onur of god.  Loke þat sho <MILESTONE N="37a" UNIT="folio"/>do  sua, þat sho be dingne at recaiue þat onur.  When ane metis a-noþir, þe yunger sal noht sitte bi hir, bot sho haue leue; for hali writ cumandis, þe yunger sal onur þelder. Þe barnis sal þinke on þaire ordir with discipline in kirke and in fraitur; with-outyn and with-in, in alle stedis, sal þai haue geting &amp; chastiing.  Lauerd, for þi mercy giue vs welle at halde þis sentence and euir þi wille do.  AmeN.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="64"><PB REF="" N="42"/>
<HEAD>LXIV.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet leris vs in þis sentence, how we sal chese vre abbesse.  Suilk resun, he sais, sal man loke at þe lecciun, þat sho be ordene and þat al þe cuuent consentis to with þe dute of god.  Sho þat þe haler partie of þe cuuent chesis, þurȝ gude life and wisdom sal sho be chosin. Yef it sua be, þat alle þe cuuent chesis ane þat wil consent til þaire vices, þe abbotis þat es þare, and þe folke of þe cuntre, sal defende þat tat felun lecciun be noht forth broth. Bott suilk sal þai take þat can guuerne godis howse and  dingne es þar-to.  And witte þai wel, <MILESTONE N="37b" UNIT="folio"/>þai sal haue gude mede, if þai do it for þe lufe of god, And sinne, yef þai leue.  Þe abbes, when sho es ordainde, sho salle vmbeþinke hir what charge sho hase recaiuid, And þat sho sal yelde resun of alle.  witte sho wele þat mare bi-houis hir studie for to auance hir cuuent, þan maistri for to haue. sho aȝht at be wise in goddis law, þat sho draȝe til witnes baþe to þe new law and til þe alde testament.  Chaste aȝht sho at be, and sobir, &amp; ful of pite, And euir heȝe þe misericorde of god ouir hir iugement, þat god do þat ilke with hir.  Ille vices salle sho hate, and luue hir sistirs.  In hir pouste loke þat þare be nane vtrage in, Ne þat sho ne chaste nan sa fellike, þat þai fle ne falle in wrang trouȝ. Þabbesse salle gete hir welle hir-fra, And euir haue hir aȝen misdede bi-fore hir siht.  Sho salle noht suffir þe beli pipe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS115"><HI REND="I">beli pipe</HI>, see Notes.</NOTE> be brokin; þat when sho seis ani of hir sistirs be chargid with sinne, sho salle noht greue hir<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS116"><HI REND="I">greue hir</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> sua mikil, þat sho fle a-way, bot sho salle be besy more to be luuid þan  to be dredde.  sho sal <MILESTONE N="38a" UNIT="folio"/>nott be trubellus, nor angri, nor ouir-obstinate, nor iolyose, nor ouir-suspiciose, for þan sal sho neuir haue reste. sho sal be wice &amp; discrete in hir commandmentis, þat þai be ouþir efter godde or efter þe worlde. sho salle discerne and temper þe werkis whilk sho invinis to be done, thynkyng<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS117">MS. <HI REND="I">thyngyng</HI>.</NOTE> a-pon þe discrecion of sainte Iacob sayng in þis wise: "If I sulde make my herdis to labur to mikil in walkyng, þai sal alle die on one day."  Therfore sho sal take þir and odir ma examples of discrecion, þe moder of vertues, and tempir and dispone<PB REF="" N="43"/> all thingis sa, þat hir demenance be swylke, þat sisters þat er strang and of gude lyuyng may desire and lufe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS118"><HI REND="I">lufe</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> it, &amp; thay þat er febil may bere it; and namli þat sho kepe þis present reule in all thingis, that when sho hase welle done hir ministracion, sho may here þe worde of oure lorde whilk þe gude seruande harde, þat gafe corne to his seruandis in his tyme: "Amen dico vobis &amp;c.;—For soth I say to ȝow, godde sall sett hym ouir all his thingis."</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="65">
<HEAD>LXV.</HEAD>
<P>Sothly, ofte-timis it happins þat be <MILESTONE N="38b" UNIT="folio"/>þe ordinance  of þe prioresse greuus sklaunders rysis in monesterys, whils þer be sum bownyd with þe wikkid sprete of pride, thinkis thame-selfe als gude os thayre abbes, And takis a-pon thame tyranry, and nurischis sclaunders, and makis dissensiones in þe conuente, And nameli in tha places where þe prioresse es ordande of þe same sistir, or of þe abbesse, whilk hase made be-fore þe abbas.  Whilk inconueniens it es ethy to conseyue; for þe prioresse is geuin a mater to be prowd<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS119"><HI REND="I">prowd</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">previd</HI> ("tried").</NOTE> in þe begynnyng of hyr ordinance, when sho is geuyn in mynde be hir awne thoghtis þat sho is lowsid owte of þe power of hir abbesse, be-cause þe same persones made hir prioresse whilk ordanid þe abbas be-fore.  Thoro þat er raysid immonesis,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS120"><HI REND="I">immonesis</HI>, for <HI REND="I">immondesis</HI>.</NOTE> strifis, bakbytyngis, haterede, dissensiones, And werangus ordinansis. And when þe abbas and þe prioresse er of contrary opynion, both thayre awne saules bus nedly be in perel in þat dissensione, And thay alswa þat er vnder thame and fag[n]is<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS121">MS. <HI REND="I">fagis</HI>.</NOTE> both partis fallis in-to grete perel; whilk perel fallis chefly opon thayme þat hauis made <MILESTONE N="39a" UNIT="folio"/>thame-selfe þe  autors of chesyng of þe prioresse.  For þi hauis sain Benet forlokid þat tabbes sal chese whilke sam sho wille, for to halde pese and charite.  Yef hir ordanment<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS122">MS. <HI REND="I">ordannent</HI>.</NOTE> es in buxumnes, alle þingis þat fallis to þe kirke sal be als tabes cumandis, þat an ne be noht prude of þat es getyn til comun.  Yef þe cuuent askis resonabillike and in mekenes, And abbes sese it es nede, þai sal make priuresse, þat sho<PB REF="" N="44"/> be chosin þurȝ þe cunsaile of þa þat dutis god.  When þe priuresse es ordainde, with mikil reuerence sal sho do þat tabbesse cumandis hir, þat sho do na þing a-gain hyr wille na a-gain hir cumaundement. for þe mare þat sho est heȝid ouir toþir, þe mare aȝh sho at halde þe cumandement of þe reule.  And if sho be of ille vicis and prowde, ouþir man may finde þat sho hauis þe haly reule in dispite, sho sal be repreuid foure siþe with worde.  Yef sho wil noht amende, þe reule of discipline sal sho fele.  Yef sho wil noht amende sua, sho sal be don owte, and a-noþir, þat es dingne, be don in hir stede.  Yef sho wil noht be buxum in cuuent, sho sal be done owte of þe kirke til sho wil  amende.  <MILESTONE N="39b" UNIT="folio"/>þabbesse sal vmbe-þinke hir þat sho sal yelde resun on domes-day of alle hir iugementis, And loke þat þe lowe of envie and hateredin ne brenne noht hir herte. Lauerd for his mercy defende vs fra envie &amp; hateredin.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="66">
<HEAD>LXVI.</HEAD>
<P>At þe ȝate, sais sain Benet, sal man do a sister þat can wisdome, And can recaiue &amp; ȝelde answer; þat sho be stabil of worde and dede. by-side þe ȝate sal sho haue chaumber, þat þai þat cum to þe ȝate, alle timis finde hir redi and speke with þaim.  Als tite as ony smitis on þe ȝate, Ouþir pouir crie, sho sal grace god and with buxumnes hastelie ancewer þam and do þaire erand. Yef sho hauis mister of help, man sal finde hir helpe at þe ȝate.  Yef þe howse may forþe it sua, þan sal it be stablist o þis maner, þat þe water, &amp; þe milne, and bakehuse, and breuhuse, and calgard, and al þat ȝe haue mister of, þat al be with-in þe gard, þat ȝe ne haue na nede at sende owte; for þat es noht gude to þe saule.  Þis reule sal ofte be redde imang þe cuuent, þat nane ascuse þam of þis þing  þat þai ne do it.  Lauerd for <MILESTONE N="40a" UNIT="folio"/>his pite giue vs sua at vnderstande þis reule, and siþin for to wirke, þat we may cum til þe life þat lastis ay. god gif it vs.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="67">
<HEAD>LXVII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat whilk sister sua man sendis owte any erand, sal take þe benicun are þai ga, And cumande hir in þe vrisun of þabbes And<PB REF="" N="45"/> of alle hir sistirs; And at ilke vre of þe day þat [tai] prai<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS123">MS. <HI REND="I">þat prai</HI>.</NOTE> for þa þat er vte.  Þat day þat sho cumis hame, sal sho recaiue þe benicun at ilke ure Of þat þai haue misdon with siht, ouþir with iois,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS124"><HI REND="I">iois</HI> ("joys"), corrupt for <HI REND="I">erin</HI> or the like.</NOTE> ouþir with speche, ouþir ani ivil dedis.  Þai sal noht telle til þe toþir alle þat þai haue sene vte &amp; herd, for þat es ay mikil vice.  Yef any dose, þe correccion of þe reule sal sho suffir.  And þat ilke sal sho suffir þat gase owte of þe cloister, labur for to do, be it neuir sua litel, with-owtin leue of þabbes.  Lauerd for <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS125">Here a phrase like <HI REND="I">his grace</HI> (p. 39, l. 21, etc.), <HI REND="I">his mercy</HI> (p. 44, l. 16, etc.), <HI REND="I">his pite</HI> (p. 44, l. 31, etc.), is missing.</NOTE> gete vs, þat we ne do ne saie þing þat til destruciun fallis.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="68">
<HEAD>LXVIII.</HEAD>
<P>Yef man cumandis, sais sain Benet, ani þing at do, and it be greue, and sho may noht do it, sho sal recaiue þe cumandement<MILESTONE N="40b" UNIT="folio"/> softelie and wid mekenes. yef  sho ses þat þe charge of þe cumandement ouir-gase hir force, whit mekenes sal sho muster to þabbes hir sekenes, and noht with pride, na with gain-saȝe.  When sho hauis musterd hir firmite, yef þe cumandement of þabbes haldis forȝe, witte sho wele þat it es hir prowe til þe saule; sho sal recaiue it in obedience in þe trouȝe of goddis lay. Lauerd, he giue vs mekenes, for his merci, als he cumandis.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="69">
<HEAD>LXIX.</HEAD>
<P>Mikil aȝ ye at fle þis, sais sain Benet, þat nane defende ne warne oþir for nane achesun, ne for sibredin, ne for na oþir aquaintance; for mikil blame þan may cum þerof.  Yef ani trespassis þis cumandement, greuelike sal it be amendid.  Lauerd defende vs fra alle achesun of sclandir.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="70">
<HEAD>LXX.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence cumandis sain Benet þat a-chesunnir sal be defendid in haly kirke, als it es ordainde and stablist, þat nane be sua hardy for to curse oþir, ne discipline, bot sho þat þabbes giuis þe pouste.  Þa þat <MILESTONE N="41a" UNIT="folio"/>tresspassis, by-fore þam alle salle þai be chastid, sua þat þe<PB REF="" N="46"/> oþir haue dute þerof. til þe barnis sal man halde discipline ententiuelike, Til þai be o fiftene winter elde.  Alle sal do þat to þam with mesur and with resun.  Yef ani sistir with-outen þe cumandement of þabbes dose þe barnis ani owterage, þe reule of disclipine sal þai fele; for haly write cummandis þat þu sal do to na noþir bot als þu walde man did to þe.  Lauerd for his pite giue vs well at halde his cumandemens.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="71">
<HEAD>LXXI.</HEAD>
<P>Sain Benet cumandis in þis sentence þat al sal make obediens, and noht alane to þabbes, bot ilkane to oþir.  Þurȝ þe life of obediens may ye cum to heuin. þabbes and þe priuresse sal cumande til þa þat es vnder þaim; þat na priue cumandement be hid in þaim. þe yunger sal meke þaim til þelder with mikil charite.  Yef any es funden with fawte, be it neuir so litel, with þabbes, ouþir with priuresse, ouþir with ony oþir, sho sal acline to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS126"><HI REND="I">to</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">io</HI>.</NOTE> þerþe.  Yef  sho haue whreþid ani of <MILESTONE N="41b" UNIT="folio"/>hir sistirs, o what maner sam it be, hastelike with-vten dwellyng sal sho falle to her fete and aske hir for-gifnes, and crie hir merci, And ligge þare til sho for-giue it hir and giue hir her benicun.  Sho þat at þis amendment hauis an despite, and wille noht do it, Of hir body sal man take amendement.  Yef sho be rebel þar-again, vte of þe kirke sal sho be putt.  Lauerd for his merci giue vs sua obediens and mekenes at halde, and rebel at fle, þat we may cum til þe ioy þat ay sal be.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="72">
<HEAD>LXXII.</HEAD>
<P>Of tua maner in a lif spekis sain Benet in þis sentence, And sais þat the ille lif, þat es ful of wille, it departis man fra god and ledis man til þe pinis of helle, And a-noþir lif, þat es gude, þat departis man fra helle and ledis man to god almihti.  Þis gude life sal ye lere with lufe and gudenes, &amp; ilkain auance oþir wid onur and gude dede; þe sekenes of youre bodi, þan it cumis, take it in gude entente and in pacience.  Obedience,  buxumnes, sal ilkain at oþir <MILESTONE N="42a" UNIT="folio"/>lere hastiuelike, charite &amp; gudenes ilkain lere oþir, and chastite with luue.  Ye sal<PB REF="" N="47"/> dute god and yure abbesse with luue and charite.  And þat sal lede yow til þe ioy with-outen ende.  god giue it vs.</P>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="73">
<HEAD>LXXIII.</HEAD>
<P>In þis sentence mustirs sain Benet mikil mekenes þat in hym was.  For pure mekenes mustirs he here in þe last ende of his reule.  He sais þat he ne hauis noht writyn alle þingis þat fallis to rihtuisnes.  Bott wha sam haldis wel þise cumaundementis, heȝ god, þat es fadir of alle, sal ȝelde þaim þair mede.  We haue writin þis reule for to mustir til þa þat ere suuerainis of hali kirke haue clene luue til god and to þaire prome, And ilke sistir til oþir.  Bot wha sua wil cume til þe heȝnes and til þe sikirnes of religiun, Loke þat tay do eftir þe kening of þe haly fadir þat wnis in manhed in þe heȝnes þat lastis ay. Of what boke sam ye here, of anikin kening of þalde lai ouþir of þe neu testament, Ouþir what sum it es, þan es it þe riht reule of þis life here.  Of na boke ne make ȝe force, bot ȝe <MILESTONE N="42b" UNIT="folio"/>may ga þe right gate to god alle-mihti. þe life of  þe haly armitis and þaire cumandemens, And þe reule of sain basili, alle suilke þingis salle ȝe filiȝ.  Til hali men, þat gude lif haldes &amp; luuis obedience and gude vertus, þat may halde þis lif.  Bot we, sais sain benet, þat er febil and for-getil and of febil lif, þis gude lif schamis vs, And confundis.  Bot ye þat wille cume hastelike to þe heȝe ioy þat lastis ay, Haldes first þurȝ þe helpe of iesu crist þis litil beginning of þe reule þat I haue writin yu, And salle ye cume til þe heȝnes of mare vertu þurȝ þe kenning þat I haue musterd.  Þa þat it vnderstandis and haldis, Til þaim sal be oppind þe ȝatis of heuin.  Lauerd, bigining and ending of alle gude dedis, giue vs<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS127"><HI REND="I">vs</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> sua þis reule of sain benet for to ȝeme, þat te rengne of heuin be oppind til vs.  Godde gif it vs for his misericorde.  AmeN. Qui viuis &amp; Regnas, Deus, Per Omnia Secula Seculorum. AMEN.</P>
</DIV2>

</DIV1>

<DIV1 TYPE="version"><PB REF="" N="48"/>
<HEAD>II. THE NORTHERN METRICAL VERSION OF The Rule of St. Benet.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(Cotton MS. Vespasian A. 25, British Museum.)</HEAD>
<DIV2 TYPE="prolog">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="66a" UNIT="folio"/>Regula beati benedicti anglicis verbis translata.</HEAD>
<L>All þat wyll lely lyue in land</L>
<L>Als sant Benet has ordand,</L>
<L>Or wyll gyf þair deuocioun</L>
<L N="4">Vn-to þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS128">4, 5, 26, and often: MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">e</HI>, <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">is</HI>, <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">i</HI>.</NOTE> rowle of religioun,</L>
<L>In þis boke þay may see sett</L>
<L>Þe suthfast rewle of sant Benett</L>
<L>With sere pontes þat partens þar-to,</L>
<L N="8">Nyght &amp; day how þay sall do.</L>
<L>Monkes &amp; als all leryd men</L>
<L>In latyn may it lyghtly ken,</L>
<L>And wytt þarby how þay sall wyrk</L>
<L N="12">To sarue god and haly kyrk.</L>
<L>Bott tyll women to mak it couth,</L>
<L>Þat leris no latyn in þar ȝouth,</L>
<L>In ingles is it ordand here,</L>
<L N="16">So þat þay may it lyghtly lere.</L>
<L>For ilkon þat þar-to er vun</L>
<L>Er haldyn it clerly for to kun</L>
<L>And to fulfyll it att þar myght</L>
<L N="20">In word and dede both day &amp; nyght.</L>
<L>And ryght to gar þis reule up-ryse,</L>
<L>Þe wytty man says on þis wyse:<Q>Asculta, o filia, disciplina[m]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS129">MS. <HI REND="I">disciplina</HI>.</NOTE> magistre tue—</Q></L>
<L>Doghter, he says, tak tent &amp; lere</L>
<L N="24">Þe techynges of þi maystres here,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="66b" UNIT="folio"/>And lat þine eris bowand be</L>
<L>To þe bydynges of þi moder fre,</L>
<L>Whylk moder es cald haly kyrk,</L>
<L N="28"><PB REF="" N="49"/>Whas wyll vs aw alway to wyrk.</L>
<L>Þarfor þou sall fande to fulfyll</L>
<L>All þat þi modir tels þe vntyll,</L>
<L>And be bowsum to þi souerayn;</L>
<L N="32">Þan sall þou turn to god o-gayn,</L>
<L>Fro wham þat þou depayrtyd es</L>
<L>Thurth þine awin vn-bowsumnes.</L>
<L>And doghter, to my tale tak tent:</L>
<L N="36">For godes sak we sall assent</L>
<L>All fleschly wyll for to for-sak</L>
<L>And gostly armurs vntill vs tak,</L>
<L>Thurth obediens by day and nyght</L>
<L N="40">O-gans þe fend, our fa, to fyght.</L>
<L>Doghter, when þou dose ony dede,</L>
<L>Pray specially god þe to spede,</L>
<L>And what werk so þou sall to wend,</L>
<L N="44">Pray hym at bryng it tyll gude end,</L>
<L>So þat, sen he vowches saue</L>
<L>For hys doghters here vs to haue,</L>
<L>Þat we neuer with oure wykkydnes</L>
<L N="48">Wreth hym, þat oure fader es,</L>
<L>So for to mak hym turn hys mode</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="67a" UNIT="folio"/>To hald fro vs hys gostly gode,</L>
<L>Or vs deseryd by þat skyll</L>
<L N="52">Fro þe blys þat he boght vs tyll,</L>
<L>And put vs vn-to pyen for þi,</L>
<L>Als wykkyd saruandes er worthy,</L>
<L>Þe whylk, yf þay dyde wele, myght wend</L>
<L N="56">To blys þat es with-outyn end.</L>
<L>And þarfor suld we vs a-vyse</L>
<L>Out of our syn sone for to ryse</L>
<L>And our hertes vnto heuyn at rayse,</L>
<L N="60">Als haly wrytt on þis wyse sayse:</L>
<L>"Þe houre es now, if we tak kepe,</L>
<L>In whilk vs aw to ryse fro slepe."</L>
<L>Þat is, we suld ryse out of syn,</L>
<L N="64">And wyrk so þat we heuyn may wyn,</L>
<L>And opyn our eghen to cryst on hyght,</L>
<L>Þat namyd es ailastand lyght,</L>
<L>And opyn our eris, hys vose to here,</L>
<L N="68"><PB REF="" N="50"/>Als bokes vs bydes on þis manere:<Q>"Hodie si vocem eius audieritis, Nolite obdurare corda uestra—</Q></L>
<L>If þat ȝe here hys vose þis day,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="67b" UNIT="folio"/>Turn noght ȝoure hertes fro hym oway"—</L>
<L>Bott tyll hys voce ȝe tak gude hede,</L>
<L N="72">And fandes to fulfill yd<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS130">MS. <HI REND="I">fulfillyd</HI>.</NOTE> in dede,</L>
<L>Sen god hase geuen ȝow eris &amp; wytt;</L>
<L>For on þis wyse says haly wrytt:<Q>"Qui habet aures audiendi audiat."</Q></L>
<L>Crist vs kens on þis manere,</L>
<L N="76">And says: "he þat hase eris suld here</L>
<L>Þe law of god, and þan tak hede</L>
<L>To fulfyll yd<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS131">MS. <HI REND="I">fulfyllyd</HI>.</NOTE> in word and dede."</L>
<L>For þus<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS132">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">us</HI>.</NOTE> þe haly gost wyll ken</L>
<L N="80">Thruth haly kyrk all cristyn men:<Q>"Venite, filii, audite me—</Q></L>
<L>Cums hider, suns, my wordes to here!</L>
<L>Þe drede of god I sall ȝow lere."</L>
<L>Haly kyrk, for our be-houe,</L>
<L N="84">Leris how we oure lord sall lufe</L>
<L>And lede oure lyf to hys lykyng</L>
<L>And drede [hym] ouer<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS133">MS. <HI REND="I">drede ouer</HI>.</NOTE> all oder thyng.</L>
<L>Ryn we suld, whyls we haue day,</L>
<L N="88">Þat mirknes mare vs noght þe way.</L>
<L>Þat mens, we suld lyf wele ilkane,</L>
<L>Or we with dynt of dede be tayne.</L>
<L>For in oure lyf here may we chese,</L>
<L N="92">Whyder we our-self wyll saue or lese.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="68a" UNIT="folio"/>And oure lord sekes in world all-wase</L>
<L>Who wyll be sauyd, and þusgayt sayse:<Q>"Quis est homo qui vult vitam—</Q></L>
<L>Whilk man is he þat lyf wyl haue</L>
<L N="96">And se gude days, hys saule to saue?</L>
<L>Als-so say of hym am I fayne."</L>
<L>And if þou þan answer o-gayne</L>
<L>And says þus:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS134">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">us</HI>.</NOTE> "lord, þat man am I,"</L>
<L N="100">Þan to þe says god almyghty:</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="51"/>"Man, if þou wyll haue lastand lyf</L>
<L>And won in welth with-outyn stryf,</L>
<L>On þis wyse be-houes þe do,</L>
<L N="104">Als I sall tell þe vn-to:<Q>Proibe linguam tuam a malo—</Q></L>
<L>In þe begining, still þi tung,</L>
<L>And spek no uyl of ald na ȝong,</L>
<L>And spayr þi lipes, &amp; hald þam still,</L>
<L N="108">So þat þay opyn noght with ill!</L>
<L>Turn fro euil, &amp; seke to gude,</L>
<L>And seke to pese with mayn &amp; mode!"</L>
<L>And þus if we wyll wirk alway,</L>
<L N="112">Þan wyll oure lord þus tyll vs say:</L>
<L>"Myne eghen on ȝow sall luk ful clere,</L>
<L>And min eris sall ȝour prayers here,</L>
<L>And when ȝe to me call or cry,</L>
<L N="116">Þan sall I say þus: Here am I."</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="68b" UNIT="folio"/>What mirth to man myght mor acord</L>
<L>Þan to here þis voce of oure lord?</L>
<L>Lo, how mekly &amp; how euen</L>
<L N="120">Þat he vs teches þe way to heuen!</L>
<L>Now, sen our mighty lord Iesus</L>
<L>Vnto hys kyngdom euer cals vs,</L>
<L>Ordand we vs in word &amp; dede</L>
<L N="124">At wend to hym with-outen drede</L>
<L>And with our werk mak vs worthy</L>
<L>In endles blis to beld hym by!</L>
<L>For of þat blis may we not spede,</L>
<L N="128">Bot if our werks be worthy mede,</L>
<L>And if he ask here in oure steuen:</L>
<L>"Whylk er þo men sall won in heuen?"</L>
<L>Als dauid in þe sawter boke</L>
<L N="132">Askes of oure lord, who likes to loke:<Q>"Domine, quis habitabit in tabernaculo tuo?"</Q></L>
<L>Þus of our lord he askes &amp; says:</L>
<L>"Lord, who sall won in þi palays</L>
<L>Or ryst a-pon þi haly hyll?"</L>
<L N="136">And þus oure lord<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS135"><HI REND="I">lord</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> answers þer-till:<Q>"Qui ingreditur sine macula."</Q></L>
<L><PB REF="" N="52"/><MILESTONE N="69a" UNIT="folio"/>He answers þus by prophet steuen,</L>
<L>Wysand vs þe way to heuen:</L>
<L>"He þat enters þis world within</L>
<L N="140">Clensid clen of all hys syn,</L>
<L>And always wyrkes þat ryghtwis es,</L>
<L>And says no thyng bot suthfastnes;</L>
<L>Þat in hert hase no wykkyd thoght,</L>
<L N="144">Ne with hys tong no uil hase wroght;</L>
<L>Þat to hys neghburs dose no noy</L>
<L>In stede ne stayll, þare staite to stroy;</L>
<L>And þay þat standes and dwels til end</L>
<L N="148">Ogans þe fandyng<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS136">MS. <HI REND="I">fendyng</HI>.</NOTE> of þe fend,</L>
<L>And wyll not doy efter hys rede,</L>
<L>Ne suffer hym in þam hafe no stede,</L>
<L>Bot settes þair hert &amp; þare powere</L>
<L N="152">All vnto crist, þat boght þam dere;</L>
<L>And for godes sake who will assent</L>
<L>To be bowsum and obidient,</L>
<L>And for his luf lyfes halily,</L>
<L N="156">And es not egh in hert for þi,</L>
<L>Bot knaws þat þaire gude dedes ilkon</L>
<L>Er of þe grace of god allon."</L>
<L>For thurth oure mightes, mor no les,</L>
<L N="160">May we begyn nonekyns gude.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS137">159-160. See Notes.</NOTE></L>
<L>Euil dedes er of oure awn entent,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="69b" UNIT="folio"/>And all gude dedes fro god er sent.</L>
<L>Þerfor hym suld we lofe all-ways</L>
<L N="164">With þe prophett, þat þusgayt says:<Q>"Non nobis, domine, sed nomini tuo da gloriam—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, vntil vs be no loueyng,</L>
<L>Bot to þi naym ouer alkins thyng!"</L>
<L>For of oure-self we haf bot sin,</L>
<L N="168">And al gude bose in þe bygin,</L>
<L>Namly þat helpes to hele of saule.</L>
<L>Þare-for on þis wyse says sant paule:<Q>"Gratia dei sum id quod sum—</Q></L>
<L>All þat in erth to me es ton,</L>
<L N="172">Itt is of þe grace of god allon.</L>
<L>Mine awn power es noght to prayse,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="53"/>Bot wirchep be to god always."</L>
<L>And who so makes myrth, mor or min,</L>
<L N="176">In god be-houes his ioy begin;</L>
<L>For all oure comforth in hym dwels,</L>
<L>Als hym-self in þe godspel tels.</L>
<L>He says: "who to my wordes takes hede</L>
<L N="180">And fandes to fulfill þam in dede,</L>
<L>I sall mak hym wele like to be</L>
<L>A ful wyse man in all degre,</L>
<L>Whylk man, for his hous sal last,</L>
<L N="184">A-pon a ston hase byggid itt fast.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="70a" UNIT="folio"/>When it sall windes or flodes fell,</L>
<L>Euer may itt stand stifli &amp; wele,</L>
<L>And harm þair-to may þai do none,</L>
<L N="188">Be-caus itt es biggid on a stone.</L>
<L>Þis stone es crist, þat we on call.</L>
<L>He gifes vs force, þat we not fall,</L>
<L>And ilka day til vs he techis</L>
<L N="192">Thurth haly wordes, þat his men prechis,</L>
<L>And als thurgh law of hali kyrk,</L>
<L>How we in world sall wisely wirk.</L>
<L>And al þe days of oure lifyng</L>
<L N="196">Er lent vs allane for þis thyng:</L>
<L>For we suld here oure mis amend</L>
<L>Thurgh hali kirk, os crist hase kend;</L>
<L>Þair-for god lens vs oure lif-days,</L>
<L N="200">Als þe appostil proues &amp; says.</L>
<L>He says: "kan ȝe not vnder-stand</L>
<L>Þe sufferance of god alweldand?</L>
<L>Vnto penance it suld ȝow lede</L>
<L N="204">To mak a-mendes for ȝoure misdede."</L>
<L>Of swilk sufferance god schewes til vs</L>
<L>In his godspel, whaire he says þus:<Q>"Nolo mortem peccatoris sed vt magis—</Q></L>
<L>I wil not þe dede of sinful man,</L>
<L N="208">Bot þat he turn hym &amp; lif þan;</L>
<L>And if he of me ask mercy,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="70b" UNIT="folio"/>Ful gladly for-gyf hym wyl I."</L>
<L>Þus if we þis question craue,</L>
<L N="212">Whilk þai er þat heuyn sal haue</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="54"/>And won with god in blisses clere,</L>
<L>Answer haue we halili here.</L>
<L>And hardeli if we ful-fill</L>
<L N="216">Þe offese þat fals þaim vntill</L>
<L>Þat er ordand in blisses to be,</L>
<L>Þan aires of þat ilk blis er we.</L>
<L>Þan is it gude þat we here dresse</L>
<L N="220">Our hartes with all oure bisines</L>
<L>For to fulfill, in þat we may,</L>
<L>Godes bidinges both night &amp; day;</L>
<L>And þat we may nott be oure might,</L>
<L N="224">Pray hym to perfourn it right,</L>
<L>And for to grant vs might &amp; maine,</L>
<L>Thurgh his grace, þat most may gaine,</L>
<L>Þat we may fle fro paines of hell</L>
<L N="228">And be worthi in blis to dwell.</L>
<L>Gude councel es to man &amp; wife,</L>
<L>Whils we lend in þis dedely life,</L>
<L>Vn-to swilk warkes for to take hede</L>
<L N="232">Þat vs to lastand life may lede,</L>
<L>And gif vs fully, all folk in-fere,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="71a" UNIT="folio"/>To iesu skoles his laus to lere,</L>
<L>Þat er þe laus of haly kirk,</L>
<L N="236">Of whilk vs aw not to be irk.</L>
<L>Al if vs thynk it hard to take,</L>
<L>We sall it suffer for godes sake;</L>
<L>And if sere enmis vs assayle,</L>
<L N="240">Þaire-for we sall not fayntly faile,</L>
<L>Bot thynk, if it be heuy &amp; hard,</L>
<L>What mede we sal haue afterward.</L>
<L>For who to wele-lifing sall win,</L>
<L N="244">With greuauns grete þaim<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS138"><HI REND="I">þaim</HI>; the first letter looks like a p.</NOTE> bus bigin;</L>
<L>Bot sethin a swetnes haue þai sall</L>
<L>And at þe last swetest of all.</L>
<L>For who so wil godes lesons lere</L>
<L N="248">May saue þair saules, &amp; hele þaim here,</L>
<L>And mak [þaim] thrugh<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS139">MS. <HI REND="I">mak thrugh</HI>.</NOTE> meknes heueyn</L>
<L>Comuners in þe kyngdom of heuyn.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="1"><PB REF="" N="55"/>
<HEAD>I.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De iiiior condicionibus religionis.</HEAD>
<L>In þis ilk rewle of sant Benett</L>
<L N="252">Er sere folk in sere plasses sett</L>
<L>To serue god in sere degre,</L>
<L>Men or wemen whider þai be,</L>
<L>Þat sum er gude &amp; sum not so;</L>
<L N="256">Four maners mai men fynd of þo.</L>
<L>Þe first es men here or women</L>
<L>Þat þair awn kynde wyll clerly ken,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="71b" UNIT="folio"/>And wilfully alway wil wirke</L>
<L N="260">Efter þe laus of haly kirke,</L>
<L>And euer-mor be bowsum &amp; baine</L>
<L>Vn-to þe sawes of þeir sufferaine,</L>
<L>Als þai may leire in þis boke</L>
<L N="264">Efter-ward, who likes to loke.</L>
<L>Þe secund maner es ful perfite</L>
<L>Als to be anger or eremete,</L>
<L>A-gains þe fend thurgh faith to feght</L>
<L N="268">With dedes of penance day &amp; night,</L>
<L>Not ainly bi lereing on buke,</L>
<L>Bot bi þe order þat þai tuke.</L>
<L>And penance þat þai put þaime to</L>
<L N="272">Sal mak þam myghty so to do.</L>
<L>Anely life all if þai lede,</L>
<L>Of þe deuel haue þai no drede.</L>
<L>For god makes þam so mekli of mayne</L>
<L N="276">And stalworth to stand him a-gayne,</L>
<L>Þat al his dartes may þam not dere,</L>
<L>Ne his faindinges may þam not fere.</L>
<L>Þe thrid degre es not so gude:</L>
<L N="280">Men or wemen of wilful mode,</L>
<L>Þat order of religion takes,</L>
<L>And al obseruaunce þat syne for-sakes,</L>
<L>Þat nowder will be obidient</L>
<L N="284"><MILESTONE N="72a" UNIT="folio"/>Vntyl sufferayne ne til couent</L>
<L>For no thing þat men telles þam til,</L>
<L>Bot lifes efter þair wordly will</L>
<L>And serues more to worldly thyng</L>
<L N="288">Þan vnto god, of heuen kyng.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="56"/>Syngne of religion haue þai non,</L>
<L>Ne takyn, bot tonsure allon.</L>
<L>Vnto no hird þai wil tak kepe,</L>
<L N="292">Bot raykes forth als raueand schep.</L>
<L>And whar-to so þai turn þair mode,</L>
<L>Þat think þaym law and reson gude.</L>
<L>And whar-to þai haue no likyng,</L>
<L N="296">Þat think þam es vn-lefful thyng.</L>
<L>Be no rewle wil þai be arrest,</L>
<L>Bot lifes als ane vnskilful best.</L>
<L>Þe fortt degre ȝit es þair als</L>
<L N="300">Of sum þat er in order fals,</L>
<L>Þat lightli leues al heuy thing</L>
<L>And folous euer þair flessh likyng.</L>
<L>Þai raik o-bout in sere contresse,</L>
<L N="304">For þai þair likyng wil not lese.</L>
<L>In non abbay wil þai dwell,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="72b" UNIT="folio"/>Bot wendes a-bout fro cel to cel</L>
<L>And tels lesynges here &amp; þair</L>
<L N="308">To gar men mak þam mery fare.</L>
<L>Þai lede þair lif in lechori</L>
<L>And in dronkynnes &amp; in clotony.</L>
<L>Þair lifyng es ay war and were;</L>
<L N="312">Þair-for of þam I spek no fare,</L>
<L>Bot to þe first I wend o-gayn</L>
<L>For to perfourn our processe playn,</L>
<L>To tel what pontes falles þam vnto,</L>
<L N="316">And als what dedes þam aw to do</L>
<L>Þat for godes sake here sett</L>
<L>Vnder þe band of sant Benett.</L>
<L>Whare priores<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS140">MS. <HI REND="I">priours</HI>.</NOTE> es principall,</L>
<L N="320">And what pontes þer-to suld fall,</L>
<L>In þis begynnyng sal be kend.</L>
<L>God help þat it myght haue gude end!</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="2">
<HEAD>II.</HEAD>
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>Vlterius de priorissa et eius condicionibus.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores aw for to be</L>
<L N="324">Principall in gude degre</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="57"/>Both in þe abba &amp; with-oute,</L>
<L>Whar so sche ganges or rides o-boute,</L>
<L>And to be honored euer hir aw;</L>
<L N="328">Bot in her-self sche sal be law,</L>
<L>Pryde in hert for to haue none,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="73a" UNIT="folio"/>Bot loue god euer of al his lone</L>
<L>And wirchip him werld al-wais,</L>
<L N="332">Als þe apostel plainly sais</L>
<L>Vn-to all folk, who so it be,</L>
<L>Þat takes swilk staite of dignite:<Q>"Accepistis spiritum adepcionis."</Q></L>
<L>He sais: "ȝe take þe gaste of mede,</L>
<L N="336">Þat lele folk vnto lif suld lede,</L>
<L>In þe whilk gaste we call &amp; cry</L>
<L>Vnto our lord god al-myghty,</L>
<L>And 'fader, abbot,' þus we say."</L>
<L N="340">Bi ȝer wordes vnderstand we may</L>
<L>Þat soueranse aw no thing to do</L>
<L>Bot anely als crist kens þam to,</L>
<L>Ne no thyng suld þai tech ne lere,</L>
<L N="344">Ne no thyng bid by þaire power,</L>
<L>Bot þat myght turn in feld &amp; towne</L>
<L>Þair sogetes to saluacioune.</L>
<L>Techyng sal be to þam it beres</L>
<L N="348">Als gastly sede sawn in þair eres,</L>
<L>And to teching þai sal be bayne</L>
<L>Als gude soietes to þair souerane.</L>
<L>For wele wit sche, &amp; so wit þai,</L>
<L N="352">Þat in dome, on þe dredful day,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="73b" UNIT="folio"/>Sal reknyng by, how sche þam leres,</L>
<L>And als who wele hir lessons heres,</L>
<L>And both þan sal þai haue þair mede</L>
<L N="356">Efter þair lif þat þai here lede.</L>
<L>A priores may knaw wele þan,</L>
<L>Sche beres þe charch of a hird-man.</L>
<L>And als a graue bihoues hir be,</L>
<L N="360">Þat cure hase tayn to kepe hir fe.</L>
<L>And hir awn sawle wele may sche saue,</L>
<L>Al if hir schepe vnryght wyl raue:</L>
<L>If scho gude techyng tell þam to</L>
<L N="364"><PB REF="" N="58"/>And chastes als hir aw to do,</L>
<L>Efter þe rewle þat crist hase kend,</L>
<L>And þai wil not þair mys amend,</L>
<L>Bott reklisly hir rede refuse,</L>
<L N="368">To crist þan may scho hir excuse</L>
<L>In dome, a-pon þe dredful day,</L>
<L>And with þe prophet þusgate say:<Q>"Iusticiam tuam [non] abscondi<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS141">MS. <HI REND="I">tuam abscondi</HI>.</NOTE> in corde meo, Voritatem tuam &amp; salutare tuum dixi."</Q></L>
<L>Þus for hir werk scho may haue mede,</L>
<L N="372">And þai dampned for þair mysdede.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="74a" UNIT="folio"/>Also we se ȝit to þe same:</L>
<L>Of priores who takes þe name,</L>
<L>In dede and saw her bus assent</L>
<L N="376">To fulfil it to duble intent;</L>
<L>Þat es, scho sal in wark fulfyll</L>
<L>Al þat scho sal tech oþer vntill,</L>
<L>So þat al hir doghters dere</L>
<L N="380">Þat godes law lightly wil lere,</L>
<L>Bi wordes allayn may haue knawyng,</L>
<L>How þai sal do in al thyng,</L>
<L>And oþer, þat of hertes er herd</L>
<L N="384">And oute of mesure more fraward,</L>
<L>Mai be informed bi hir dede</L>
<L>And lere how þai þair lif suld lede.</L>
<L>Þus aw hir-self in dede to do</L>
<L N="388">Al þat scho sal tech oþer vnto.</L>
<L>And when scho hir sugetes reproues,</L>
<L>On al maners luk hir be-houes,</L>
<L>So þat scho hafe not done þo dedes</L>
<L N="392">Whilk scho vntil oder for-bedes.</L>
<L>For þan hir lare is not to prays,</L>
<L>And crist þan vnto hir þus sais:<Q>"Quare tu enarras iusticiam tuam—</Q></L>
<L>Whi teches þu in rightwisnes,</L>
<L N="396"><MILESTONE N="74b" UNIT="folio"/>And þu þi-self mor synful es?</L>
<L>Þu hates my techyng &amp; my lare,</L>
<L>Sen þou þi-self hase sined mare,</L>
<L>And my wordes putes þou þe be-hinde,</L>
<L N="400"><PB REF="" N="59"/>For of my teching ert þou blind.</L>
<L>Ful wele þou may perceaue &amp; se</L>
<L>A litil mote in þi sister ee,</L>
<L>Bott a grete balk in þin awn</L>
<L N="404">Vnto þi sight may not be knawn."</L>
<L>Þus nedes þam-self for to be clere,</L>
<L>Þat oþer folk sall tech &amp; lere.</L>
<L>A Priores aw to be slike,</L>
<L N="408">Þat scho luf ilkon in-like</L>
<L>And noght til on for fauor spare</L>
<L>And mak a-noþer to trauel mare,</L>
<L>Bot serue ilkon in þair degre</L>
<L N="412">Samen, als sisters aw to be.</L>
<L>For haly writ sais wele þair-bi:</L>
<L>"In crist we er all o body."</L>
<L>And all þat serues vnto a lord,</L>
<L N="416">In anhede aw þam to a-corde.</L>
<L>And right als god takes no rewarde,</L>
<L>For riches þat no man be sparde,</L>
<L>Ne non put doun for pouerte,</L>
<L N="420"><MILESTONE N="75a" UNIT="folio"/>So suld it emang sisters be.</L>
<L>For crist on cristyn folk es heued</L>
<L>And we his lyms þat here er leuyde;</L>
<L>And godes seruandes in haly kirk,</L>
<L N="424">Þat er ordand his werk to wirk,</L>
<L>Aw to be lufid in ewyn degre</L>
<L>Of hir þat sal þair souerayn be.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De eadem.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS142">This heading, like several of the following, is written in the right margin.</NOTE></HEAD>
<L>A Priores þat wil wirchep win</L>
<L N="428">Aw to chastes on maners th[r]in<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS143">MS. <HI REND="I">thin</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>Þam þat scho sese wil be schrews,</L>
<L>Als þe apostil playnly schews;<Q>"Argue, obsecra, &amp; increpa!"</Q></L>
<L>Þat es to mene on þis manere:</L>
<L N="432">Þai þat er herd &amp; lath to lere,</L>
<L>Þam sal scho chasti with hardnes</L>
<L>Of werk &amp; word, als worthy es.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="60"/>And þay þat er meke &amp; obedient</L>
<L N="436">And to hir saws wil euer assent,</L>
<L>Þai sal be chastede, when þai sin,</L>
<L>With fair wordes þam forto wyn.</L>
<L>And þai þat wil hir lare despise</L>
<L N="440">Or als rebels o-gans hir rise,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="75b" UNIT="folio"/>With þam aw hir for to trete</L>
<L>With preson &amp; with penance grete;</L>
<L>And sone when þat scho mai persaiue</L>
<L N="444">Þair syn, lat noght þe tym ouer wayue,</L>
<L>Bot chaistese þam &amp; tery noght</L>
<L>Efter þe wark þat þa[i ha]ue<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS144">MS. <HI REND="I">þaue</HI>.</NOTE> wroght</L>
<L>For parel þat mai fall þarby,</L>
<L N="448">Als wos proued of þe prophet hely</L>
<L>And oþer mo þat men may tell,</L>
<L>How grete drede es yn sin to dwell.</L>
<L>Bot first hir-self, &amp; right non els,</L>
<L N="452">Sal councel þam, als crist vs tels,</L>
<L>Bi wordes warli anes or twis.</L>
<L>And if þai wil not þair-for rise,</L>
<L>To chastese þam scho sal not spare</L>
<L N="456">With penance hard, als I said aire.</L>
<L>For hali writ sais on þis wise:</L>
<L>"Þe fole with word may non chastese."</L>
<L>For þai wil set bi no man saw,</L>
<L N="460">Þarfor þam bus haue harder aw.</L>
<L>And to þis sam, als clerks may kun,</L>
<L>Þe wiseman sais: "chastise þi sun</L>
<L>And bete him with a wand, I rede,</L>
<L N="464">Þan liuers þou his saule fro drede."</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="76a" UNIT="folio"/>De eadem.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores aw for to wite,</L>
<L>Als beres witnes in haly writ,</L>
<L>Who mekel takes in town or felde,</L>
<L N="468">Of mekil be-houes þam rekni[n]g<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS145">MS. <HI REND="I">reknig</HI>.  The scribe seems first to have written <HI REND="I">-in-</HI>, then to have altered <HI REND="I">-in-</HI> into <HI REND="I">-ni-</HI>, forgetting, however, that there should be an n also after i (or a contraction mark above it).</NOTE> ȝelde.</L>
<L>And so hir aw to vnderstand</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="61"/>What hard wark scho takes on hand</L>
<L>To gouerne þe saules of sere women</L>
<L N="472">And all þair erthly maners ken:</L>
<L>Sum gude, sum ill, sum eueyn bitweyn,</L>
<L>Als es in ilk a-semble sene.</L>
<L>And þair-for scho þat ȝeme þam sall</L>
<L N="476">Bus haue hir euynly vntil all</L>
<L>And fully knaw what falles þam to,</L>
<L>Als a gude hird aw for to do,</L>
<L>So þat al hir flok may proue</L>
<L N="480">And encrese vnto cristes bi-houe.</L>
<L>No gude hirdes sal set þair thoght</L>
<L>On erthli gudes, þat gase to noght,</L>
<L>Mor þan þe saules for to saue</L>
<L N="484">Of wham þai sal here keping haue.</L>
<L>For mor we suld ȝern hele of saule</L>
<L>Þan of bodi, os sais sant paule.</L>
<L>And also crist in his godspell</L>
<L N="488">Of þis same makes minde o-mell:<Q>"Primum querite regnum dei—</Q></L>
<L> <MILESTONE N="76b" UNIT="folio"/>First sal ȝe seke þe blis of heuyn</L>
<L>And þe rightwisnes of it ful euyn,</L>
<L>And þan all þat nedes ȝou vntill</L>
<L N="492">Sal ȝe haue at ȝour awne wyll."</L>
<L>And forþermare ȝit may men rede:</L>
<L>Oure lord here if we luf &amp; drede,</L>
<L>Þan sal no thing here fro vs fayle</L>
<L N="496">Þat to our saule hele may a-vayle.</L>
<L>And man or woman þat here wil haue</L>
<L>Cure of saules fro syn to saue,</L>
<L>Vnto reknyng sall þai cum</L>
<L N="500">For þo saules on þe day of dom.</L>
<L>For al þe saules þai hase in welde</L>
<L>And for his awn saule sall he ȝelde</L>
<L>Reknyng to crist, þe domes-man.</L>
<L N="504">It nedes þat þai a-vise þam þan</L>
<L>For to do þat in þam es;</L>
<L>For if ony of þair schep peris,</L>
<L>And þe faute be not in þam fun,</L>
<L N="508"><PB REF="" N="62"/>Þair awn saule þen haue [þai] vn-bun.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS146">MS. <HI REND="I">haue vn bun</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>And souerans ȝit sal haue þer mede</L>
<L>For saules þai wyn with word or dede,</L>
<L>With gude ensampil þat þai gife,</L>
<L N="512"><MILESTONE N="77a" UNIT="folio"/>Or with gude lifyng þat þai lif,</L>
<L>Or els with rightwise chastisyng;</L>
<L>Þam falles gret mede for al swilk thyng.</L>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="3">
<HEAD>III.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De adhibendis ad consilium sororibus.</HEAD>
<L>In all tymes, when oght es to do</L>
<L N="516">Þat any grete charge fals vnto,</L>
<L>Þe priores sal to-geder call</L>
<L>All þe conuent, grete &amp; small,</L>
<L>Þat orderd er, both old &amp; ȝing,</L>
<L N="520">And ask þair counsel in þat thing.</L>
<L>When ilkon hase said þair a-vise,</L>
<L>Þe priores þan, if scho be wise,</L>
<L>Sal se who a-cordes reson vnto,</L>
<L N="524">And efter þair rede sal scho do.</L>
<L>And god schews his myght, be ȝe bald,</L>
<L>Als wele in ȝong folk als in ald;</L>
<L>And þairfor sal in swilk a thing</L>
<L N="528">Samyn com both olde &amp; ȝyng,</L>
<L>And mekely ilkon sai þair saw</L>
<L>And nother let for luf ne aw.</L>
<L>And when þai al þer sawes hafe saide,</L>
<L N="532">Als scho assentes þai sal be paide,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="77b" UNIT="folio"/>Als gude discipels sall al-ways</L>
<L>Be paide, what so þair maistres sais.</L>
<L>And scho with gude descrecioun</L>
<L N="536">Sal rewle hir wordes bi right reson,</L>
<L>And all þai aw be day &amp; night</L>
<L>To saue þis rewle in all þer myght,</L>
<L>And in no ponte, for gude ne ill,</L>
<L N="540">To wirk efter þair awn will,</L>
<L>Bot euer to be bowsum &amp; bayn</L>
<L>Vnto þe sawes of þair sufferane.</L>
<L>And who so wil not for grete harte,</L>
<L N="544"><PB REF="" N="63"/>With greuauns aw to be gart.</L>
<L>Bot luke þe priores for no thing</L>
<L>Pase þe right rewle of chastising,</L>
<L>Bot soberly to wirk al-way</L>
<L N="548">For drede of dome in þe last day.</L>
<L>When oder lese thynges er to do,</L>
<L>Þan may þe priores cal hir to</L>
<L>iii or iiii wysest women,</L>
<L N="552">And do als þair counsel wil ken,</L>
<L>So þat scho hase witnes al-ways,</L>
<L>Als þe wise man witnes &amp; says:<Q>"Fac cum consilio, et post factum non penitebis!—</Q></L>
<L>Do al þi dedes be gude counsell,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS147">Originally <HI REND="I">counsaile</HI>, or the like.  Cf. 1518.</NOTE></L>
<L N="556">Þan sall þe noght rew þi trauayle."</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="78a" UNIT="folio"/>Þair-for a souerayn sal not do,</L>
<L>Bot if scho ask counsel þair-to</L>
<L>Owþer of sum or els of all,</L>
<L N="560">Efter þe thyng es grete or small.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="4">
<HEAD>IV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De vijtem operibus misericordie.</HEAD>
<L>Here er þe warkes on raw to rede</L>
<L>Þat sesis oure sins &amp; makes mede.</L>
<L>First sal we luf god loud &amp; still</L>
<L N="564">With al our hert &amp; al our will,</L>
<L>And syen our neghburs sal we luf</L>
<L>Als our-self for our saul be-houe;</L>
<L>No man ne women slay with wrang</L>
<L N="568">Noþer with word ne wapyn strang.</L>
<L>Of oþer mens we sal not steyl</L>
<L>Ne couet here no<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS148"><HI REND="I">no</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">ne</HI>.</NOTE> wordly wele.</L>
<L>Fals witnes we sal non bere,</L>
<L N="572">Bot honor al þat cristynd ere.</L>
<L>Godes naym we sal not tak in vayn,</L>
<L>Ne swer it bot for thyng sartayn.</L>
<L>And to non here sal we do</L>
<L N="576">Bot als we wold war don vs to.</L>
<L>Oure awn self we sal deny,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="64"/>And folow oure lord god al-myghty,</L>
<L>Pine oure flesch with penance grete,</L>
<L N="580">And couet non delicius mete,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="78b" UNIT="folio"/>Fast &amp; do gude almus-dede,</L>
<L>And cleth þe naked þat hase nede.</L>
<L>Seke men suld we viset wele,</L>
<L N="584">And bring þe dede vn-to biriele,</L>
<L>Help al þo þat harmes haues,</L>
<L>And counsaile þam þat counsele craues,</L>
<L>And rek not of þis erthli gude,</L>
<L N="588">Bot vnto [crist] turn<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS149">MS. <HI REND="I">vnto turn</HI>.</NOTE> al our mode.</L>
<L>In our hertes sal we hold non ire,</L>
<L>Ne vengeance sall we non desire.</L>
<L>Fals frenschep we sal non make,</L>
<L N="592">Trew charite so for to sake.</L>
<L>We sal not swer on euyn ne morn</L>
<L>For fardnes for to be for-sworn.</L>
<L>Euyl for euyl we sal not ȝelde,</L>
<L N="596">Bot mayntene right in town &amp; felde;</L>
<L>And if we wranges of oþer take,</L>
<L>We sal it suffer for godes sake.</L>
<L>Our enmys aw vs for to lufe,</L>
<L N="600">And noght ban þam þat vs reproue;</L>
<L>For mekely suld we, mor &amp; les,</L>
<L>Suffer reproue for rightwisnes.</L>
<L>With pride in hert we sal not rise,</L>
<L N="604">Ne be to slaw in god saruyse.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="79a" UNIT="folio"/>No vs aw lightly to lac,</L>
<L>Ne speke no harme be-hind þair bac.</L>
<L>In god we sal set al our thoght</L>
<L N="608">And think þat of our-self es noght</L>
<L>Bot sin &amp; sorow &amp; wrechidnes,</L>
<L>And ilka gude dede of god es.</L>
<L>Þe day of dome vs aw to drede,</L>
<L N="612">An vn-to hell we suld take hede,</L>
<L>And were vs euer with al our mayn</L>
<L>Fro filth of sin, þat sarues payn,</L>
<L>And couaite heuyn euer inwardly,</L>
<L N="616">And thynk ilk day þat we sal dy,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="65"/>And rewle our warkes by reson ryght,</L>
<L>And think þai er euer in godes sight;</L>
<L>If euyl thoghtes our hertes tak,</L>
<L N="620">Kast þam oute for godes sake;</L>
<L>And kepe our moth fro grete carpyng</L>
<L>Of wikkidnes or of wordly thing.</L>
<L>Vn-to prayers we sal vs spede,</L>
<L N="624">And hali lessones here &amp; rede;</L>
<L>And for our mysdedes don be-forn</L>
<L>Suld we mourn both euyn &amp; morn.</L>
<L>In praers to god we [sal] vs<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS150">MS. <HI REND="I">And praers to god we vs</HI>.  See Notes.</NOTE> schriue</L>
<L N="628">And mak a-mendes so in our life.</L>
<L>We sal hate to wirk our awn will</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="79b" UNIT="folio"/>Or our flesch ȝernyng to fulfill;</L>
<L>And on al wise we sal be bayn</L>
<L N="632">Vnto þe saws of our souerayn,</L>
<L>Þat we aw our obidience to.</L>
<L>And also if we se hir do</L>
<L>Oþerwise or wer, als god for-bede,</L>
<L N="636">Þan scho teches vs to do in dede,</L>
<L>Þan sal we ordand our wirkyng</L>
<L>Als crist vs teches, in al thyng:<Q>"Secundum opera eorum nolite facere!"</Q></L>
<L>He sais þus: "workes efter þer saw,</L>
<L N="640">And to þair dedes luke ȝe not draw!"</L>
<L>Þat es to say, if þai wirk wrang,</L>
<L>And tech ȝou grathly for to gang.</L>
<L>We sal not couet in our mode</L>
<L N="644">With folk for to be haldyn gude.</L>
<L>Godes bidynges we sal fulfill</L>
<L>Airly &amp; laite and loud &amp; still,</L>
<L>And luf clennes and chastite,</L>
<L N="648">And frendly vnto al folk be.</L>
<L>Fast suld we fle al vayn louyng,</L>
<L>And mak no strif with old no ȝing.</L>
<L>To old folk suld we do honour,</L>
<L N="652">And febil we sal sucoure.</L>
<L>For our enmes sal we pray,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="80a" UNIT="folio"/>Til a recorde be redy ay,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="66"/>And seker help ay sal we haue</L>
<L N="656">Of godes mercy our saules to saue.</L>
<L>Þer er þe pontes of perfite lifyng</L>
<L>Þat nedful er to old &amp; ȝing;</L>
<L>For if we wil þam gladli do,</L>
<L N="660">Ful fair reward fals vs vnto,</L>
<L>Þat es in endles blis to dwell,</L>
<L>Als crist sais þus in his godspel:<Q>"Oculus non vidit, nec aures audiverunt—</Q></L>
<L>None eghen mai se, ne eris here,</L>
<L N="664">Ne hertes thynk þe blisses clere</L>
<L>Whilk god ordand to þer bi-houe</L>
<L>Þat yn þair liues hym lely luf."</L>
<L>Þarfor es gude þat we tak hede</L>
<L N="668">Hym for to luf &amp; als to drede</L>
<L>Þat vn-to slik blis may vs bryng.</L>
<L>Vn-to þat lord be euer loueyng!</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="5">
<HEAD>V.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De obediencia ad deum.</HEAD>
<L>Now wil I tel, who wil tak tent,</L>
<L N="672">How we sal be obedient</L>
<L>To honowr god with ilka lym</L>
<L>And luf no thynk better þan hym.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="80b" UNIT="folio"/>God suld we luf for thynges thre,</L>
<L N="676">Namely al þat hase dignite</L>
<L>And in haly kirk to sing &amp; rede:</L>
<L>For he til vs merkes slik mede,</L>
<L>And for drede of þe payns of hell,</L>
<L N="680">And for ȝernyng in blis to dwell.</L>
<L>For merit of þer thynges thre</L>
<L>Suld we euermor bowsum be,</L>
<L>And hertli faunde for to fulfil</L>
<L N="684">All þat oure souerayn telles vs till.</L>
<L>Þan wil god of our wark be paide,</L>
<L>And þan vntil vs salbe saide,</L>
<L>Als crist sais in þe sauter buke</L>
<L N="688">Thurgh þe prophet, who likes to luke:</L>
<L>"Als sone als euer he heres my will,</L>
<L>Bowes he baynly me vntill."</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="67"/>Þus may be saide be old &amp; ȝyng</L>
<L N="692">Þat baynly bowes to godes bedyng.</L>
<L>And also ȝit our lord iesus</L>
<L>Vntil his techers tels þus:</L>
<L>"Who so heres ȝou, he heres me."</L>
<L N="696">Þan be þer sawes wele may we se:</L>
<L>Þai þat er to þer souerayn bayne,</L>
<L>To god he dose þe same o-gayne.</L>
<L>And þarfore who so wil be bown</L>
<L N="700"><MILESTONE N="81a" UNIT="folio"/>To lif bi rewle of religiown,</L>
<L>Fro tyme þai wit þer souerayn will,</L>
<L>In wark þai sal it fast fulfill;</L>
<L>Þair souerayn wil &amp; þer wirkyng</L>
<L N="704">Suld go to-geder euyn als a thing.</L>
<L>And al þat wil do þus in dede,</L>
<L>Þe way to heuyn it wil þam lede.</L>
<L>And harder it es þan oþer ways,</L>
<L N="708">Als god vntil vs suthli sais:</L>
<L>"Þe way of lif, who likes to layte,</L>
<L>Þai sal find both hard &amp; straite."</L>
<L>For whi al þat wil com þer-till</L>
<L N="712">Mai not wirk with þer awin will;</L>
<L>Bot hard or softe whider it semys,</L>
<L>Ai bus þai do os oþer demys.</L>
<L>Þan of þer wark es crist wele paide,</L>
<L N="716">Þat þus til his discipils saide:<Q>"Non veni facere voluntatem meam &amp;c.;—</Q></L>
<L>I com not to wirk myne entent,</L>
<L>Bot aynly his þat hase me sent."</L>
<L>Ensampil þus he techis vs til</L>
<L N="720">Þat we sal wirk our souerains wil.</L>
<L>Obediens þus, if it be stabil,</L>
<L>To god &amp; man es acceptabil,</L>
<L>Not to tary ne gruch o-gayne,</L>
<L N="724">Ne to answer with worde in vayn,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="81b" UNIT="folio"/>Ne to be heuy in hert or thoght,</L>
<L>For swilk obedience profites noght.</L>
<L>Bot if þe hert &amp; wark acorde,</L>
<L N="728">It es not likand til our lord;</L>
<L>For al if we fulfil þe dede,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="68"/>We gete þer-for no grace to mede,</L>
<L>Bot titter payn, þat ordand es</L>
<L N="732">To þam þat vses vnbousumnes.</L>
<L>And if we answer oght o-gayn,</L>
<L>Ful mekil mor mun be his payn.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="6">
<HEAD>VI.</HEAD>
<L>Þerfor es alway gude to do</L>
<L N="736">Als þe prophet telles vs to;</L>
<L>For in þe sauter þus he sais:</L>
<L>"I said þat I sal ȝeme my wais</L>
<L>In ilka tyme, both old &amp; ȝung,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS151"><HI REND="I">ȝung</HI> corrected from <HI REND="I">ȝing</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L N="740">Þat I trispast not in my tung;</L>
<L>To ȝeme my moth also I seke,</L>
<L>And on þis wises I am maide meke,</L>
<L>And gude warkes hafe I non don els."</L>
<L N="744">Lo, how þe prophet playnly tels:</L>
<L>Wise men sum tyme letes to say</L>
<L>Wordes þat menes bot wele alway,</L>
<L>Becaus þai wil no ianglers be.</L>
<L N="748"><MILESTONE N="82a" UNIT="folio"/>Þan of mare force may we se</L>
<L>Þat euyl wordes suld non here speke,</L>
<L>Þe whilk with wo er worthi wreke.</L>
<L>And mykel spekyng who so vse,</L>
<L N="752">If it oft gayn, sum tym it nuse.</L>
<L>For þe wisman witnes &amp; sais:</L>
<L>"If þu vse many wordes always,</L>
<L>Fro syn on no<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS152"><HI REND="I">no</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">on</HI>.</NOTE> wise may þow fle."</L>
<L N="756">And in a-noþer stede sais he</L>
<L>Þat in a manes tung es contende</L>
<L>Life &amp; dede to fa &amp; frende.</L>
<L>And namly þai þat soietes er,</L>
<L N="760">Gret spekyng þai suld for-bere.</L>
<L>For til a maistres fals ij thynges:</L>
<L>To spek &amp; tech hir vnderlynges.</L>
<L>And þe discipels suld be stil</L>
<L N="764">And here what es tald þam vntil.</L>
<L>And if þai oght wil aske or haue,</L>
<L>With gret reuerence þai sal it craue,</L>
<L>And al spekyng þai sal for-bere,</L>
<L N="768"><PB REF="" N="69"/>And hering, þat þe saule may dere,</L>
<L>And gif þam vnto god allayn,</L>
<L>Whas trauel þai haf vnder-tayne.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="7">
<HEAD>VII.</HEAD>
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De xij gradibus humilitatis.</HEAD>
<L>Of meknes may we merure take</L>
<L N="772"><MILESTONE N="82b" UNIT="folio"/>Of crist, þat sais þus for our sake</L>
<L>In his gospel, als clerkes ken,</L>
<L>Confortand al cristin men:<Q>"Qui se humiliat exaltabitur—<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS153">Misplaced.</NOTE></Q></L>
<L>Who highes him-self, he bese made law."</L>
<L N="776">Proude men reproues he in þis saw.</L>
<L>And þam to confort þat er meke,</L>
<L>Þus he says, who so wele seke:<Q>"Qui se exaltat humiliabitur—<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS154">Misplaced.</NOTE></Q></L>
<L>He þat laws hym-self here,</L>
<L N="780">He salbe high in heuyn clere."</L>
<L>Þus schews he wele, &amp; suth it es,</L>
<L>Þat oute of pride comes al eghnes.</L>
<L>And for [þe] prophet<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS155">MS. <HI REND="I">for prophet</HI>.</NOTE> wald it fle,</L>
<L N="784">In þe sauter þus sais he:<Q>"Domine, non est exaltatum cor meum—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, my herte ne mi eghen sight</L>
<L>Haf I not rasit vp in hight,</L>
<L>Ne in gret thinges haf I not gayn</L>
<L N="788">To mak maruayls many ayn,</L>
<L>Bot my lif mekly haf I spende,</L>
<L>And highed my saule in-to þi hende.</L>
<L>Þer-for, lord, fra scham me schylde,</L>
<L N="792">Als þe moder dose þe childe."</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="83a" UNIT="folio"/>If we our dedes wil duly drese</L>
<L>To haue þe meret of mekenes</L>
<L>And win vnto þe hight of heuyn,</L>
<L N="796">To whilk mekenes may lede vs heuyn,</L>
<L>Hus bus be-gin with hert &amp; wil</L>
<L>To rase þe stegh þat rechis þer-til,</L>
<L>Bi whilk Iacob in visioun</L>
<L N="800">Saw angels wend both vp &amp; doun.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="70"/>And þis ilk stegh, als clerkes<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS156"><HI REND="I">clerkes</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">crakes</HI>.  See Notes.</NOTE> tels,</L>
<L>To vnderstandyng es not els</L>
<L>Bot thurgh heghnes doun to descend</L>
<L N="804">And thurgh lawnes vpward to wend.</L>
<L>And als þe stegh, with-outin strife,</L>
<L>Es likand til our erthli life,</L>
<L>Þe whilk stegh thurgh our mekenes euyn</L>
<L N="808">God rases vp right to þe heuyn.</L>
<L>Two sides þer-of may signifi</L>
<L>Both oure saules &amp; our bodi,</L>
<L>In þe whilk sides, als men may se,</L>
<L N="812">Er xij steles ordand to be,</L>
<L>Whilk er xij degrese of mekenes,</L>
<L>And right way vnto heuyn þat es.</L>
<L>And who so likes þat way to lere,</L>
<L N="816">Þe xij degres þus may þai here.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="1">
<HEAD>Primus gradus humilitatis.</HEAD><MILESTONE N="83b" UNIT="folio"/>
<L>The first degre of meknes ryght</L>
<L>Es euer to set be-for our sight</L>
<L>Þe drede of god in ilk degre,</L>
<L N="820">So þat it neuer for-getin be,</L>
<L>And thinke how þai þat him for-sakes</L>
<L>Þair mede in hell with murnyng takes;</L>
<L>And who so hym wil luf &amp; drede,</L>
<L N="824">In heuyn sal þai haf þair mede.</L>
<L>Þarfor our lord ay suld we luf,</L>
<L>And drede him for our saule bi-houe,</L>
<L>And kepe fro sin &amp; fro foly</L>
<L N="828">Al þe limes of our body,</L>
<L>And do oway al flesch likinges,</L>
<L>Thynkand þat god þat sese al thinges</L>
<L>Þat we in world here euer wroght</L>
<L N="832">Ouþer in wark, or word, or thoght—</L>
<L>For, als þe prophet proues &amp; sais,</L>
<L>God enserches &amp; sese al-wais</L>
<L>Þe hertes &amp; þe ententes of men,</L>
<L N="836">Als clerkes on þis maner may ken:<Q>"Scrutans corda &amp; renes deus."</Q></L>
<L>And also ȝit þe prophet sais:</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="71"/>"Lord, þou wate my wil alwais,</L>
<L>And thoghtes þat in my hert er hide,</L>
<L N="840">Vnto þe er þai knawne &amp; kide."</L>
<L>Þarfor who wil life wele alway,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="84a" UNIT="folio"/>In his hert sal he think &amp; say:</L>
<L>"Be-for godes sight I salbe clene,</L>
<L N="844">Yf I waste myne euil dedes be-dene."</L>
<L>It is for-bed þus for þis skill</L>
<L>Any to folow þer fleschly will;</L>
<L>Als haly write comaundes &amp; sais:</L>
<L N="848">"Turn þe fro flesch likynges<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS157">MS. <HI REND="I">fleschlikynges</HI>.</NOTE> alwais."</L>
<L>And pray we god with wil &amp; thoght</L>
<L>Þat his wil in vs euer be wroght!</L>
<L>Hali write schews certan skil,</L>
<L N="852">Whi we sal not wirk our awn wil.</L>
<L>For sum warkes þat vs think perfite,</L>
<L>In godes sight er dedely delite.</L>
<L>Sum þat þe bodi thynk gude &amp; fine</L>
<L N="856">Wil lede þe saule vntil hel pyne.</L>
<L>And for þi of slike rekles warkes</L>
<L>Sais haly writ, os kens þir clerkes:<Q>"Corrupti sunt et abhominabiles—</Q></L>
<L>Þai er corrumpid &amp; maide ful vile</L>
<L N="860">Þat uses with filth þair flesch to file."</L>
<L>And when so we ȝern ony thing</L>
<L>Þat may fall vnto flesch likyng,</L>
<L>Thinke we god waites vs weterly!</L>
<L N="864">Als þe prophet sais þus þerby:</L>
<L>"Al my desire both day &amp; nyght,</L>
<L>Lord, es set be-for þi sight;</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="84b" UNIT="folio"/>And al mi<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS158"><HI REND="I">mi</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">in</HI>.</NOTE> ȝarnyng may þou se,</L>
<L N="868">Il or gude wheder it be."</L>
<L>Þerfor euyl desire suld we fle,</L>
<L>For dede es euer in þe entre,</L>
<L>Redey to fel vs in þat fit;</L>
<L N="872">And þerfor þus sais hali writ:</L>
<L>"Wend þou not, for hard ne nesch,</L>
<L>Efter þe ȝarnynges of þi flesch—<Q>Secundum desideria cordis non ambules!"</Q></L>
<L><PB REF="" N="72"/>Þen, sen we wote our lord iesus</L>
<L N="876">Es euer bihaldand vntil vs,</L>
<L>And sese who sekes to godes seruyse</L>
<L>And wil not als wriches vnwise,</L>
<L>And als we wote oure gude angel</L>
<L N="880">Al our warkes to god wil tel,</L>
<L>Al be it neuer so litil a schar—</L>
<L>Þan es wisdom to be-war</L>
<L>No warkes to do our god to greue.</L>
<L N="884">For al if he here lene vs leue</L>
<L>For to a-mend vs, whils we may,</L>
<L>Neuer-þe-lese on þe last day</L>
<L>Sal he reherce &amp; sai vs til:</L>
<L N="888">"Þus did þou, &amp; I held me stil."</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="2">
<HEAD>Secundus gradus humilitatis.</HEAD><MILESTONE N="85a" UNIT="folio"/>
<L>Ane oþer degre our meknes proues:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS159">In the right margin: <HI REND="I">ij gradus</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>Þat es who hir awn wil not lufes,</L>
<L>Ne hase no likyng to fulfil</L>
<L N="892">Þat hir desire entisice hir til,</L>
<L>Bot of þir wordes makes hir myrour,</L>
<L>Whilk iesus saide, our sauiour:<Q>"Non veni facere voluntatem meam—</Q></L>
<L>I com not to do myn entent,</L>
<L N="896">Bot his allaine þat hase me sent,</L>
<L>Þat es my fader in heuyn on hight;</L>
<L>His wil I do both day &amp; night."</L>
<L>And hali writ wil proue ful playn</L>
<L N="900">Þat our awn wil es worthi payn,</L>
<L>And who so of þer wil here misses</L>
<L>Serues þe croun of endles blisses.</L>
<L>Þarfor for-sake we here our wil,</L>
<L N="904">Þat we may cum þat blis vntil.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="3">
<HEAD>iij gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The third degre es þis to take:</L>
<L>Who þat gladli for goddis sake</L>
<L>Wilbe obedient with þer mayne</L>
<L N="908">Vnto [þe] wil<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS160">MS. <HI REND="I">Vnto wil</HI>.</NOTE> of þeir souerayne,</L>
<L>And þat with gude cher wil fulfil</L>
<L>What so þair souerayne tels þam vntil;</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="73"/>Al[s] be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS161">MS. <HI REND="I">Albe</HI>.</NOTE> þe apostil es pupplist,</L>
<L N="912">Þat sais þus of our lord crist:</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="85b" UNIT="folio"/>"He wos meke to his fader rede</L>
<L>And obedient vnto þe dede."</L>
<L>[. . . . .]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS162">A line is omitted.</NOTE></L>
<L N="916">To gif ensaumpil mor &amp; lese,</L>
<L>Þat þai suld so obedient be</L>
<L>To þeir souerayns in þer degre,</L>
<L>And tent no thyng to þer awn wil,</L>
<L N="920">Bot þer souerayns fast to fulfil</L>
<L>With obedience in word &amp; dede;</L>
<L>Than es þer wark worth mikyl mede.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="4">
<HEAD>iiij gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS163">The h in <HI REND="I">The</HI> was added subsequently.</NOTE> fourt degre of mekenes clere</L>
<L N="924">Es of al þai þat suffers here</L>
<L>And dose what so þer souerayn sais</L>
<L>Al if þe wark be wrang alwais</L>
<L>Or greuus til þam for to do,</L>
<L N="928">ȝet sal þai sone assent þer-to,</L>
<L>And do it wele with al our mayn</L>
<L>With-outyn ony grochin ogayne,</L>
<L>And irk not þan, or it be done;</L>
<L N="932">Als hali writ wil tech ful son:<Q>"Qui perseuerauerit vsque in finem—</Q></L>
<L>He þat lastes vntil þe end,</L>
<L>Salbe safe &amp; vnto blis wende."</L>
<L>And also haly writ sais þus</L>
<L N="936"><MILESTONE N="86a" UNIT="folio"/>Ane oþer claus [to] comford<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS164">MS. <HI REND="I">claus comford</HI>.</NOTE> vs:</L>
<L>"Þi hert," he sais, "sal comford take</L>
<L>To be souerand for godes sake."</L>
<L>In oþer places he proues alway</L>
<L N="940">How souerand men to god suld say:<Q>"Propter te mortificamur tota die—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, we suffer<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS165">MS. <HI REND="I">suffor</HI>.</NOTE> here with sere payn</L>
<L>Al þe day for þi sake for to be slayn."<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS166">Partly on erasure.  See Notes.</NOTE></L>
<L>Þat mens: "we suffer payn mekely</L>
<L N="944">Als lams þat er lede for to dy,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="74"/>And we er not ouercumen þer-in,</L>
<L>For mede we hope þerby to wyn;</L>
<L>Bot al we suffer it for iesus</L>
<L N="948">And for his sake þat so lufyd vs,</L>
<L>Þat with his awn wil &amp; his rede</L>
<L>For our sake wold suffer dede</L>
<L>So to saue vs thurth his grace."</L>
<L N="952">And also in ane oþer place</L>
<L>May meke men say on þis manere:</L>
<L>"Lord, þou hase asayde vs here</L>
<L>With angers a-gayns our desire,</L>
<L N="956"><MILESTONE N="86b" UNIT="folio"/>Als siluer es asaide with fire,</L>
<L>Þou hase vs <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS167">A participle (<HI REND="I">don, led, put, set</HI>?) is omitted.</NOTE> vnto þe snare</L>
<L>And made vs to haue angers þair."</L>
<L>For to assay vs in swilk thing,</L>
<L N="960">If we be meke to his bidyng,</L>
<L>And also for to schew þat we</L>
<L>Suld to a souerayn bowsum be</L>
<L>And wirk efter þer wil alway,</L>
<L N="964">Vnto our lord þus may he say:</L>
<L>"Lord, o-bouen set hase þou</L>
<L>Souerayns to wham vs bus bew."</L>
<L>Þus for god sake we suld be bown</L>
<L N="968">To suffer sere persecucioun,</L>
<L>What so men wil vn-til vs do;</L>
<L>Als þe gospel techis vs to:</L>
<L>Who so betes vs on a scheke,</L>
<L N="972">To bede oþer we suld be meke,</L>
<L>And wrang of vs who wil oght haue,</L>
<L>To bede þam mor þan þai wold craue;</L>
<L>Þan es our mekenes mykil at prase;</L>
<L N="976">Als sant paule þe appostil sais:</L>
<L>It be-houes folk of religioun</L>
<L>Suffer tenes &amp; tribulacioun,</L>
<L>And honor þam þat dose þam scath,</L>
<L N="980">Whider þai be wele paide or wrath.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="87a" UNIT="folio"/>And þer meret it may not eke,</L>
<L>Bot if þai in þer hertes be meke</L>
<L>To suffer wilfuly alwais</L>
<L N="984"><PB REF="" N="75"/>What so men to þam dose or sais,</L>
<L>And be not greuyd with word ne dede;</L>
<L>Swilk mekenes makes vs mykil mede.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="5">
<HEAD>v gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The fift degre es to be swift</L>
<L N="988">Eftir our sin to seke to schrift,</L>
<L>And trewly tel with-outyn trayne</L>
<L>Al our lif &amp; nothing layne,</L>
<L>Als hali writ on þis wise sais:</L>
<L N="992">"Vnto god sal I schew my wais,</L>
<L>And al my sines with mayn &amp; mode</L>
<L>Sal I schew to god so gude;</L>
<L>For his mercy may mend &amp; pas</L>
<L N="996">All wikkidnes þat in world euer was."</L>
<L>And þai þat þus þer sines wil bete,</L>
<L>Þus may þai sai with þe pro[p]hete:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS168">MS. <HI REND="I">prohete</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>"Lord, all þe sines þat er myn awne,</L>
<L N="1000">Vnto þe haue I made þam knawn;</L>
<L>And all onright þat euer I dide,</L>
<L>Lord, vnto þe I haue not hide;</L>
<L>Bot I sal pronunce for sertane</L>
<L N="1004">All my mysdedes my-self ogayne.</L>
<L>Þarfore, der lord, do þou to me</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="87b" UNIT="folio"/>Efter þi grace so grete plente,</L>
<L>And lord, not efter my misdede,</L>
<L N="1008">Bot efter þi mercy graunte me mede."</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="6">
<HEAD>vjtus gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The sext degre of mekenes þan:</L>
<L>Who salbe meke, man or woman,</L>
<L>Bus hald þam-self vile &amp; worthy</L>
<L N="1012">Al maners of charch to vnderly,</L>
<L>And think þai er worthi to do</L>
<L>Mor þan oni wil put þam to,</L>
<L>And þat þai er worthi to haue</L>
<L N="1016">Wor þan any on þam vouches safe,</L>
<L>So litil be þam-self to set,</L>
<L>Say þan þus with þe prophet:<Q>"Consumptus sum et humiliatus—</Q></L>
<L>I am wastid wor þan I wend,</L>
<L N="1020"><PB REF="" N="76"/>For myne awn kind not I kend.</L>
<L>Now als a best meke sal I be</L>
<L>Aneli, lord, for luf of þe."</L>
<L>God len vs so to be bowsum,</L>
<L N="1024">Þat we may til his kingdom cum.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="7">
<HEAD>vij gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The seuent degre þan of þe twelue</L>
<L>Es þat vs aw to law our-selue,</L>
<L>And in hert hald vs vnworthi</L>
<L N="1028"><MILESTONE N="88a" UNIT="folio"/>To cum in any gude company,</L>
<L>And of our-self we sal say þen</L>
<L>Os þe prophet wil clerely ken:<Q>"Ego sum vermis &amp; non homo—</Q></L>
<L>I am a worm &amp; no woman."</L>
<L N="1032">And þusgaite folos þar-on þan:</L>
<L>"Mine awne condicions wil I ken,</L>
<L>Reproue &amp; oute-kast of al women.</L>
<L>My hyghnes in herth þen wil I knaw,</L>
<L N="1036">Bot, lord, þi law hase mayd me law.</L>
<L>Wele es me yn þis lif here</L>
<L>To be so meke þi laws to lere."</L>
<L>God len vs so his laws to lufe,</L>
<L N="1040">Þat we bide in blis obufe.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="8">
<HEAD>viij gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The aght degre of meke lifyng</L>
<L>Es þat non sal do no thing,</L>
<L>Ne no wark þat es for to wirk,</L>
<L N="1044">Bot efter þe rewle of þer kirk</L>
<L>Or be ensampil to vnderstand</L>
<L>Of þam we knaw er wele lifand.</L>
<L>For ensawmpil of oþer dede</L>
<L N="1048">Salbe merure vs for to lede</L>
<L>In our doing both nyght &amp; day,</L>
<L>So þat we folow our rewle alway.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="9">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="88b" UNIT="folio"/>ix gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The neyntt degre to ald &amp; ȝong</L>
<L N="1052">Es þat vs aw to ȝem our tong</L>
<L>And spek not bot we be requerde.</L>
<L>For hali writ þus hase vs lerde,</L>
<L>Þat who so mykil speking vse,</L>
<L N="1056"><PB REF="" N="77"/>Of sin þai may not þam excuse;</L>
<L>And gret spekers er not worthy</L>
<L>For to cum in gude company.</L>
<L>Þarfor es gude to take reward</L>
<L N="1060">With onest folk þat spech be spaird,</L>
<L>And ordan vs to spek no thyng</L>
<L>Bot honestly to godes loueyng.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="10">
<HEAD>x gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The x degre es þus to lere:</L>
<L N="1064">Not to lagh with ouer-lyght cher</L>
<L>Ne with laghing our voce to raise.</L>
<L>For hali writ þus leres &amp; sais:</L>
<L>"A fole," he sais, "bi day &amp; nyght</L>
<L N="1068">In laghyng rais his vose on hight."</L>
<L>Þarfor es gude to man &amp; childe</L>
<L>For to ler at be laghter-myld</L>
<L>And of al cowntnanse myld &amp; stil</L>
<L N="1072">With-outyn ony mater of il.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="11">
<HEAD>xj gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The xj wisses þus alway:</L>
<L>Al if vs aw litil to say</L>
<L>And in laghing not rudely rise,</L>
<L N="1076"><MILESTONE N="89a" UNIT="folio"/>ȝit es gude þat we vs avise,</L>
<L>When so we speke bi morn or noun,</L>
<L>To say our wil in wordes foune,</L>
<L>And þat our wordes be wittely.</L>
<L N="1080">For þus þe wisman sais þerbi:<Q>"Sapiens in paucis verbis expedit—</Q></L>
<L>He þat is wise in word &amp; dede,</L>
<L>His wark with fone wordes wil he spede."</L>
<L>And naymly women nyght &amp; day</L>
<L N="1084">Aw to vse fune wordes alway.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part" N="12">
<HEAD>xij gradus.</HEAD>
<L>The twelft degre wele for to seke</L>
<L>Es, of þam þat salbe meke,</L>
<L>Not aynli to be meke in wil,</L>
<L N="1088">Bot in wark mekely to fulfil</L>
<L>Al þat es to þam cumand:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS169">MS. <HI REND="I">cunand</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>To gang, or ride, or sit, or stand,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="78"/>In kirk, in closter, in town &amp; feld,</L>
<L N="1092">In way, in ȝerd, in ȝouth &amp; eld.</L>
<L>With law lowting þai salbe bayn</L>
<L>With-outyn ony gruching o-gayn.</L>
<L>Vnto erth down sal þai luke</L>
<L N="1096">Sorowand for syn, os sais þe buke</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="89b" UNIT="folio"/>Of þe pupplicane, þat prayde</L>
<L>Vnto god &amp; þusgaite saide:<Q>"Miserere mihi peccatori—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, al thinges wele knaw þou can;</L>
<L N="1100">Haue mercy on me, sinful man!</L>
<L>I am vn-worthi, lord," said he,</L>
<L>"To lift myn eghen vp vnto þe</L>
<L>Or for to luke vp vnto heuyn."</L>
<L N="1104">And also sais þe þrophet hewyn:<Q>"Curuatus sum &amp; humiliatus sum nimis—</Q></L>
<L>I am bowed to þe erth," he sais,</L>
<L>"And so I am meke mayd alwais."</L>
<L>Now haue I tald þir twelf degrese</L>
<L N="1108">Þat er of meknes for to chese,</L>
<L>Þe whilk may bring vs for to be</L>
<L>With god in perfite charite</L>
<L>And al our lif lely to lede</L>
<L N="1112">With-outyn trauel or ony drede.</L>
<L>We sal do gladli of custum</L>
<L>Þat air til vs wos ful irksum,</L>
<L>And not aynli payn to eschew,</L>
<L N="1116">Bot allayn for luf of iesu.</L>
<L>And þat lufe &amp; swete delite</L>
<L>Þat in vs salbe so parfite,</L>
<L>Oute of al wais it sal vs wise</L>
<L N="1120">And bryng vs vnto endles blis.</L>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="8">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="90a" UNIT="folio"/>VIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De officiis in noctibus.</HEAD>
<L>In tyme of winter, in Descember,</L>
<L>Fro þe kalandes of Nouember</L>
<L>Vn-to þe pase, es risyng right</L>
<L N="1124">At þe aght our of þe nyght,</L>
<L>And after mydnyght for to rest,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="79"/>Þat þar mete may bi wele degest.</L>
<L>Þan sal þai rise to syng &amp; rede;</L>
<L N="1128">And after þan who so hase nede</L>
<L>May haue þer meditaciounes</L>
<L>In sawters, saulms, &amp; orisowns.</L>
<L>And fro al tyme of pase bi al left</L>
<L N="1132">Vn-to þo same kalandes cum eft,</L>
<L>Þan es it ordand on þis wise,</L>
<L>Þat nunes sal vnto matens rise</L>
<L>When þe day be-gyns to daw,</L>
<L N="1136">Þat þai litters bi light may knaw.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="9-18">
<HEAD>IX-XVIII.</HEAD>
<L>Mor how þai sal serues do,</L>
<L>Nedes not her to tel þam to;</L>
<L>Þai knaw þer salmes &amp; ilka verse.</L>
<L N="1140">Þarfor þe rowle I wil reherce,</L>
<L>How þai sal do wirchep alway,</L>
<L>When þai to god sal sing or say.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="19">
<HEAD>XIX.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vbique credimus diuinam esse presenciam—</HEAD>
<L>We trow &amp; wele we vnderstand</L>
<L N="1144"><MILESTONE N="90b" UNIT="folio"/>Þat our lord god alweldand</L>
<L>In ilka place es redi bown</L>
<L>To here our prayer &amp; orisown;</L>
<L>And euyl &amp; gude, al heres he,</L>
<L N="1148">Rich &amp; pouer in ilk degre.</L>
<L>And most we trow he be present</L>
<L>In haly kirk bi þis entent</L>
<L>Þat his seruaundes most comynli</L>
<L N="1152">Serues him þer, als es worthy.</L>
<L>Þan sen we wote þat he es þer,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS170"><HI REND="I">þer</HI>, originally <HI REND="I">þair</HI>, or the like.</NOTE></L>
<L>Oure mynd on hym suld be þe mayr</L>
<L>To serue hym dredfully always,</L>
<L N="1156">Als þe prophet vs teches &amp; sais:<Q>"Seruite domino cum timore!"</Q></L>
<L>He sais þus: "serues ȝor god in drede,</L>
<L>Hopand of hym to haue ȝor mede."</L>
<L>And wisely, sais he, we suld sing</L>
<L N="1160"><PB REF="" N="80"/>Lessons vn-to goddes loueyng.</L>
<L>In ayn oþer plase sais he</L>
<L>Þat angel[s]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS171">MS. <HI REND="I">angel</HI>.</NOTE> sal our synging se:<Q>"In conspectu anglorum psallam tibi."</Q></L>
<L>On þis maner til vs he teles</L>
<L N="1164">And sais: "lord, in sight of angels</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="91a" UNIT="folio"/>Sal we syng to þi wirchep."</L>
<L>Þan aght vs for to tak gude kepe</L>
<L>Þat our prayer &amp; orisoune</L>
<L N="1168">Be done with gude deuocioune,</L>
<L>So þat our hert &amp; moth acord;</L>
<L>Þan es it likand til our lord</L>
<L>And vnto his angels also,</L>
<L N="1172">Sen we may se, al þat we do</L>
<L>And þat we say bi day or nyght,</L>
<L>Al es set befor þare sight.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="20">
<HEAD>XX.</HEAD>
<L>Bi gude ensaumpil may we se,</L>
<L N="1176">How bayn &amp; bowsum we wold be</L>
<L>Vn-to a lord, her whar we lif,</L>
<L>Þat ony gude myght til vs gif.</L>
<L>We wold hym loute, es not at layn,</L>
<L N="1180">And til his bidyng be ful bayn</L>
<L>With al wirchep þat we may weld.</L>
<L>Þan of mor force in town &amp; feld</L>
<L>Wirchep suld we til him bede</L>
<L N="1184">Þat in heuyn sal merk vs our mede.</L>
<L>With sorow of syn we suld him seke</L>
<L>And wirchep with wordes meke.</L>
<L>For haly writ lely vs leres</L>
<L N="1188">Þat law hertes lightly he heres.</L>
<L>Our prayers suld be ordand euyn</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="91b" UNIT="folio"/>Schort &amp; clen to god of heuyn,</L>
<L>Bot if deuocioun cum emang</L>
<L N="1192">And likyng for to hald þam lang.</L>
<L>For haly writ þus leli leres:</L>
<L>Heuyn es thirld with schort prayers;</L>
<L>Þat es to say, if þat þai be</L>
<L N="1196"><PB REF="" N="81"/>Mellid with no kyns vanite,</L>
<L>Bot vnto godes wirchep alway.</L>
<L>God grant vs grace so for to pray.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="22">
<HEAD>XXII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Quomodo sanctimonialles dormiant.</HEAD>
<L>All samyn o nyghtes lig þai sall,</L>
<L N="1200">If a hows wil herber þam all,</L>
<L>And ilkon serly in a bede,</L>
<L>And ilkon in a kirtil clede</L>
<L>And girdid o-bown on al wise,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS172">MS. <HI REND="I">alwise</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L N="1204">Þat þai may be redy to rise.</L>
<L>And if þar be gret company,</L>
<L>Þat al may not in a hows ly</L>
<L>In sere bedes, als I said hare,</L>
<L N="1208">Þan ald women &amp; wise of lare</L>
<L>May haue ȝong nouices, þat þai lere,</L>
<L>To lig in a bed both infere.</L>
<L>In þe hows whar [þai] lig<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS173">MS. <HI REND="I">whar lig</HI>.</NOTE> o nyght,</L>
<L N="1212">Candel or laumpe sal euer be lyght.</L>
<L>And kniues to bed þai sal non bere,</L>
<L>For dred þat þai myght do þam dere.</L>
<L>When tyme es ordand, on al wise,</L>
<L N="1216"><MILESTONE N="92a" UNIT="folio"/>With-outyn tareyng luk þai rise</L>
<L>And hast þam hertly for to cum</L>
<L>Vnto godes serues al &amp; sum.</L>
<L>And þis es þe encheson why</L>
<L N="1220">Þat þai sal al in a hows ly:</L>
<L>Be-caus no idilnes sal vse,</L>
<L>Ne fro godes serues þam excuse.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="23">
<HEAD>XXIII.</HEAD>
<L>And if þar ony vn-bowsum bene,</L>
<L N="1224">Or prowd in hert, os sum er sene,</L>
<L>Þat to þar rewle ne þer souerayn</L>
<L>Wil not bow, bot gruch o-gayn,</L>
<L>Twise preuely þai salbe blamyd</L>
<L N="1228">And, bot þai sese, opynly schamyd.</L>
<L>And if ane wil not mend her so,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="82"/>Opyn reprofe falis hir vnto</L>
<L>Omang þe couent euer-ilkane.</L>
<L N="1232">And if sche ȝit be ouer-tayn,</L>
<L>And sche ken þe perils of cursing,</L>
<L>Sche salbe cursid for þat same þing.</L>
<L>And if sche wil not mend hir mynd,</L>
<L N="1236">Þan bodely sche salbe pynd.</L>
<L>And in hert penance sal sche lende,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="92b" UNIT="folio"/>Vntill sche wil hir mys amend.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="24">
<HEAD>XXIV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Modus castigacionis.</HEAD>
<L>Noman suld curs mor ne lese</L>
<L N="1240">Bot for thyng þat ful greuus es.</L>
<L>And so sal penance mor &amp; myn</L>
<L>Be gyfyn &amp; getyn efter þe sin,</L>
<L>Als light penance for litil thing,</L>
<L N="1244">And for gret greuus chastying.</L>
<L>Als if a non be nyght or day</L>
<L>Forget þat sche suld sing or say</L>
<L>Or ony werk þat sche suld wirk</L>
<L N="1248">In couent or yn hali kirk,</L>
<L>Sche salbe suspend fro þe mete</L>
<L>Al tyme þat hir felows sal ete.</L>
<L>Allayn at mete syne sal sche sit,</L>
<L N="1252">Þat oþer may hir trispas wit.</L>
<L>Sum seruyse salbe fro her let</L>
<L>[. . . . .]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS174">Here, for the second time, a whole line is omitted.</NOTE></L>
<L>Mor þan for oþer on raw,</L>
<L N="1256">Þat sche may so hir trispase knaw.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="25">
<HEAD>XXV.</HEAD>
<L>Mor greuus syns if on wil wirk,</L>
<L>Sche salbe suspend fro þe kirk,</L>
<L>Fro mete, &amp; fro al<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS175"><HI REND="I">fro al</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">for al</HI>.  Cf. 2463.</NOTE> company</L>
<L N="1260">Þat sche myght oght be cumfort bi.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="93a" UNIT="folio"/>Allone by hir-self sal sche do</L>
<L>What wark so sche es put vnto,</L>
<L>So for to punych hir body;</L>
<L N="1264"><PB REF="" N="83"/>Als þe appostil speks þerbi:</L>
<L>Swilk men, he sais, sal trauel tast</L>
<L>With grete fullyng þer flesch to wast,</L>
<L>So þat þer saules may safly cum</L>
<L N="1268">Bi-for god on þe day of dom.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="26">
<HEAD>XXVI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt non communicent cum ex-communicatis.</HEAD>
<L>[If] None or nouese, mor or lese,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS176">See Notes.</NOTE></L>
<L>Comyn with þam þat cursed es,</L>
<L>Or cum vntyl hir whar sche dwels</L>
<L N="1272">To ete or speke or do oght els,</L>
<L>Þe same payn sal þai vnderly</L>
<L>Þat sche suffers for hir foly,</L>
<L>Vntil þai haue þat mys amend,</L>
<L N="1276">Bot if þar souerayn haf þam send:</L>
<L>Þan may þai baldly speke &amp; do</L>
<L>Als far os þai haf leue vnto.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="27">
<HEAD>XXVII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De pertinentibus ad custodem.</HEAD>
<L>Ane Abbot or a priorese,</L>
<L N="1280">Þat so ouer oder kepers es,</L>
<L>Aw besily for to be-gyn</L>
<L>To hele þam þat er hurt with syn,</L>
<L>Thurgh haly lernyng þam to lech,</L>
<L N="1284">Als crist þus in þe gospel tech;</L>
<L>He sais: "to hel folk es no nede</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="93b" UNIT="folio"/>Ficiciens her for to bede,</L>
<L>Bot þo men þat er seke &amp; sore</L>
<L N="1288">Nedes for to haue medcyns mor."</L>
<L>A souerayn aw þarfor to send</L>
<L>To þe synful, þair mys to mend,</L>
<L>Of þe eldest &amp; þe most wise,</L>
<L N="1292">Bi þair resons to ger þam rise,</L>
<L>And tech þam turmentes for to take</L>
<L>And suffer þam for godes sake,</L>
<L>And so assay bi þer soft saw</L>
<L N="1296">The synful to meknes at draw.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="84"/>For ane sinful al suld þai pray</L>
<L>Þat god wise hir to better way.</L>
<L>Ilka hird aw to do þis,</L>
<L N="1300">So þat non of his schep perise.</L>
<L>And in case þat on perist were,</L>
<L>Ensaumpil of crist may we ler</L>
<L>To comford þam at our power.</L>
<L N="1304">For he tels vs on þis maner</L>
<L>Bi ensaumpil how a hird-man</L>
<L>A febil schepe warest &amp; wane:</L>
<L>He left al his flok os him list</L>
<L N="1308">And went to seke ane þat he myst;</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="94a" UNIT="folio"/>And sune when he had fon þat same,</L>
<L>A-pon his bak he broght it ham;</L>
<L>And þerof wos he so wele payd,</L>
<L N="1312">Þat to his neghburs þus he said:<Q>"Congratulamini mihi quia inueni ouem quam &amp;c.;—</Q></L>
<L>Bes glad &amp; makes mery with me!</L>
<L>My schep wos lorn, &amp; fun es he."</L>
<L>So aw a souerayn for to seke</L>
<L N="1316">Þam þat dose wrang, with wordes meke,</L>
<L>And fathly faund with myght &amp; mayne</L>
<L>To get þam til þe flok ogayne.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="28">
<HEAD>XXVIII.</HEAD>
<L>And if it fall, als god for-bede,</L>
<L N="1320">Þat ony haue don gret mysdede</L>
<L>And wil not mend her bi no way</L>
<L>For noght þat men may do or say,</L>
<L>For fair wordes ne for chaistying,</L>
<L N="1324">Ne for dred of þe gret cursyng,</L>
<L>Þan sal þe souerayn nyght &amp; day</L>
<L>Ger al hir sisters for hir pray.</L>
<L>And if sche non wise wil amend,</L>
<L N="1328">Þan, als þe appostil hase vs kend,</L>
<L>Sche salbe catchid fro cumpany,</L>
<L>Þat oþer bi not hermyt hir by.</L>
<L>For thurgh a schep þat rote hase hent</L>
<L N="1332">May many schep with rote be schent.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="94b" UNIT="folio"/>So may a synful man do scath</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="85"/>Vnto him-self &amp; oþer bath.</L>
<L>Swilk foles es best forto for-sake,</L>
<L N="1336">Sen þat þai wil no mercy take.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="29">
<HEAD>XXIX.</HEAD>
<L>And if ane so for wikkid dede</L>
<L>Leue hir abbay &amp; hir wede,</L>
<L>And lif in world efter þer wil,</L>
<L N="1340">And sine wold turn þe hows vntil,</L>
<L>Þe penance to hir sche sal restore</L>
<L>Of þat dede þat sche went oute fore,</L>
<L>And profer hir-self to suffer payne</L>
<L N="1344">At þe ordenance of hir sofferayne,</L>
<L>So þat men may hir meknes knaw</L>
<L>Thurgh hir lifyng, if it be law.</L>
<L>And if sche eft a-way wil go,</L>
<L N="1348">Eft sal sche be resauyd so.</L>
<L>And þe third tyme if sche be gone,</L>
<L>A-gayn hir aw not to be tone,</L>
<L>Bot whar hir list þan lat hir pas,</L>
<L N="1352">Als sche þat neuer of order was.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="30">
<HEAD>XXX.</HEAD>
<L>Chastying aw mesured to be</L>
<L>To ald &amp; ȝung in sere degre.</L>
<L>For þe trispas of childer ȝing</L>
<L N="1356">Aw men to vse soft schastisyng,</L>
<L>Als fastyng &amp; betyng with wande</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="95a" UNIT="folio"/>And noþer strakes of staf ne hande.</L>
<L>And if þai wil of wordes haf drede,</L>
<L N="1360">To bete þam þan it es no nede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="65">
<HEAD>LXV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De prepocita, id est subpriorissa.</HEAD>
<L>In þis maner it ordand es,</L>
<L>Þat a president subpriores</L>
<L>Sal non be chosin for no chanch</L>
<L N="1364">Bot by þe priores puruyanch.</L>
<L>For [if] it<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS177">MS. <HI REND="I">For it</HI>.</NOTE> wor done oþer-wise,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="86"/>Strif &amp; debate myght lightly rise.</L>
<L>For if sche wor chosin be þo same</L>
<L N="1368">Þat chays þe priores by nayme,</L>
<L>Þan thurgh eggyng of þe fende</L>
<L>A highnes in hir hert myght lend,</L>
<L>Thinkand þus in hir awn rede:</L>
<L N="1372">"If þat þe priores wor dede,</L>
<L>Þo same by wham sche chosin es,</L>
<L>Wold ches me vnto priores."</L>
<L>And so perchanch in swilk a case,</L>
<L N="1376">If contek in þe couent rase,</L>
<L>Þe subpriores so with pride</L>
<L>A-gayns hir souerayn suld sone chide,</L>
<L>And gete oþer of hir assent</L>
<L N="1380">To maynteyn hir in swilk entent</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="95b" UNIT="folio"/>And for to supplant hir souerayn;</L>
<L>And in swilk case myght sum be slayn</L>
<L>And perels fall, als folk may fele.</L>
<L N="1384">And þarfor es it ordand wele,</L>
<L>Þat subpriores &amp; segerstone</L>
<L>And oþer offecers ilkon</L>
<L>Sal non be chosin bi no way</L>
<L N="1388">Bot als þe priores wil puruay.</L>
<L>And who so oþer-wise hase chose,</L>
<L>Þe priores aw þam to depose</L>
<L>And oþer in þar stede to take</L>
<L N="1392">In gude luf &amp; for godes sake.</L>
<L>Subpriores sal euer be bayne</L>
<L>Vnto þe saws of hir souerayne,</L>
<L>And no thing wirk a-gayns hir wil</L>
<L N="1396">Arely ne layte, ne loude ne stil.</L>
<L>For þe mor high state þat þai haue,</L>
<L>Þe mor þam aw þer rewle to saue.</L>
<L>And if sche groch oght for to do</L>
<L N="1400">Of thyng þat touches þe rewle vnto,</L>
<L>Or if sche maynteyn mor or lese</L>
<L>For to myspay hir priores,</L>
<L>Or els rebel a-gayns hir rise,</L>
<L N="1404">Be word sche salbe warnyd thrise,</L>
<L>And bi þe iiij tyme, bot if sche mende,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="87"/>Be chasted als þe rewle hase kende.</L>
<L>And if sche wil not mend hir so,</L>
<L N="1408"><MILESTONE N="96a" UNIT="folio"/>Sche salbe pute hir office fro,</L>
<L>And ordand in hir stede to be</L>
<L>On þat es abil to þat degre.</L>
<L>And if sche wil not mend hir ȝit,</L>
<L N="1412">Oute of þair flok sche salbe flit.</L>
<L>Bot euer þe priores bus nede</L>
<L>Haue gude discreciun in hir dede.</L>
<L>Scho bus wirk be non enuy,</L>
<L N="1416">Bot for þe luf of god anely,</L>
<L>Be charite &amp; concience clene,</L>
<L>And þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS178"><HI REND="I">þe</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> rewle right to maynteyn.</L>
<L>And if sche so ordand hir dede,</L>
<L N="1420">Of god þan getes sche mykil mede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="31">
<HEAD>XXXI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De eleccione celararie.</HEAD>
<L>A Celerer sal schosin be</L>
<L>Bi counsel of þe comunalte</L>
<L>And fully bi þe hale assent</L>
<L N="1424">Of þe priores &amp; þe couent,</L>
<L>Wise &amp; meke &amp; of myld thews,</L>
<L>Not prowd ne lither, like to schrews,</L>
<L>Not slaw ne grochand in hir dede,</L>
<L N="1428">Bot swilk als wil god loue &amp; drede.</L>
<L>Scho sal tak ȝeme to mor &amp; les</L>
<L>Bi puruyance of þe Priores.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="96b" UNIT="folio"/>For al sal cum into her hend</L>
<L N="1432">Þat salbe in hir offece spend.</L>
<L>Hir offece sal sche gladly do,</L>
<L>And ȝeme wele þat es takyn her to.</L>
<L>And who so askes hir skilwis thyng,</L>
<L N="1436">Sche sal not greue þam with groching.</L>
<L>Bot if it a-cord not with wit,</L>
<L>Mekely sal scho warn þam it.</L>
<L>And if it aw forto be done,</L>
<L N="1440">Scho sal it gif gladly &amp; sone.</L>
<L>So vnto hir gret mede may rise,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="88"/>Als þe appostel sais on þis wise:<Q>"Qui bene administrauerit, gradum bonum sibi adquirit—</Q></L>
<L>Who serues wele, with hertes fre,</L>
<L N="1444">Wins to þam-self a gud degre."</L>
<L>A celerer aw to be myld &amp; meke</L>
<L>For to serue þam þat er seke,</L>
<L>And ȝong childer, &amp; gestes pore,</L>
<L N="1448">And oþer þat askes at þe dore.</L>
<L>Vnto al swilk tent sal sche take</L>
<L>And serue þam for godes sake,</L>
<L>Witand of all swilk doing</L>
<L N="1452"><MILESTONE N="97a" UNIT="folio"/>On domesday sal [sche]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS179"><HI REND="I">sche</HI> or <HI REND="I">scho</HI> is omitted after (or before) <HI REND="I">sal</HI>.</NOTE> mak reknyng.</L>
<L>Al þe vessel of þe abbay</L>
<L>Aw hir to ȝeme in right aray,</L>
<L>So þat non perise ne be lorn</L>
<L N="1456">Be hir defaute ne euyn ne morn.</L>
<L>Scho sal not saue hir-selu vntil,</L>
<L>Bot wirk al be [hir] souerayn<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS180">MS. <HI REND="I">albe souerayn</HI>.</NOTE> wil.</L>
<L>Fair of answer sal sche be</L>
<L N="1460">To euer ilkon in þer degre.</L>
<L>For meke answer es mykil at prays,</L>
<L>Als hali writ witnes &amp; says:<Q>"Sermo bonus super datum optimum—</Q></L>
<L>Fair wordes in ilka plase</L>
<L N="1464">Er oboun oþer giftes of grace."</L>
<L>A celerer sal gladly fulfil</L>
<L>Al þat fals hir offece vntil,</L>
<L>And gladly gif when oþer craue,</L>
<L N="1468">And mekely ask what so<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS181"><HI REND="I">so</HI>, see Notes.</NOTE> wil haue.</L>
<L>And if scho so rewle al hir dede,</L>
<L>Þan may scho serue ful mykil mede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="32">
<HEAD>XXXII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De officio sacriste.</HEAD>
<L>The Priores, &amp; oþer nane,</L>
<L N="1472">Aw for to ches a segerstane</L>
<L>To ring þe bels in right aray</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="89"/>Til al þer seruys nyght &amp; day.</L>
<L>And wisely aw hir forto wirk</L>
<L N="1476"><MILESTONE N="97b" UNIT="folio"/>To kepe enourmentes of þe kirk,</L>
<L>Als chalese, boke, &amp; vestmentes,</L>
<L>Relekes, waxe, &amp; annual rentes.</L>
<L>Er aw to ordan al bedene,</L>
<L N="1480">Als vessel, close, &amp; kep þam clene.</L>
<L>Indentures suld þai be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS182">We had expected a transitive verb.</NOTE> ilkon,</L>
<L>And þe priores sal kepe þe tone,</L>
<L>So þat when on sal out flit,</L>
<L N="1484">By þer endenturs may þai wit,</L>
<L>What thynges efter on er left</L>
<L>To hir þat sal resaf þam eft.</L>
<L>And who so wil reklesly wirk</L>
<L N="1488">Or files þe þinges of haly kirk,</L>
<L>Þai salbe chasted greuusly</L>
<L>Efter þer warkes es worthi.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="35">
<HEAD>XXXV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De septimariis coquine.</HEAD>
<L>In þe kechin sal þai serue oboute,</L>
<L N="1492">Ilkon þer wouke with-outyn doute,</L>
<L>And serues sal non refuse,</L>
<L>Bot if skilwis caus þam excuse,</L>
<L>Þat þai til oþer thinges takes tent</L>
<L N="1496">Mor profetabil to þe couent.</L>
<L>And euer þam aw to tak rewarde</L>
<L>At euer þe eldest most be sparde.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="98a" UNIT="folio"/>And when on hase endid hir wouke,</L>
<L N="1500">Besily hir aw to luke,</L>
<L>Þat al be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS183">MS. <HI REND="I">albe</HI>.</NOTE> clene þat to hir fell,</L>
<L>Both howses, clothes, &amp; wessell,</L>
<L>To liuer os clene os scho kan</L>
<L N="1504">Vnto hir þat sal serue þan,</L>
<L>So þat, if oght wantand be,</L>
<L>In whom defaut es, may men se.</L>
<L>And who so þus salbe seruand</L>
<L N="1508">May tak a sop wele be-for-hand,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="90"/>So þat þer penance bi not gret</L>
<L>Forto bide til þe latter mete,</L>
<L>And for þai sal with meri cher</L>
<L N="1512">Serue ilkon on sides sere.</L>
<L>When on hase seruyd a wouk to end</L>
<L>And sal oute of þer seruys wend,</L>
<L>Kneland bi-for þe couent</L>
<L N="1516">Þus sal scho say with gud entent<Q>"Benedictus es, domine, qui adiuuisti me—</Q>:</L>
<L>Blissid be þou, lord, þat neuer falled,</L>
<L>Þat hase me helpid &amp; counseld!"<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS184">Originally <HI REND="I">counsailed</HI>, or the like.</NOTE></L>
<L>Thris on þis wise sal scho say,</L>
<L N="1520">And blisyng take, &amp; wend hir way.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="98b" UNIT="folio"/>And scho þat enters in seruese,</L>
<L>Kneland sal say on þis wise:<Q>"Deus, in adiutorium meum intende—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, to my helping þou take hede,</L>
<L N="1524">And hast þe hertly me to spede!"</L>
<L>And with hir hed scho sal bow down</L>
<L>And mekely take hir benysoun;</L>
<L>And on þis wise when sche don has,</L>
<L N="1528">Vntil hir serues sal scho pas.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="45">
<HEAD>XLV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De delinquentibus in ecclesia.</HEAD>
<L>If þat on faile in ony thing,</L>
<L>In verses or saulms to rede or sing,</L>
<L>Or in lessons þam er kend,</L>
<L N="1532">Bot þai mekely þat mys amend</L>
<L>Þair in presens of company,</L>
<L>Grete payn sal þai vnderly.</L>
<L>And þe nouices, whils þai er ȝing,</L>
<L N="1536">Aw to be scorid for swilk a thing.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="46">
<HEAD>XLVI.</HEAD>
<L>And als who so wil fayntly faile</L>
<L>And not trewly do þer trauayle</L>
<L>In kechin, celer, or in cels,</L>
<L N="1540">In bakkows, brewhows, or ourels,</L>
<L>Or els þat loises mor or les</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="91"/>Bi resoun of þer reklesnes,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="99a" UNIT="folio"/>And comes not son to þer souerayne</L>
<L N="1544">For þat trispas to tak þer payne,</L>
<L>Bot layns it stil, os no man wist,</L>
<L>Til it with oþer be puplist,</L>
<L>Þan sal mor payn to þam be layde</L>
<L N="1548">Þan if þam-self þe suth had saide.</L>
<L>For if none wit þerof bot þay,</L>
<L>Vnto þer souerayn suld þai sai</L>
<L>Or til þer confessure in hi,</L>
<L N="1552">Þat may þam mend al preuely.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="47">
<HEAD>XLVII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De horis assignandis.</HEAD>
<L>Subpriores, als woman wise,</L>
<L>Sal kepe þe oures of god seruyse,</L>
<L>Or<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS185"><HI REND="I">Or</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">Er</HI>.</NOTE> els a-noþer bi her assent</L>
<L N="1556">Vnto þat office sal tak tent,</L>
<L>So þat seruyse bi day &amp; nyght</L>
<L>In ilk seson be rewlid right.</L>
<L>And scho sal assigne old &amp; ȝing</L>
<L N="1560">Til all þat þai sal rede or sing,</L>
<L>And se þat non sal syng ne rede</L>
<L>Bot þat er abil vnto þat dede.</L>
<L>And dredefully ilkon sal do</L>
<L N="1564">Al þat þai er assigned vnto.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="39">
<HEAD>XXXIX.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De mensura ciborum.</HEAD>
<L>Who to þe kechin sal tak tent</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="99b" UNIT="folio"/>Sal ordan wele for þe couent</L>
<L>Euer-ilk-a day ij maners of mete,</L>
<L N="1568">Bi-caus þat who so may not ete</L>
<L>Of þe ton for nokins nede,</L>
<L>Of þe toþer þai may þam fede.</L>
<L>So til a couent suffes may</L>
<L N="1572">ij maner of potege ilka day.</L>
<L>If þai hafe appils or oþer thing</L>
<L>Ordand of þeir awn growyng,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="92"/>Þen sal þai make seruys of slike</L>
<L N="1576">Vnto euer-ilkon in-like.</L>
<L>To ilka lady suffise may</L>
<L>A pond of bred a-pon a day,</L>
<L>Wheder þai wil ete ons or twise.</L>
<L N="1580">If it be ordand on þis wise,</L>
<L>Þat euer-ilkon wil of hir laue</L>
<L>Þe third part til hir sopper saue,</L>
<L>And to þe celerer wil it seme</L>
<L N="1584">Swilk seruys for to saf &amp; ȝeme.</L>
<L>And who so wendes gret trauel til</L>
<L>Salbe seruyd at þer souerans wil,</L>
<L>With mor or les þat es to mene,</L>
<L N="1588">Bot euer þat non outrage be sene;</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="100a" UNIT="folio"/>For no thyng es [als] gret<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS186">MS. <HI REND="I">es gret</HI>; cf. p. 28, ll. 11-12.</NOTE> enmy</L>
<L>Vnto godes folk als glotony.</L>
<L>And þarfor þus sais iesus crist,</L>
<L N="1592">Als witnes wele þe euaungelest:<Q>"Videte ne grauentur corda uestra crapula et ebrietate—</Q></L>
<L>Greues not ȝour hartes for no nede</L>
<L>With glotony &amp; dronkenhede."</L>
<L>And les mesur in ilka thing</L>
<L N="1596">Salbe vsid to childer ȝyng.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="40">
<HEAD>XL.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De mensura potus.</HEAD>
<L>The mesure salbe of þer drink</L>
<L>Set efter þer souerayn think,</L>
<L>Efter þai trauel arely &amp; late,</L>
<L N="1600">And after þe plais es cald or hate;<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS187">MS. <HI REND="I">hete</HI>; cf. 2004.</NOTE></L>
<L>Bot at þai neuer assent vntil</L>
<L>Þair flesch ȝernyng fully to fil.</L>
<L>Softly sal þai tast, &amp; fair,</L>
<L N="1604">Drynk þat may þer hedes inpair,</L>
<L>Als myghty wyne or nobil aile.</L>
<L>For þe wisman tels slik a taile:</L>
<L>"Wyne þat es myghty &amp; strang</L>
<L N="1608">Mase witty men forto wirk wrang."</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="93"/>Þarfor es wit, to lest &amp; mast,</L>
<L>Wine or aile softly to tast.</L>
<L>And if þai in slik places be,</L>
<L N="1612">Þat þai of noþer haf plente,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="100b" UNIT="folio"/>Swilk os þai find þen sal þai fande,</L>
<L>And loue god hertly of his sande.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="33">
<HEAD>XXXIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt nichil proprium habeant.</HEAD>
<L>In relegion, als it es knawn,</L>
<L N="1616">Sal þai haf no thing of þer awn,</L>
<L>Ne no þing clame be propirte,</L>
<L>Bot al þing sal in comun be.</L>
<L>No giftes sal [þai] gif<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS188">MS. <HI REND="I">sal gif</HI>.</NOTE> ne take</L>
<L N="1620">Bot anly for þeir souerayn sake,</L>
<L>Ne no þing sal þai clayme ne craue</L>
<L>Bot als þer souerayn wouches saue.</L>
<L>Tabels, boke, ne oþer gere</L>
<L N="1624">With-outyn hir wil sal þai none were,</L>
<L>Bot whatkyn þing so on haf sall,</L>
<L>Þat salbe comun vnto þam all.</L>
<L>Scho þat wil not wirk on þis wise,</L>
<L N="1628">Scho salbe warned anes or twise;</L>
<L>And if scho so mend not hir hert,</L>
<L>With greter payn scho salbe gert.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="34">
<HEAD>XXXIV.</HEAD>
<L>For haly writ witnes &amp; sais</L>
<L N="1632">How þai þat wons so in abbais</L>
<L>Aw to haue leuer of al thing</L>
<L>Þat leful es to þeir lifing.</L>
<L>And ilkon aw in-like to haue,</L>
<L N="1636">And efter mor aw non to craue.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="101a" UNIT="folio"/>Bot euer-ilkon, als I air saide,</L>
<L>Of hir part sal hald hir paide.</L>
<L>And if ony be so vnbayne</L>
<L N="1640">In word or werk to groch ogayn,</L>
<L>And scho þer-of þan be ascried,</L>
<L>With penance sal scho be chastid.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="36"><PB REF="" N="94"/>
<HEAD>XXXVI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De sororibus infirmis.</HEAD>
<L>When ony of godes saynd[s]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS189">MS. <HI REND="I">saynd</HI>.</NOTE> es seke,</L>
<L N="1644">All þe oþer sal with hertes meke</L>
<L>Confort hir &amp; with hir dwell,</L>
<L>Als crist vs kens in his gospell:</L>
<L>"Seke I wos," suthly sais he,</L>
<L N="1648">"And kindly com ȝe vnto me.</L>
<L>For þat ȝe did oþer in my name,</L>
<L>Vnto my-self ȝe did þe same."</L>
<L>Þai þat er seke sal vnder-take</L>
<L N="1652">Þat oþer þam serues for gode sake</L>
<L>And forto fulfil charite,</L>
<L>And nothing for þer awn degre.</L>
<L>In seknes suld þai haf sufferans</L>
<L N="1656">And loue god euer of alkyn chanch.</L>
<L>For þe mor þai er meke &amp; stil,</L>
<L>Þe mor mede es ordand þam til.</L>
<L>And so a souerayn sal euer be meke</L>
<L N="1660"><MILESTONE N="101b" UNIT="folio"/>And bowsum to þam þat er seke,</L>
<L>And with gude [wil] alway<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS190">MS. <HI REND="I">gude alway</HI>.</NOTE> to spend</L>
<L>On ony þing þat myght þam mend,</L>
<L>And ordan seruandes þam vntil,</L>
<L N="1664">Þat wil þam serue with gude wil,</L>
<L>And honest place for to be in,</L>
<L>Whor þai may [s]it<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS191">MS. <HI REND="I">it</HI>, apparently a blunder for some verb, possibly <HI REND="I">sit</HI> or <HI REND="I">li</HI>.</NOTE> with-outyn dyn.</L>
<L>Bathes &amp; bawmes sal þai haue</L>
<L N="1668">Als oft-sithes os þai wil craue.</L>
<L>And gladli sal men<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS192"><HI REND="I">men</HI> omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE> to þam gete</L>
<L>Flesch or fisch, what þai wil ete.</L>
<L>And when þai er fulli amend,</L>
<L N="1672">Lif furth als þe rewle hase kend.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="37">
<HEAD>XXXVII.</HEAD>
<L>A souerayn aw forto be-hald</L>
<L>ȝapli vnto ȝong &amp; ald,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="95"/>Þat euer-ilkon in þer degre</L>
<L N="1676">Be ordand als þam aw to be,</L>
<L>So þat þe ȝong may trauel tast,</L>
<L>And þe eldest be hordand mast.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="38">
<HEAD>XXXVIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De leccione ad prandium.</HEAD>
<L>The couent, when þai set at mete,</L>
<L N="1680">For to rede sal þai not for-gete.</L>
<L>On þe sunnday sal on begin,</L>
<L>And al þat wouke scho sal not blin.</L>
<L>Vnto hir felos sal scho say,</L>
<L N="1684"><MILESTONE N="102a" UNIT="folio"/>Besekand þat þai for hir pray.</L>
<L>And sone when þat scho enters in,</L>
<L>Þis vers to say scho sal be-gin:<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS193">MS. <HI REND="I">salbe gin</HI>.</NOTE><Q>"Domine, labia mea aparies—</Q></L>
<L>Lord, opin my lippes als gastly lech,</L>
<L N="1688">And my moth sal þi louyng tech."</L>
<L>Hir souerain sal blis hir gud spede,</L>
<L>And so scho sal be-gin<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS194">MS. <HI REND="I">salbe gin</HI>.</NOTE> to rede.</L>
<L>Þan of al nose þai salbe stil</L>
<L N="1692">And grathly tak entent hir til.</L>
<L>If any of þam nede oght to haue,</L>
<L>Softly with signes þai sal it craue.</L>
<L>And scho þat redes sal sithen ete</L>
<L N="1696">With þam þat serues at þe mete.</L>
<L>And in order þai sal not rede,</L>
<L>Bot who so best can do þat dede,</L>
<L>And most likandly tels &amp; leres</L>
<L N="1700">Vnto þam þat þe lesson heres.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="41">
<HEAD>XLI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>In quibus horis reficiantur.</HEAD>
<L>Of time of mete now es to lere,</L>
<L>In times &amp; sesons of þe ȝere.</L>
<L>Fro pas right vnto witsunnday</L>
<L N="1704">At þe sext our ete sal þai,</L>
<L>Þe whilk es midday for to mene,</L>
<L>And sine sal þai soupe bedene.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="96"/><MILESTONE N="102b" UNIT="folio"/>In somer, fro witsunday be past,</L>
<L N="1708">Wedinsday &amp; friday sal þai fast,</L>
<L>Bot if þai oþer swink or swete</L>
<L>In hay or corn with trauel grete.</L>
<L>And if þai non slike trauel done,</L>
<L N="1712">On þos days sal þai fast to none.</L>
<L>And on oþer days, als I air saide,</L>
<L>At mydday sal þer mete be graide.</L>
<L>Bot al þis salbe purued playn</L>
<L N="1716">At þe ordinance of þer souerayn.</L>
<L>What seson so scho putes þam to,</L>
<L>With-outin groching sal þai do.</L>
<L>Fro time þat december be-gin</L>
<L N="1720">Vntil clene lentyn cum in,</L>
<L>At hi none sal þai ete;</L>
<L>Þer lesons sal þai not for-gete.</L>
<L>In lentyn sal non to mete gang,</L>
<L N="1724">Or efter þe our of euyn-sang;</L>
<L>And al seruys þan sal þai sai</L>
<L>Efter mete bi light of day,</L>
<L>So þat al be<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS195">MS. <HI REND="I">albe</HI>.</NOTE> rewlid right</L>
<L N="1728">At wend to bede bi dais lyght.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="42">
<HEAD>XLII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt non loquantur post complectorium.</HEAD>
<L>In times when þai sal soup infere,</L>
<L>Þen sal þai set efter soppere</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="103a" UNIT="folio"/>Al in a stede, whor þai wil sit,</L>
<L N="1732">And rede lessons of hali writ</L>
<L>Or els of liues of hali men,</L>
<L>Þat gastly comfort may þam ken.</L>
<L>Tales of trofils þai sal non tel,</L>
<L N="1736">Ne oþer maters þan of mel,</L>
<L>Þat may let haly orisoun</L>
<L>Or driue þam fro deuocioun.</L>
<L>On fastyngdais, in ilka place,</L>
<L N="1740">Efter euynsang a litil space</L>
<L>In a stede þai sal set down.</L>
<L>And mak a schort colaciown.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="97"/>And als son os þai haf done,</L>
<L N="1744">Al samen sal þai wend ful son</L>
<L>Vnto complin, mor &amp; myn.</L>
<L>And efter þe our of complin</L>
<L>In þer hertes al sal þai hurd,</L>
<L N="1748">And non haue lef to spek a word,</L>
<L>Bot gestes or oþer þinges it gar—</L>
<L>Bot þai spek it myght be-war—</L>
<L>Or if þer souerayn say þam to</L>
<L N="1752">Nedeful thinges þai er to do.</L>
<L>Vnto hir sal þai answer þan</L>
<L>Als curtesly als euer þai kan.</L>
<L>And preuely so sal þai say,</L>
<L N="1756">Þat non þam here bot scho &amp; þay.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS196"><HI REND="I">þay</HI> was subsequently altered into <HI REND="I">day</HI>; cf.  Notes.</NOTE></L>
<L><MILESTONE N="103b" UNIT="folio"/>And oþer speking salbe none</L>
<L>Fro tyme þat þai haue complyn done.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="43">
<HEAD>XLIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt cito veniant ad missam &amp; ad mensam.</HEAD>
<L>Als son als þai here þe beles</L>
<L N="1760">To mes, matyns, or oght els,</L>
<L>Þan sal þai hast þam on al wise</L>
<L>Sone to com to godes seruyse.</L>
<L>Wheder so euer þai sit or stand,</L>
<L N="1764">Al thyng sone sal þai lef of hand</L>
<L>And wightly to þe kirk at win;</L>
<L>Bot neuer-þe-les þai sal not ryn.</L>
<L>And who es not redy grayd,</L>
<L N="1768">When gloria efter þe first saulm es said,</L>
<L>In order þen þai sal not be,</L>
<L>Bot stand in þe lawest degre,</L>
<L>Þat þai be of þer souerayn sene</L>
<L N="1772">And of þair sisters al be-dene.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS197">MS. <HI REND="I">albe dene</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>And so þai sal with repentans</L>
<L>Mak amendes for swilk a chanch.</L>
<L>For in þam-self þai sal haue schame</L>
<L N="1776"><PB REF="" N="98"/>Þat þai er worthi to ber slik blaym.</L>
<L>In þe quer sal þai stand algate,</L>
<L>And al if on cum neuer so late;<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS198">1775-1778 were written, by mistake, in this order: 1776, 1778, 1775, 1777.  Then, by way of correction, the letters b, d, a, c were added in the margin.</NOTE></L>
<L><MILESTONE N="104a" UNIT="folio"/>For els sum wold take no kepe,</L>
<L N="1780">Bot oþer ianglyng or els slepe,</L>
<L>And als for þai þat standes in quere</L>
<L>Sal haue part of al þat þai here.</L>
<L>And if on dwel so lang oway</L>
<L N="1784">At ony of þe houres of þe day,</L>
<L>Þe same þan salbe þeir mede,</L>
<L>And noþer sal þai sing ne rede.</L>
<L>In þe lawest stede sal þai stand,</L>
<L N="1788">Bot if þeir souerayn þam command.</L>
<L>At þe mete so sal it fair</L>
<L>Of þam þat er not redi þair</L>
<L>To say þe grace &amp; take þer sete;</L>
<L N="1792">Þai sal bide to þe latter mete.</L>
<L>And who so wil not be chastid,</L>
<L>Til langer efter sal scho bide</L>
<L>And sine be hir allayn to sit,</L>
<L N="1796">And sum seruice sal hir want ȝit</L>
<L>Of mete or drynk þat myght hir glade,</L>
<L>Vntil scho haue amendes mayde.</L>
<L>Þe same payn es to þam puruayde</L>
<L N="1800">Þat bides [not] til<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS199">MS. <HI REND="I">bides til</HI>.</NOTE> þe grace be sayde</L>
<L>Efter mete, als it es vsed,</L>
<L>Bot þai haue caus to be excused.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="44">
<HEAD>XLIV.</HEAD>
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="104b" UNIT="folio"/>De modo satisfaccionis.</HEAD>
<L>Scho þat es for cursed kend</L>
<L N="1804">And wilfully wil hir amend,</L>
<L>Scho sal wait þe tyme of þe day</L>
<L>When þe couent in þe schapiter pray,</L>
<L>And doun scho sal fall in þe flore</L>
<L N="1808">Opon hir face be-for þe dore,</L>
<L>And oblis hir vntil þer fete</L>
<L>Murnand sore hir mys to bete.</L>
<L>And ilk day<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS200">MS. <HI REND="I">ilkday</HI>.</NOTE> sal þis be hir mese,</L>
<L N="1812"><PB REF="" N="99"/>Vntil hir souerayn bid hir sese.</L>
<L>And if hir souerayn þedir hir call,</L>
<L>Vntil hir fete first sal scho fall,</L>
<L>And sine lig in hir aller way</L>
<L N="1816">Besekand þam for hir to pray.</L>
<L>If hir souerayn, þat hase power,</L>
<L>Gif hir leue to cum in quer,</L>
<L>On hir knes doun sal scho fall,</L>
<L N="1820">Þat scho may be sene of þam all.</L>
<L>Þis penance ilk day<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS201">MS. <HI REND="I">ilkday</HI>.</NOTE> sal scho do,</L>
<L>Vntil hir souerayn se þerto.</L>
<L>And when scho ful mendyng may trow,</L>
<L N="1824">Scho sal say: "sese! it suffes now."</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="48">
<HEAD>XLVIII.</HEAD>
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De operibus cotidianis.</HEAD>
<L>All þat wons in religioun</L>
<L>Aw to haue sum ocupacioun</L>
<L>Ouþer in kirk of hali bedes</L>
<L N="1828"><MILESTONE N="105a" UNIT="folio"/>Or stodying in oder stedes.</L>
<L>For ydilnes, os sais sant paul,</L>
<L>Es grete enmy vnto þe saul.</L>
<L>And þerfor es ordand þat þai</L>
<L N="1832">Sum gude warkes sal wirk alway,</L>
<L>And sum certane times of þe ȝer</L>
<L>To wirk with hand, os men may her.</L>
<L>Fro pase, thurgh al cristyndome,</L>
<L N="1836">Til þe kalandes of october cum,</L>
<L>Vnto prime sone sal þai rise,</L>
<L>And sine ilkon wirk on þer wise</L>
<L>What so es most nedeful labore</L>
<L N="1840">Vntil þe tyme of þe third oure.</L>
<L>And lessons sal þai rede þan next</L>
<L>Fro þe third our vnto þe sext.</L>
<L>And efterward thurgh wirchep <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS202">The rhyme-word is missing, possibly <HI REND="I">kete</HI>, 'glad,' 'gladdened,' 'strengthened.'</NOTE></L>
<L N="1844">Fro oures &amp; mes wend vnto mete.</L>
<L>And efter mete, þen sal þai slepe,</L>
<L>And silence al samen sal þai kepe,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="100"/>So þat none do oþer disese,</L>
<L N="1848">Bot ilkon paid oþer to plese.</L>
<L>Sone efterward, when þis es done</L>
<L>And þai haf said þe our of none,</L>
<L>Vntil þeir werk þen sal þai gang</L>
<L N="1852"><MILESTONE N="105b" UNIT="folio"/>Vnto þe tyme of euynsang,</L>
<L>To scher or bind, if it be nede,</L>
<L>Or dike or els do oþer dede.</L>
<L>For vnto trauel wor we born,</L>
<L N="1856">And al our elders vs be-forn.</L>
<L>Bot trauel aw mesurd to be</L>
<L>Til ilkon efter þer degre,</L>
<L>To men or women, old or ȝing,</L>
<L N="1860">Ilkon to do diuers þing.</L>
<L>Fro october, os I are sayd,</L>
<L>Vnto lentyn es þus puruayd:</L>
<L>In orisons &amp; in þer oures</L>
<L N="1864">And lessons salbe þer laboures.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De obseruanciis in xlesima.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS203">Originally belongs to the following chapter.</NOTE></HEAD>
<L>In lentyn tyme þen sal þai rise</L>
<L>Arly, &amp; say þer seruyse</L>
<L>And orisons til godes honoure,</L>
<L N="1868">Vntil it be past þe third oure.</L>
<L>Þan to þe tent our sal þai wirk,</L>
<L>And sine til non serue in þe kirk.</L>
<L>And in lentyn aw þam to luke</L>
<L N="1872">Þat ilkon haue ordand a buke,</L>
<L>Whilk salbe red right to þe end,</L>
<L>Als þe cours of þe rewl hase kend.</L>
<L>And who so groches oght here-o-gayn</L>
<L N="1876"><MILESTONE N="106a" UNIT="folio"/>Salbe punest with greuus payne.</L>
<L>Who tentes to trofils &amp; wil not rede</L>
<L>And þai ouertayn with þat dede,</L>
<L>With payn þai sal amendes make,</L>
<L N="1880">So þat oþer ensaumpil take.</L>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="49">
<HEAD>XLIX.</HEAD>
<L>In lentyn aw þam to be clere</L>
<L>Be-for all oþer times of þe ȝere,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="101"/>In haly bedes þat tyme to lif,</L>
<L N="1884">And vnto god haly þam gif,</L>
<L>Abstenand þam fro drynk &amp; mete,</L>
<L>And gif þam vnto penance grete,</L>
<L>And fand to fle al flesch likyng</L>
<L N="1888">And honor god ouer alkines þing.</L>
<L>With clene desire so sal þai bide</L>
<L>Þe tyme of paise, þai sal þat tide,</L>
<L>And kepe þat, lord, so with clene life,</L>
<L N="1892">Þat medcyn es to man &amp; wife.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="50">
<HEAD>L.</HEAD>
<L>Þai þat sal walk bi way, or wirk,</L>
<L>And may not cum to haly kirk,</L>
<L>In what stede so þai be sett,</L>
<L N="1896">Þeir seruyse sal þai not for-gete,</L>
<L>Bot kepe all þe oures of þe day</L>
<L>With als grete honoure os þai may,</L>
<L>And say þer seruyse in ilk seson</L>
<L N="1900">With wil &amp; gude deuocioun.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="51">
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="106b" UNIT="folio"/>LI.</HEAD>
<L>And if on sal on erand wend</L>
<L>Furthward vnto ony frend</L>
<L>A þinkes to com a-gayn þat day,</L>
<L N="1904">Al if men vnto mete þam pray,</L>
<L>For to ete sal þai not assent,</L>
<L>Bot if þai asked leue, or þai went.</L>
<L>And who so trispas in þis þing,</L>
<L N="1908">Þai ryn in peryl of cursyng.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="52">
<HEAD>LII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De oracione in secretis.</HEAD>
<L>In chapiter or kirk who likes to lend,</L>
<L>When godes seruys is sayd til end,</L>
<L>To mak þeir meditaciouns</L>
<L N="1912">In haly prayers &amp; orisouns,</L>
<L>So preuely þen sal þai pray,</L>
<L>Þat non oþer here quat þai say.</L>
<L>And preualy furth sal þai wyn,</L>
<L N="1916"><PB REF="" N="102"/>Þat þai let none þat lefes þerin.</L>
<L>Þus euer ilkon sal hald silence,</L>
<L>When þai sal pray in godes precens,</L>
<L>Noght with crying ne voce ful grete,</L>
<L N="1920">Bot with murnyng on brest to bete.</L>
<L>Who so wil not do os I tel,</L>
<L>In prayng þai sal not dwel,</L>
<L>Bot furth þai sal be had in hy,</L>
<L N="1924"><MILESTONE N="107a" UNIT="folio"/>Þat oþer be not harmyd þerby.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="53">
<HEAD>LIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De hospitibus suscipiendis.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores aw to be prest</L>
<L>Forto resaue ilka gude gest</L>
<L>And at hir myght þam mere make</L>
<L N="1928">Soueraynly for godes sake,</L>
<L>Namely þam þat er pilgrams knawn,</L>
<L>And pouer þat hase not of þer awn.</L>
<L>For god vntil [vs] þus<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS204">MS. <HI REND="I">vntil þus</HI>.</NOTE> sal say</L>
<L N="1932">In dome, a-pon þe dredful day:<Q>"Hospes eram et colligistis me—</Q></L>
<L>I wos a gest in my degre,</L>
<L>And in ȝour hous ȝe herberd me."</L>
<L>Þan aw vs gestes &amp; gud pilgrims</L>
<L N="1936">For to releue in al þere lims</L>
<L>And for to refresch in al right,</L>
<L>Als it es det be day &amp; nyght,</L>
<L>And oblis þam kissink of pese</L>
<L N="1940">Perfite luf forto encres.</L>
<L>And when þai cum, bi day or nyght,</L>
<L>And also when þai wend to flight,</L>
<L>Loute vnto þam aw grete &amp; small</L>
<L N="1944">Or els vnto þer fete at fall,</L>
<L>Witand wele in þat sesoune</L>
<L>Þai honour crist in þer persoune.</L>
<L>For who so resaues þe pure man</L>
<L N="1948"><MILESTONE N="107b" UNIT="folio"/>In crist name, resaues crist þan.</L>
<L>A souerayn sal ger gestes kepe</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="103"/>With honour &amp; with gret wirchepe</L>
<L>Or rede to þam, or ger be rede,</L>
<L N="1952">How hali men þer liues lede,</L>
<L>So þat he<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS205"><HI REND="I">he</HI> is a mistake, possibly for <HI REND="I">þer</HI> or <HI REND="I">it</HI>.</NOTE> be to þam puplist,</L>
<L>How þai sal lif be þe law of crist.</L>
<L>A priores hir fast sal breke,</L>
<L N="1956">And silence, when scho suld not speke,</L>
<L>To myrth hir gestes in þat scho may,</L>
<L>Bot if it be dere fasting day</L>
<L>And ymbrin-days or els vigil,</L>
<L N="1960">Whilk ilka man es bun vntil.</L>
<L>Bot al if scho brek, be ȝe bold,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS206">Originally <HI REND="I">bald</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>Þe couent sal þeir right curs hald.</L>
<L>Scho sal gif water vnto þer hend<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS207">MS. <HI REND="I">hand</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L N="1964">And wesch þeir fete, als crist hase kend.</L>
<L>When þai so do, þai sal reherce,</L>
<L>Word bi word, &amp; say þis verce:<Q>"Suscepimus, deus, misericordiam tuam in medio—</Q></L>
<L>We haue resauyd, lord, þi mercy</L>
<L N="1968">In þe mydes of þe hows<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS208">Originally <HI REND="I">þi hows</HI>.</NOTE> haly."</L>
<L>On þis maner crist wil vs ken</L>
<L>To resaue pilgrims &amp; pouer men,</L>
<L>For when we þam resaue with wil,</L>
<L N="1972"><MILESTONE N="108a" UNIT="folio"/>Crist resaue we vs vntil.</L>
<L>Þe gestes kechin salbe set</L>
<L>Allone, þat it no noþer let,</L>
<L>So þat þai be seruyd at ese,</L>
<L N="1976">And ilkman redy þam to plese.</L>
<L>And luk þer bedes ordand bene</L>
<L>With litter larch &amp; clothes clene,</L>
<L>And swilk seruandes assigned þam til</L>
<L N="1980">Þat wil þam serue with gude wil.</L>
<L>None aw þam do forto greue,</L>
<L>Ne speke with þam with-outyn leue,</L>
<L>Bot loutand hals þam wher þai go</L>
<L N="1984">And with blissing pase furth þam fro.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="54"><PB REF="" N="104"/>
<HEAD>LIV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt nichil accipiant sine lisencia.</HEAD>
<L>If litters or bils be sent to rede,</L>
<L>Or oþer giftes of greter mede</L>
<L>Be send fro frendes in feld or toun</L>
<L N="1988">Til women of religioun,</L>
<L>Scho sal resaue non hir vntil,</L>
<L>Bot scho first wit hir souerayn wil.</L>
<L>And if hir frendes fer or nere</L>
<L N="1992">Send hir gudes or giftes sere,</L>
<L>Or scho þam tak for ony nede,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="108b" UNIT="folio"/>To þe priores scho sal þam bede.</L>
<L>And if þe priores at hir wil</L>
<L N="1996">Gif þo giftes a-noder vntil,</L>
<L>Scho vnto wham þe giftes whor sent,</L>
<L>Sal not be greuyd in hir entent,</L>
<L>If hir presand be so puruayd,</L>
<L N="2000">Bot in hert sal scho hold hir payde.</L>
<L>For what þer souerayn dose ilk dele</L>
<L>Aw þam to think worthi &amp; wele.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="55">
<HEAD>LV.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De indumentis.</HEAD>
<L>Thay sal be clede ful wele, we wate,</L>
<L N="2004">Efter þer place es cald or hate.</L>
<L>For in cald stedes who so er sted,</L>
<L>Þam nedes forto be better cled;</L>
<L>In who er in hate cuntre,</L>
<L N="2008">Sich clething to þam may be.</L>
<L>And al it sal be puruayd playne</L>
<L>At þe ordinance of þeir souerayne.</L>
<L>In comun places for alkins note</L>
<L N="2012">Sufficis a kirtil &amp; a cote;</L>
<L>And mantels sal þai haue certayne,</L>
<L>In winter dubil, in somer playne;</L>
<L>And changing kirtils sal þai haue</L>
<L N="2016">In nyghtes þer oþer forto saue.</L>
<L>Schos þai sall haue, whor þai dwel,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="109a" UNIT="folio"/>Swilk os þai may find for to sel.</L>
<L>Of þe farest þai sal not by,</L>
<L N="2020"><PB REF="" N="105"/>Bot þe vilist ful bowsumly.</L>
<L>And þeir souerayn aw forto se</L>
<L>Þat þair gere euynly o[r]dand<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS209">MS. <HI REND="I">odand</HI>.</NOTE> be,</L>
<L>Mete for þam þat sal it fang,</L>
<L N="2024">And noþer to schort ne to lang.</L>
<L>When þai tak new, þe old sal þen</L>
<L>Be partid til pouer women.</L>
<L>And when þai sal went in cuntre,</L>
<L N="2028">Þair clething sal mor honest be;</L>
<L>And home a-gayn when þai cum eft,</L>
<L>Þen sal þai were slik os þai left.</L>
<L>Vntil þeir beddyng sal þai haue</L>
<L N="2032">At suffise þam fro cauld to saue.</L>
<L>And oftsithes sall þer bed be sene,</L>
<L>Þat no tresure be þam be-twene,</L>
<L>Ne no gude þat to þam may gayne;</L>
<L N="2036">Who so it hase, sall soffer payne.</L>
<L>For whi þer souerayn sal þam bede</L>
<L>All vnto þam þat es nede.</L>
<L>Bot when scho gifes, scho sal be-hald<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS210">MS. <HI REND="I">salbe hald</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L N="2040">To þis þat holi writ hase tald</L>
<L>And set to se for certayne</L>
<L>In þe dedes of þe appostil[s]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS211">MS. <HI REND="I">appostil</HI>.</NOTE> playne:<Q>"Diuidebatur singulis, prout cuique opus erat."</Q></L>
<L><MILESTONE N="109b" UNIT="folio"/>He tels how crist depairtid hase</L>
<L N="2044">Intil ilkon, os myster was.</L>
<L>So suld a souerayn in hir daile</L>
<L>Tak reward to seke &amp; haile,</L>
<L>To ȝing or old, wheder þai be,</L>
<L N="2048">And serue ilkon in þeir degre.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="56">
<HEAD>LVI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De mensa priorisse.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores bord aw forto be</L>
<L>Euer-mor vntil al gestes fre,</L>
<L>Þat es to mene vnto pouer men.</L>
<L N="2052">And when non cumes, scho sal take þen</L>
<L>Of þe eldest &amp; þe most nedy</L>
<L>Of hir sisters þat wons hir by,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="106"/>In stede of pouer folk, þam to fede;</L>
<L N="2056">So may scho wyn hir mykil mede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="57">
<HEAD>LVII.</HEAD>
<L>If ony woman can oght do</L>
<L>Þat ony wining falles vnto,</L>
<L>All þe prophet of þeir wyning</L>
<L N="2060">Vnto þeir souerayn sal þai bryng.</L>
<L>And if ony hafe pryde þer-by,</L>
<L>It sal be tayn fro þam in hy,</L>
<L>And neuer more sal þay negh nere,</L>
<L N="2064">Bot þe priores gif þam power.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="110a" UNIT="folio"/>And þat sal not fall, bot scho se</L>
<L>Þat þai be meke &amp; obidient be,</L>
<L>And wil gif al þeir wyning fayn</L>
<L N="2068">To þe ordenance of þer souerayn,</L>
<L>And wil luf god in ilka place,</L>
<L>Þat gifes to þam swilk giftes of grace.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="58">
<HEAD>LVIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De probacione suscipiendorum.</HEAD>
<L>All if a woman ful eld haue,</L>
<L N="2072">And religion wil to hir craue,</L>
<L>And hase non entisment þer-til</L>
<L>Bot oblis hir awn wil,</L>
<L>Fully resauyd sal scho not be,</L>
<L N="2076">Or tyme þai<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS212"><HI REND="I">þai</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">t</HI>.  See Notes.</NOTE> hir perseuerans se</L>
<L>And prow hir both be nyghtes &amp; days,</L>
<L>Als þe appostil playnly says.</L>
<L>Hir hert &amp; wil er both to proue,</L>
<L N="2080">If þai be gifin til godes bi-houe,</L>
<L>And mak þam forto vnderstand</L>
<L>Þe hardnes of religioun band.</L>
<L>And if scho bide iiij days or fyue</L>
<L N="2084">And schews grete lawnes in hir liue,</L>
<L>Vnto hir salbe graunte entre;</L>
<L>Bot als a gest ȝit sal scho be</L>
<L>And sine a place forto haue grayde,</L>
<L N="2088"><MILESTONE N="110b" UNIT="folio"/>Als vnto nouysces es puruayd,</L>
<L>And a mastres her forto lere</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="107"/>Hir obseruandes &amp; seruys sere,</L>
<L>And to schew hir both gude &amp; ill</L>
<L N="2092">Þat scho salbe obidient til.</L>
<L>And if scho be willy always</L>
<L>To suffer what hir mastres sais,</L>
<L>Sithen efter ij moneth space,</L>
<L N="2096">Þan sal þai bring þis rewle in place</L>
<L>And tel vntil hir opinly</L>
<L>Þis law þat hir aw to lif by.</L>
<L>When it es red on right array,</L>
<L N="2100">Þe priores sal til hir say:</L>
<L>"Þis rewle if þou may ȝeme &amp; saue,</L>
<L>We grant þe entre here to haue;</L>
<L>And if þou may not þerwith lend,</L>
<L N="2104">We grant þe lefe frely to wend."</L>
<L>And if scho þan wil langer dwel,</L>
<L>Scho sal bide in þe noues sel</L>
<L>At gud laser to lig &amp; rise,</L>
<L N="2108">So þat scho may hir wele awise</L>
<L>In hir hert, if scho be bald</L>
<L>Þe rewle to tak þat scho es tald.</L>
<L>When sex moneths er fully gon,</L>
<L N="2112">Þen sall þis rewel eft furth be ton</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="111a" UNIT="folio"/>And red to hir, os mykil os nedes,</L>
<L>How scho sal rewle both wordes &amp; dedes.</L>
<L>And if scho ȝit wil lely last,</L>
<L N="2116">When xij moneths er playnly past,</L>
<L>Þis sal eft be to hir red,</L>
<L>So þat scho be not lyghtli led,</L>
<L>And þat scho wit be on &amp; on</L>
<L N="2120">Þe pontes wher-to scho hase hir tone.</L>
<L>And if scho so with a-visement</L>
<L>Hete to fulfil with gude entent</L>
<L>What so þai deme bi day or nyght,</L>
<L N="2124">Þen sal scho be resauyd right</L>
<L>Into þe kirk emang þam all;</L>
<L>And þat day þerin dwel scho sall.</L>
<L>In hir-self þen sal scho knaw</L>
<L N="2128">Þat scho sal neuer, for godes aw,</L>
<L>Fro þat rewle reklisly gang,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="108"/>Sen þat scho es avised so lang.</L>
<L>To chapitur sine scho salbe tayn</L>
<L N="2132">In-mang þe couent euer-ilkayn,</L>
<L>And vnto god þer sal scho hete,</L>
<L>Falland doun be-for þer fete,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="111b" UNIT="folio"/>Þat scho sall fathfuly fulfill</L>
<L N="2136">Al þat þai haue told hir till.</L>
<L>Vnto mary, cristes moder dere,</L>
<L>And to al halows of heuyn clere</L>
<L>Sal scho hete þer þam emang.</L>
<L N="2140">Þan may scho wit: if scho do wrang</L>
<L>Or maynten it not with hir mayine,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS213">MS. <HI REND="I">hirmayine</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>Al wil þai witnes hir ogayne.</L>
<L>Þan sal scho make blithly hir bown</L>
<L N="2144">And puruay hir peticioun.</L>
<L>With hir awn hand it salbe wroght,</L>
<L>Or with a-noþer, if scho can noght;</L>
<L>Bot scho sal luke þat it be lele,</L>
<L N="2148">And set þerto signet or sele.</L>
<L>On þe awter scho sal it lay,</L>
<L>And þer wordes þen sal scho say:<Q>"Suscipe me, domine, secundum eloquium tuum, et viuam, &amp; non confundar."</Q></L>
<L>And þir same [wordes] on<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS214">MS. <HI REND="I">same on</HI>.</NOTE> þis wise</L>
<L N="2152">Sal þai ilkon reherce thrise</L>
<L>With "gloria patri" put þerto</L>
<L>And "Sicut erat" sine also.</L>
<L>Þe nouese þan be-for þam all</L>
<L N="2156">Al flat vnto þe erth sal fall,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="112a" UNIT="folio"/>Besekand þam on ilka side</L>
<L>For to pray for hir þat tide.</L>
<L>Fro þat day sal scho rekynd be</L>
<L N="2160">On þe couent in hir degre.</L>
<L>And al þe þinges þat scho hase þen,</L>
<L>Ouþer sal scho ȝif þam to pouer men,</L>
<L>Besekand þam for hir to pray,</L>
<L N="2164">Or els vnto hir awn abbay.</L>
<L>Vnto hir-self scho sal haue noght</L>
<L>Of al þat scho hase þeder broght.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="109"/>Vntil oþer scho sal it take,</L>
<L N="2168">And hir awn wil scho sal for-sake.</L>
<L>Hir awn wedes scho sal lay doun</L>
<L>And take cloths of religioun.</L>
<L>Hir cloths sal þan albedene</L>
<L N="2172">Be samyn layd &amp; kepid clene,</L>
<L>Þat if case fall at þe ȝere end</L>
<L>Þat scho in-to þe world wil wend,</L>
<L>Þe same wede þat scho can for-sake,</L>
<L N="2176">Þat sal scho were &amp; with hir take.</L>
<L>Bot hir bil of peticioun</L>
<L>Sall leue stil in religioun.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="59">
<HEAD>LIX.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De nouicijs iuuenibus suscipiendis.</HEAD>
<L>[M]ay fal þat ouþer man or wife<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS215">Cf. p. 9, l. 22 ff.</NOTE></L>
<L N="2180"><MILESTONE N="112b" UNIT="folio"/>Wold haue þer child <NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS216">A prep. (<HI REND="I">in</HI>) or verb (<HI REND="I">lede, lere</HI>) seems to be omitted.</NOTE> haly life,</L>
<L>And offer it vnto haly kirk;</L>
<L>On þis wise þam aw to wirk:</L>
<L>If þer child be so ȝung,</L>
<L N="2184">Þat it can not tel with tung<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS217">2183 and 2184 were written, by mistake, in the reverse order.  Then the letters b and a were added in the margin.  Cf. 1775 ff.  The words <HI REND="I">it</HI> and <HI REND="I">not</HI> in 2184 were omitted and then added above the line.</NOTE></L>
<L>What es to leue ne what to take,</L>
<L>Þen sal þe frendes peticions make.</L>
<L>Tak þai sal þe childes hand</L>
<L N="2188">And bil &amp; þer awn offerand</L>
<L>With reuerence, os þe rewle hase kend,</L>
<L>And law al on þe awter end.</L>
<L>And when þai mak peticioun,</L>
<L N="2192">A certayn soume þai sal lay doune,</L>
<L>Or els hete of þer gudes to gif</L>
<L>Whor-of þer child may lere to lif.</L>
<L>Til it-self sal þai gif no thing,</L>
<L N="2196">Gold ne siluer, broch ne ryng,</L>
<L>Bot opinly it gif sal þai</L>
<L>Vnto god &amp; to þe abbay,</L>
<L>And childer þat frenchep hase none,</L>
<L N="2200">For godes sake þai salbe tone.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="63"><PB REF="" N="110"/>
<HEAD>LXIII.</HEAD>
<L>And fro time þai resauyd be,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="113a" UNIT="folio"/>Al salbe sarued in o degre,</L>
<L>Rich &amp; pure, &amp; ȝong &amp; old,</L>
<L N="2204">In form os be-for es told.</L>
<L>Bot þe ȝong, whor so þai err,</L>
<L>Sal ordan<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS218"><HI REND="I">ordan</HI>, corrupt for honor or the like?  Cf. p. 9, l. 13.</NOTE> þam þat er elder,</L>
<L>And þe elder in alkins þing</L>
<L N="2208">Sal luf &amp; lere þam þat er ȝing.</L>
<L>"Damisel" þe ȝongest es,</L>
<L>Þe elder "madaum" &amp; "mastres."</L>
<L>Þe Priores als principall</L>
<L N="2212">Es "lady" &amp; leder of þam all,</L>
<L>And not al for hir awn bi-houe,</L>
<L>Bot for hir staite &amp; cristes luf.</L>
<L>And whor so euer þai gang o-boute,</L>
<L N="2216">Þe ȝonger sal þe elder loute</L>
<L>And do þam reuerence, als es right,</L>
<L>In word &amp; dede, be day &amp; nyght.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="64">
<HEAD>LXIV.</HEAD>
<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De eleccione priorisse.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores aw to be chosen</L>
<L N="2220">Þe best in lifyng leli losen,</L>
<L>Be ordinance &amp; bi hali assent</L>
<L>And councel of al þe couent,</L>
<L>Takand non for luf ne mede,</L>
<L N="2224">Ne leueand non for aw ne drede;</L>
<L>Bot for gude luf &amp; for godes sake</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="113b" UNIT="folio"/>A worthi souerayn sal þai take,</L>
<L>Whilk þai knaw perfite &amp; stabil,</L>
<L N="2228">And als emang þaim most abill</L>
<L>Of wit &amp; cunsel &amp; of cunyng,</L>
<L>And vsand euynhed in al thing.</L>
<L>And if it fel, os god forbede,</L>
<L N="2232">Þat ony wold for worldly mede</L>
<L>Samyn be þam-self assent,</L>
<L>With-outyn consel of þe couent,</L>
<L>Forto chese swilk a souerayn</L>
<L N="2236"><PB REF="" N="111"/>Als to þer bedynges wold be bayn,</L>
<L>And þair doyng wor fundyn slike,</L>
<L>Þen sal þe bisschop of þat rike</L>
<L>Swilk a priores sone depose,</L>
<L N="2240">And mak on bi þeir aller chose.</L>
<L>And foles þat in þer fath wil fayle,</L>
<L>Þai salbe chastid fro cownsaile,</L>
<L>So þat in godes hows may be</L>
<L N="2244">A gude ȝemer of godes menȝe.</L>
<L>For wit þai wele þat þai sal cum</L>
<L>To reknyng on þe day of dome</L>
<L>For þer myschesing þam omang,</L>
<L N="2248">Als sche sal for hir warkes wrang.</L>
<L>And if þai chese wele &amp; lely,</L>
<L>Þan falles a ful grete mede þerby,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="114a" UNIT="folio"/>So þat þai tak gude rewarde</L>
<L N="2252">Þat noder on be spede ne oþer sparde</L>
<L>For no ponte þat men may pruefe,</L>
<L>Bot anely for our lordes lufe.</L>
<L>When scho es chosin on þis maner</L>
<L N="2256">And confermyd in hir playne power,</L>
<L>Þen aw hir forto luke allayn<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS219">MS. <HI REND="I">alleyn</HI>.</NOTE></L>
<L>Vnto þat charch þat scho hase tayn</L>
<L>And vnto wham hir aw to ȝeld</L>
<L N="2260">Reknyng both in ȝouth in eld,</L>
<L>Ill or wele wheþer scho spend</L>
<L>Þe charch þat scho hase tayn in hend.</L>
<L>Al if scho be highest in degre,</L>
<L N="2264">In hir-self lawest sal scho be.</L>
<L>Hir aw to be gude of forthoght</L>
<L>What thinges es to wirk &amp; what noght,</L>
<L>Chaste &amp; sober, meke &amp; myld,</L>
<L N="2268">Of bering bowsum os a child.</L>
<L>Sin &amp; vices sal scho hate</L>
<L>And luf hir sisters ayrly &amp; laite.</L>
<L>Scho salbe sober in al thyng</L>
<L N="2272">And naymly in hir chastying,</L>
<L>To lay on þam þat vnder hir er</L>
<L>No euyer band þan þay may ber,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="112"/> <MILESTONE N="114b" UNIT="folio"/>Þat whils scho rubes a-way þe rust,</L>
<L N="2276">Þe vessel fal not al to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS220">MS. <HI REND="I">alto</HI>.</NOTE> dust.</L>
<L>Hir maistri euer sal mesurd be,</L>
<L>Thinkand on hir awn frelte</L>
<L>Lik to a rede in a forest,</L>
<L N="2280">Þat bows with wind &amp; wil not brest.</L>
<L>Scho sal so her what ilkon sais,</L>
<L>And be wise in hir wordes alwais.</L>
</DIV3>

<DIV3 TYPE="part">
<HEAD>De condicionibus Priorisse.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores hertly sal hast</L>
<L N="2284">Al vice &amp; syns away to waist</L>
<L>And ordan for þam gastly bute,</L>
<L>Or tyme þat þai haue takin rute,</L>
<L>And ordan alway hir entent</L>
<L N="2288">For to be lufid of hir couent,</L>
<L>Þat þai hir honor in word &amp; dede</L>
<L>For luf &amp; not aynly for drede.</L>
<L>Scho sal not be contrarius</L>
<L N="2292">Ne ouer-lyghtly suspecius.</L>
<L>In al hir bidinges scho salbe</L>
<L>Resonabil &amp; also avise,</L>
<L>Wheder it be for gastly thing</L>
<L N="2296">Or worldly þat scho makes bidyng.</L>
<L>And when scho comaundes oght to do,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="115a" UNIT="folio"/>Swilk rewling sal scho hafe þer-to,</L>
<L>Þat it be mesured on gude maners,</L>
<L N="2300">Als sant Ion þe apostil leres:<Q>"Si greges meos faciam &amp;c.;—</Q></L>
<L>If I ger my bestes," he sais,</L>
<L>"Trauel mor be nyghtes or dais</L>
<L>Þan þer power perfourn may,</L>
<L N="2304">Þan wil þai fall down in þe way."</L>
<L>Þus bi ensaumpil sal scho take</L>
<L>Materly al thinges to make,</L>
<L>And þat al thinges in dede &amp; saw</L>
<L N="2308">Be mesured euermor os þam aw,</L>
<L>And ilka thing in þer degre,</L>
<L>Bodely or gastly wheder it be.</L>
<L>And þis ilk rewle þus if scho rede</L>
<L N="2312"><PB REF="" N="113"/>And fulfil it in word &amp; dede,</L>
<L>Þen may scho þer wordes vnderstand,</L>
<L>How crist says of a gud seruand:<Q>"Super omnia bona sua constituet eum."</Q></L>
<L>He þat in life es funden lele</L>
<L N="2316">In word &amp; wark alway to wele,</L>
<L>Hym wil þe lord with-outyn lete</L>
<L>Ouer al his gudes assingne<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS221">MS. <HI REND="I">assingnes</HI>.</NOTE> &amp; sett</L>
<L>And haly put in-til his hand</L>
<L N="2320">Both corn &amp; katel, Hows &amp; land,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="115b" UNIT="folio"/>And chanch hym wil he<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS222"><HI REND="I">he</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">I</HI>.</NOTE> for no new</L>
<L>Be reson þat he findes him trew.</L>
<L>And efterward for his gude dede</L>
<L N="2324">Þe lord wil larchly gif him mede.</L>
<L>So sal al þo haue wele, we knaw,</L>
<L>Þat trewly dos euer os þam aw.</L>
</DIV3>

</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="68">
<HEAD>LXVIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Si inpossibilia iniungentur.</HEAD>
<L>A Priores, als I sayd air,</L>
<L N="2328">Aw to be mesured euermair</L>
<L>To bind non bot als<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS223">MS. <HI REND="I">als bot</HI>.</NOTE> þai may bere,</L>
<L>And efter þer warkes worthi ere,</L>
<L>And bid non do by nyght &amp; day</L>
<L N="2332">Vn-mesurely mor þan þai may.</L>
<L>And if scho put any vntil</L>
<L>Mor wark þen þai may fulfil,</L>
<L>Til hir bedynges þai sal be bayn</L>
<L N="2336">And noþer gruch ne spek ogayn.</L>
<L>Bot forther, if þai se in sight</L>
<L>Þat þe trauel passes þer myght,</L>
<L>Vn-to hir sal þai pray mekely</L>
<L N="2340">Forto relese þam sum party,</L>
<L>Telland to hir al þer encheson.</L>
<L>And if scho wil not her þer reson,</L>
<L>ȝit sall þai not þam-self it slake,</L>
<L N="2344"><MILESTONE N="116a" UNIT="folio"/>Bot suffer it for godes sake,</L>
<L>Thinkand on þair mikil mede;</L>
<L>Þan sal god strengh in þer dede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="69"><PB REF="" N="114"/>
<HEAD>LXIX.</HEAD>
<L>And on al wise þai sal take tent,</L>
<L N="2348">Þat no þing be don in couent,</L>
<L>In word ne wark ne nokins wise,</L>
<L>Whar-of outward myght sclaunder rise.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="70">
<HEAD>LXX.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Vt nulla aliam cedat vel offendat.</HEAD>
<L>Tham<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS224">The h in <HI REND="I">Tham</HI> was added subsequently.</NOTE> aw to tent vnto þis þing,</L>
<L N="2352">Þat non of þam sal oþer dyng,</L>
<L>Ne none herdy oder to greue,</L>
<L>Bot at þe Priores gifes leue</L>
<L>And power oþer to chasty</L>
<L N="2356">Þat funden er in ony foly.</L>
<L>And þai þat opinly er blamyd,</L>
<L>Al opinly þai sal be shamyd,</L>
<L>So þat oþer may wernyd be</L>
<L N="2360">Fro al slik folis forto fle.</L>
<L>Þe nouece þat þis rewle sal lere,</L>
<L>Vntil þai be past xv ȝere,</L>
<L>Sal be in keping of mastres</L>
<L N="2364">To chasty þam, when worthi es,</L>
<L>Als it falles þe trispas to.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="116b" UNIT="folio"/>And oþer-wise if þat scho do,</L>
<L>Scho sal be punyst for þat dede;</L>
<L N="2368">For it es writyn, os men may rede:</L>
<L>"Vntil a-noþer þou sal not do</L>
<L>Bot os þou wold wor don þe to."</L>
<L>On þe sam wise sall ilk souerayn</L>
<L N="2372">Do os þai wil take o-gayn.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="67">
<HEAD>LXVII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De exeuntibus et redeuntibus.</HEAD>
<L>Asister, when scho sal oute wende</L>
<L>To fadir or moder or oþer frend,</L>
<L>Þan sal scho tak with gude entent</L>
<L N="2376">Hir leue of all þe hale couent,</L>
<L>Besekand þam for hir to pray</L>
<L>Þat god hir wise in all her way.</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="115"/>And al þe couent, small &amp; grete,</L>
<L N="2380">Aw no day forto for-gete,</L>
<L>Bot ilkay day to mak þer bone,</L>
<L>When seruys of þe day es done,</L>
<L>For þer sister þat er not þair,</L>
<L N="2384">Þat god enforce þam in þer fair.</L>
<L>And when on so hase bene to play,</L>
<L>When scho cummes home, al þe first day</L>
<L>Prayng sal þai put þam to,</L>
<L N="2388">Besekand oder to pray also</L>
<L>Þat god for-gif with gude entent,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="117a" UNIT="folio"/>If þai oght wrethid hym, sen þai went,</L>
<L>In sight or in hering of eres,</L>
<L N="2392">In word or dede þat þe sawle deres,</L>
<L>Or wantunly if þai haf wroght</L>
<L>Outher in word, or dede, or thoght.</L>
<L>Of god þai sal ask for-gifnes</L>
<L N="2396">And make amendes for mor &amp; lese.</L>
<L>To þer sisters þai sal not tell,</L>
<L>Whils þai wer furth how it befell</L>
<L>Of thing þat myght oght turn to tene;</L>
<L N="2400">For of slik hase harmes bene sene.</L>
<L>Ne outward sal þai no thing say</L>
<L>Þat es done with-in þeir abbay;</L>
<L>Ne oute of close sal þai not pas,</L>
<L N="2404">Bot þai leue of þer souerayn ass;</L>
<L>Ne no charge and<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS225">MS. <HI REND="I">chargeand</HI>.</NOTE> thing sal þai do,</L>
<L>Bot if þai haue hir lef þerto.</L>
<L>And who so dose oght here-ogayn</L>
<L N="2408">Efter þe rewle sal suffer payn.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="66">
<HEAD>LXVI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De officio hostiarij.</HEAD>
<L>Ane old man sal þe ȝates ȝeme</L>
<L>Þat witti es &amp; wele wil seme</L>
<L>For to welcum with wordes fre</L>
<L N="2412">Euyr-ilk man in þer degre.</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="117b" UNIT="folio"/>His dwelling sal be dyght algayte</L>
<L>In a cel be-side þe ȝate,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="116"/>So þat he be redy ay</L>
<L N="2416">Til al þat cums be nyght or day.</L>
<L>And when so ony knok or call,</L>
<L>Softli answer þam he sall.</L>
<L>To her þer wordes sal he be bayn</L>
<L N="2420">And bryng þam grath answer ogayn.</L>
<L>And baynly sal he bryng &amp; take</L>
<L>Al þat men sendes for godes sake.</L>
<L>And euer him aw to ȝeme þe ȝate</L>
<L N="2424">For al auenturs arely &amp; layte.</L>
<L>In abbais aw to be al thing</L>
<L>Þat nedeful es to þeir lifing,</L>
<L>Als watter for to do al þer dedis,</L>
<L N="2428">Miln, kiln, &amp; ouen, &amp; al þat nedis,</L>
<L>Gardins, &amp; al oþer ger</L>
<L>With-in þam wroght, þat þai sal wer,</L>
<L>So þat þai sal not outward gang</L>
<L N="2432">To say for dred, or wirk, oght wrang.</L>
<L>Þus es þis rewle ordand to rede</L>
<L>[Als] Oft-sithes als<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS226">MS. <HI REND="I">Oft sithes als</HI>; cf. 1668, 2113.</NOTE> it es nede,</L>
<L>So þat non sal þam excuse,</L>
<L N="2436"><MILESTONE N="118a" UNIT="folio"/>To knaw þeir rewle &amp; right it vse.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="71">
<HEAD>LXXI.</HEAD>
<HEAD>De obediencia ad inuicem.</HEAD>
<L>Ilk sister sall obedient be</L>
<L>Vnto oþer in þair degre,</L>
<L>Witand þat es þe sekir way</L>
<L N="2440">Vnto þe lif þat lastes ay.</L>
<L>Bot þe Priores os prencipall</L>
<L>Sal be honord ouer þam all;</L>
<L>And oþer, efter þai haue power,</L>
<L N="2444">Salbe honord with seruis ser.</L>
<L>And sithen sal ilkon bainly bow</L>
<L>To honour oder &amp; wil þer prow.</L>
<L>And who so euer vnbowsum es</L>
<L N="2448">Or rebel to þer priores,</L>
<L>Or greues hir in ony degre,</L>
<L>Al if þe trispas litil be,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="117"/>Be-for her fete down sal þai fall,</L>
<L N="2452">And so lang þer lig þai sall.</L>
<L>And who so gruches her-ogayn,</L>
<L>Þai sal be gert with greuus payn.</L>
<L>And if þai wil not mend þerby,</L>
<L N="2456">Þai sal be chaistid fro company.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="72">
<HEAD>LXXII.</HEAD>
<L>For right os euel luf mor or les,</L>
<L>Þat es fulfilid of bitternes,</L>
<L>Twins fro god, os clerkes tell,</L>
<L N="2460">And ledes a man to pyne of hell,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="118b" UNIT="folio"/>Right so gude luf in al degre,</L>
<L>Þat es fulfillid of charite,</L>
<L>Twins a man fro<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS227"><HI REND="I">fro</HI>, MS. <HI REND="I">for</HI>.</NOTE> syn &amp; strif</L>
<L N="2464">And ledes him vnto lastand lif.</L>
<L>And þat ilk luf suld sisters haue</L>
<L>Emang þam-self þer saule to saue,</L>
<L>And ilkon honor oþer alwais,</L>
<L N="2468">Als þe appostil playnly sais:<Q>"Honore inuecem preuenientes."</Q></L>
<L>Sekenes sal þai gladly bere,</L>
<L>Bodily or gastly wheder þai ere.</L>
<L>Þeir awn winyng þai sal not wayt,</L>
<L N="2472">Þat oþer win þai sal couayt.</L>
<L>God sal þai hertly drede &amp; luf</L>
<L>And þer souerayn for his be-houe,</L>
<L>So þat þai set non erthly þing</L>
<L N="2476">Be-for þe luf of crist, heuyn kyng,</L>
<L>For his lofers ledes he euyn</L>
<L>Vntil his kyngdom hegh on heuyn.</L>
<L>Vnto þat kingdom he vs lede,</L>
<L N="2480">Þat sufferd dede for our mysdede.</L>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="chapter" N="73">
<HEAD>LXXIII.</HEAD>
<HEAD>Conclucio tocius regule.</HEAD>
<L>This<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS228">The h in <HI REND="I">This</HI> was added subsequently.</NOTE> rewle es ordand þus to rede</L>
<L>To mend our mys &amp; merk vs mede,</L>
<L><PB REF="" N="118"/><MILESTONE N="119a" UNIT="folio"/>And grath teching til vs at gif,</L>
<L N="2484">In cristes law [how] we<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS229">MS. <HI REND="I">law we</HI>; cf. 1954.</NOTE> sal lif,</L>
<L>And to draw fro alkin strife</L>
<L>Onto perfeccion of gude life.</L>
<L>For it teches to les &amp; more</L>
<L N="2488">Of haly faders þat war before.</L>
<L>And if we þer-in haue delite,</L>
<L>It ledes vs to lif perfite.</L>
<L>For al lessons, als men may luke,</L>
<L N="2492">Þat wretyn er in haly buke,</L>
<L>Wheþer þai be of moises law</L>
<L>Or of cristes, whilk we suld knaw,</L>
<L>And liues of marters &amp; confessours,</L>
<L N="2496">And teching of godes dere doctours,</L>
<L>And þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS230">Possibly: <HI REND="I">And liues þat</HI>; cf. 1952.</NOTE> haly virgins lede,</L>
<L>And rewles, þat [er] vntil<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS231">MS. <HI REND="I">þat vntil</HI>; cf. 1951, 2117.</NOTE> vs rede,</L>
<L>Of basil, Bede, &amp; oþer mo—</L>
<L N="2500">Al er þai teching vs vnto</L>
<L>And ensaumpil how we sal vse</L>
<L>Gude vertuse, &amp; vices refuse.</L>
<L>To þam þat lifes wele, old or ȝing,</L>
<L N="2504">Er swilk lessons ful grete likyng.</L>
<L>And to þam þat lifes synfully</L>
<L>And refuses to be rewlid þerby,</L>
<L><MILESTONE N="119b" UNIT="folio"/>Þan es it gret confucioun</L>
<L N="2508">And hertly schame in ilk sesoun.</L>
<L>For if þeir lifyng be vnlele,</L>
<L>Þam think dedeyn with it to dele.</L>
<L>Þerfor al þat þarto hase hight,</L>
<L N="2512">Saue þis rewle &amp; ȝeme it ryght,</L>
<L>And pray god hertly with gude wil</L>
<L>To gif þam myght &amp; grace þertil.</L>
<L>Þen endles lif sal be þair mede.</L>
<L N="2516">Vnto þat lif our lord vs lede!  //amen.//</L><TRAILER>AMEN.</TRAILER><TRAILER>//Explicit.//</TRAILER>
</DIV2>

</DIV1>

<DIV1 TYPE="section"><PB REF="" N="119"/>
<HEAD>III. THE CAXTON ABSTRACT OF The Rule of St. Benet.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(Cambridge University Library, AB. 4. 64.)</HEAD>
<P><MILESTONE N="aa Ia" UNIT="folio"/>¶ Here felowyth a compendious abstracte translate  into englysshe out of the holy rule of saynte Benet for men and wymmen, of the habyte therof, the whiche vnderstonde lytyll laten or none / to þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS232">Caxton regularly prints <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">e</HI>.</NOTE> entent þat they maye often rede / execute the hole rewll and the better kepe it than it is / accordyng to the abyte &amp; their streyte professyon / so that the welle of their sowlys and better emsample of that holy relygyon maye be the sooner had and knowen.</P>
<P>He or she þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS233">Through <HI REND="I">þat</HI> there arises an anocoluthon.</NOTE> is to be made hede or souereyn in a monestary / in whom all the hole congregacion in one acorde after god consentyth / or els that the more parte therof and sadder wyth god counseyll chesith.</P>
<P>Whan soo euer ony takyth by true eleccyon the name and dygnytee of an hede or souereyn in relygyon / they owne to shewe in their dedys to their disciples two doctrynes / that is to sey, that all suche good dedys and holy that they teche / þat they first shewe hem by their owne dedys rather than by theyr wordys / And al thynges that they teche their <MILESTONE N="aa jb" UNIT="folio"/>children and disciples  to be contrari to god &amp; their rule / lete her dedes shew openly suche thinges not to be done, soo þat<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS234">Caxton: <HI REND="I">so o þ</HI><HI REND="sup">t</HI>.</NOTE> theimselfe be not founde gylty &amp; reprouable in their doctryne &amp; ensample / &amp; redy to see a lytill mote in their disciples eyen / but a grete blocke or beme in their owne they can not espie / but lete it lye styll.  The souereyns also shulde not dissymyle in punyshment and chastysyng of theyr subgettes whan they offende / but assone as the<PB REF="" N="120"/> synnes begyn to sprynge / forthwyth cut hem vp by the rote by correccyon accordyng to the rule wythoute acceptynge of ony persone / Remembryng þat foles wyll neuer be corrected with wordis, but rather by chastisment / As ofte as ony grete maters arn to be doon in the monestary / all þe congregacion is to be callyd &amp; to be enformed of hem by the souereyns / þe whiche owe to here the myndys of echone syngulerly / for oft tymes oure lorde shewyth to the symplest of the relygyon a thynge that is best therfore.  how be it, what som euer shalbe seide of the subgettes / see that it be doon wyth al mekenes and submyssyon of spirite &amp; body / And therevpon the  souereyn ouht to kepe well in mynde <MILESTONE N="aa ija" UNIT="folio"/><NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS235">Caxton prints <HI REND="I">a ij</HI> instead of <HI REND="I">aa ij</HI>.</NOTE>the resons or seyenges of euery of theim / and to doo therafter as can be founde best and proffitable / For it is a token of an vnwytty mynde and of a prowde hert of theym that take their owne way oonly &amp; counseyll.  Also as it is accordynge to a disciple for to obey his mayster, soo it is requyred to the souereyn visely &amp; warely and all thynges of the place to dispose.  To other thynges of lesse charge the souereyn owe to take counseyle of the senyours of the relygion &amp; sadder / Soo þat euery thyng is to be doone at ony tyme wyth counseyle accordynge to scripture þat seyth: "Doo all thynges wyth counseyle / &amp; thou shall not repente after."  Also bere in thy mynde this synguler note that the hede or the souereyn wyth all the congregacion streytly be bounde to folowe the rule in euery poynte / &amp; that none of theim be soo bolde to declyne<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS236">Caxton: <HI REND="I">declyue</HI>.</NOTE> or departe therfro; So that none folowe the wyll of theyr owne mynde oonly / but euer be redy to be reformyd. The subgettes also owe to be ryght ware þat they make no strife wythyn or wythout wyth theyr souereyns / yf that they doo, anone lete hem haue the streyt reguler  punysshment wyth þe fere of god and in <MILESTONE N="aa ijb" UNIT="folio"/><NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS237">Caxton prints <HI REND="I">a ij</HI> instead of <HI REND="I">aa ij</HI>.</NOTE>kepynge the rule / remembrynge that the hede withoute ony dowte shall yeue a full<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS238">Caxton: <HI REND="I">afull</HI>.</NOTE> streyte accompte oo day of all their Iugementes &amp; byhauour to god atte ferefull daye of rekenynge.  ¶ Also be they ware that they trowble not<PB REF="" N="121"/> their flocke that ben commytted vnto theim, and that they dyspose noo thynge of the place vnryȝtwysly, as though they wolde vse theim as their owne / the whyche is ayens god vterly &amp; þe reule.  Therfore it is good that they at all tymes so behaue theim in vertue, that all people may saye / "loo, suche one is worthy to occupye thys place and to haue thys dignytee."  Wherfore suche owe not to be chosen therto by their age / but for their wertuous lyuyng and wysdom, chastyte and sobre dealyng, and also for their pyte and mercy the whyche thei muste vse in all their dedys / that they the rather maye haue the same of god whan someuer they trespasse / See thenne that they loue well their chyldren / and hate their synnes / &amp; in amending of their maners and correccyon of their synnes wysely to behaue theim / For to moche in ony thyng is nought, leeste þat thei breke the <MILESTONE N="aa iija" UNIT="folio"/>vesell / of the  whiche wythoute discrecion and pyte they wolde haue taken of the rust / Also they must see that they prouffyte in theyr werkys more than for to loke for worship / and euer to studye to haue loue rather of the subgettes than drede / dooynge all thynges wyth discrecion / whiche is moder of all wertues / consideryng theyr owne freylte, where-thorough of theyr subgettes the better they may haue compassion whan someuer they trespase.  Also thei may not be yrefull, vnrestfull, or obstynate / or to be Ielouse / or moche suspeccyouse ouer theyr subgettes / for thenne they shall neuer haue rest to-gyder in the relygyon / and euer kepe the rule.  Also the souereyn &amp; the subgettes owe euer to flee Idylnesse, þe norisshe of al synnes, &amp; to be ocupyed euer in vertu, louyng god wyth all their herte of all theyr soule and of all their strength and theyr neyghbour as theyr selfe / doyng euer vnto theym as they wolde be done vnto / dyspisyng theyrselfe and folow crist by the crosse of penaunce.  Also they must chastyse theyr body and flee the pleasur therof / and to vse fastynge &amp; refresshe the poore peple wyth dedes of mercy <MILESTONE N="aa iijb" UNIT="folio"/>goostly and bodely / and medle lytyll  wyth worldly actes, no thyng preferryng aboue the loue of god / wrath or deceyte neuer to kepe in herte or to promyse ony false peas / kepynge euer charytee / And<PB REF="" N="122"/> vse neuer to swere / leeste<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS239">Caxton: <HI REND="I">neuer / to swere leeste</HI>.</NOTE> that by custome ye fall in periurie / and sey euer the trouth in herte &amp; mouth / neuer yeldyng euyll for euyll / but rather good for euyll / doyng no wronge to ony, but for to suffre paciently whan it is done to you / loue your enmyes / &amp; curse hem not / &amp; be redy to take persecucion for a riȝtwys mater / neuer be prowde or dronklew nor moche etyng or slouthfull / not grutchynge or bakbytynge / euer puttynge your trust in our lord god.  Whan þat ye see ony goodnes in your-selfe / anone put it to oure lorde &amp; not to your-selfe. all thinge that is euyll ascryue to your-selfe.  Fere euer the daye of Iugement &amp; the dungeon of hell / desyrynge wyth all your mynde &amp; herte þe euerlastyng lyfe / &amp; haue euere deth suspecte afore your eyen / &amp; gyde euer your dedes wysely in euery hour / And be certeyn þat god beholdith theim in eueri place / &amp; euery euyl thought that commyth to your mynde, anone put it awaye by  thynkyng of cristes passyon / &amp; shewe <MILESTONE N="aa iiija" UNIT="folio"/>theym by confessyon to your goostly fader / &amp; kepe euer your tongue from euyll and shrewde langage / &amp; speke lytyll &amp; well / &amp; euer auoyde vayn wordes and dissolute laughter &amp; Iapes, and be glad to here gode lectures and lyues of sayntes with preyer / dayly waylyng your synnes &amp; the synnes &amp; Ignoraunce of the peple wyth amendes makyng / The preceptes of your souereyn in all thynges obey lefull as to god &amp; fulfyll theym / Loue euer chastyte / &amp; flee euer enuy / hatrede &amp; stryff / &amp; worship your elders / &amp; fauour the yong in all loue and drede of god.  Euer pray for your enmyes / &amp; or the sone goo downe, be in perfyte peas wyth theym dayly to your power / &amp; neuer dyspeyr of the grete mercy of god / Loo, thyes ben the Instrumentes of the spirituell crafte &amp; occupacion, þe which exercisid and doon, oure lorde hath promysed to you and vs that eye neuer sawe / nor ere euer herde, nor cowde euer in-to mannys herte ascende, þe whiche to al his louyng seruantes he hath ordened.  amen.</P>
<P>Obedyence is a grete vertu done without grutchyng or taryenge.  It is the fyrst steppe vnto mekenes /<PB REF="" N="123"/> &amp; it is right specyous<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS240">Caxton: <HI REND="I">specyouꝰ</HI>.</NOTE> &amp; nedefull to be had for all peple &amp; <MILESTONE N="aa iiijb" UNIT="folio"/>namely for relygyous persones.  True obediencers, assone  as thei be called or commaundid of theyr souereyn / anone after þe worde seyde / they be redy wyth all gladnesse to doo the dede so commaundid / settyng asyde all other thynges vndone &amp; their owne wyll in euery poynt / and þat wyth all quyknesse of herte &amp; body for drede of our lorde.  Wherfore he callyth suche a lyfe / a streyt waye to heuen / and not a comyn waye where synners take her owne wyll / &amp; be not vndir the yocke of obedyence to an other / Wythouten doubte trew obedyencers folow surely oure lorde &amp; his wordes where he seyth / "I come not in-to thys world to doo myn owne wyll, but the wyll of my fader<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS241">Caxton: <HI REND="I">myfader</HI>.</NOTE> the whiche sent me" / Thenne this obedience is gretly acceptable to god and swete to al cristen peple, whan it is done quikly and wythoute grutchynge or frowarde countenaunce in worde or in herte / Our lorde loueth a thyng done vnto hym cherefully in soule / and such obedience done to the souereyn / is done to god &amp; for god, as he seyth hymselfe.  Yf one obey with grutchyng either in worde or in their herte, fulfyllyng the commaundement of theyr souereyn<MILESTONE N="aa va" UNIT="folio"/> / yet it is not acceptable  to god / the whiche beholdyth the herte euer &amp; the wyll of the doer therof / &amp; he shal haue noo grace but rather payne ordeined for grutchers, without he amende him.</P>
<P>As for silence, doo aftir the cheyf prophete of god, dauid, where he seyth in þe sauter / "I haue seyd that<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS242">Caxton: <HI REND="I">seydthat</HI>.</NOTE> I shall not offende in my tongue / I haue put a kepyng to my mowth / &amp; am dompe and therwith made meke &amp; silent" / In moche speche, as it is writen, synne cann not be auoyded / also in þe power of the tongue is deth &amp; lyfe / As it accordith to a mayster to speke &amp; teche, so it behoueth the disciple to here &amp; be silent / wordes of vnclennes / voyde, or meuynge to disolucyon or to laughter, ben dampned by the rule in ony place to be had / &amp; it is commaundid streytly by the same / none to be so bolde to open their mowth in suche maner of<PB REF="" N="124"/> talkyng / Also silence is to be kept by the rule at all tymes &amp; spyrituelly at nyght after complyn, and noo licence thenne is to be gyuen to ony for to speke but oonly to officers / or to theim that grete nede causith to speke with sadnesse &amp; honestee / &amp; silence also is to be kept at  <MILESTONE N="aa vb" UNIT="folio"/>all refeccions and meles &amp; in other places / &amp; at other tymes specyfyed by the rule / Yf theyr be founde ony gylty in theis premyses, thei ouȝt to be punysshid streytly and greuously.</P>
<P>Holy scrypture cryeth and seyth / "he that wyll high hymselfe shal be made lowe, and he that mekyth hym selfe shall be made high" / In thys is shewid that exaltacyon is þe doughter and nygh of kyne to pryde, whiche is mortall / Yf we wyll atteyne and come to the heyth of perfyte mekenes, the whiche wyll bringe vs to the honour of heuen in body and soule, lete vs lyft vp our herte &amp; mynde vnto heuen by þe skale and lader of Iacob, descendyng wyth the angels from ony exaltacyon / and clymme vp to theym by mekenes &amp; humyliacion.  The fyrste steppe of thys ladder ascendyng by mekenes to heuen / is to be euer aferde of god and of your souereyn / and not to be foryetful / beringe in your mynde surely all thynges that god hath commaundyd you to be done, and your rule, and how they þat contempnyth god &amp; hys preceptes or the rule shal goo to hell / and to theim that loue &amp; drede god &amp; kepith his commaundementes is ordeyned  Ioye euerlastyng.  Oure <MILESTONE N="aa vja" UNIT="folio"/>lorde in euery place beholdyth the dedes &amp; thoughtes of euery creature / and þe angels ben redy to shewe to the trynitee dayly the gode dedes of eche good creature.  ¶ The seconde steppe or<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS243"><HI REND="I">or</HI>, Caxton: <HI REND="I">of</HI>.</NOTE> degree of thys ladder of mekenesse is whan one hath no delyte to fulfyll theyr owne wyll or desire / but oonli<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS244">Caxton: <HI REND="I">butoonli</HI>.</NOTE> to folow crist / þat seith: "I come not in-to the worlde to doo myn owne wyll but the wyll of my fader that sent me."  The iij. degree is whan one subdewyth &amp; mekyth hymselfe for god lowly to their souereyn / folowynge crist / of whom the apostyll seyth / "Ihesus was made obedient vnto deth of the crosse."  ¶ The iiij. degree is whan one can suffre wyth<PB REF="" N="125"/> all obedience &amp; pacyence all Iniuries, wronges / wordes of rebuke, &amp; suche other done or sayd vnto theim / &amp; to take hem gladly for goddis sake their lyfe enduring / For þe gospel seith / "he þat contynueth to the ende / shall be sauff."  The v. steppe of this ladder of mekenes is þat whan al euyll thoughtes that come vnto their herte or to their mynde, &amp; their synnes a-fore hid &amp; not confessyd / þat they wyll thenne open mekely to theyr souereyn wyth repentaunce / For it is writen / "shewe <MILESTONE N="aa vjb" UNIT="folio"/>thy wayes of thy  lyuyng to our lord &amp; trust in hym &amp; in his mercy.  for he is al goodnesse &amp; piteful / &amp; redy is to foryeue thy trespace &amp; synne, yf thou wyll knowleche it wyth repentaunce &amp; amende."  ¶ The vj. degre of mekenes is whan one is well content wyth symple araye or habite / &amp; is glad to be set lytill by &amp; to be take as a drudge or outcast of the religion / &amp; to be euer redy to doo al thynges that is boden hym to doo, Iugyng him an Idyll seruaunt and vnworthy to god and man / ¶ The vij. degree is yf he shew in dede hymself, not oonly with tongue but also wyth all the inwardes of his herte &amp; by outwarde behauour, the lothliest &amp; the vilest of all other / seyeng wyth the prophete / "I am a worme &amp; noo man, the repreef of peple &amp; abieccion / lord, I thanke the that þou hast mekid me, so that I may the beter lerne thy commaundementes." ¶ The viij: degree is yf that he doo no thynge but as the commyn rule of the place and holy ensample of his senyours doo shewe vnto him in our lorde / ¶ The ix. degree is yf one kepe his tongue in al silence to the tyme he be commaundid to speke / or els that he be askid a questyon. <MILESTONE N="aa vija" UNIT="folio"/>¶ The x. degree is yf one be not lyght and redy to  laughter or to dissolucyon.  It is writen: "a fole wylle exalte his voyce in laughter."  ¶ The enleuenth is for to speke euer softely wyth sadnes / &amp; mekely &amp; with fewe wordes groundid vpon reason and godly / It is wryten: "The wyse man is knowen by hys wordes."  ¶ The xij. degree is whan one, not oonly in his mowthe but aswell in his body, shewyth meknesse to all that beholde hym / as in al his dedes / in chaptour / in chirche, in garden / in felde, sittynge, walkynge, or standynge, &amp; his hede enclynynge / and his sight to the grounde, shewynge hym<PB REF="" N="126"/> selfe euery houre gylty of hys synne, hauynge euer suspect for to be brought to the ferefull Iugement of god, seyeng thus wyth the publycan: "Good lorde, I a synner am not worthy to lyfte vp myn eyen to heuen."  who som euer hath ascendyd al thise degrees of mekenesse shall anone haue the charyte of god perfitely, þe whyche thenne puttyth awaye all drede in suche thynges / the whyche he dyde afore with drede / and also dooth thenne al his actes  of accustome, as it were naturalle to <MILESTONE N="aa vijb" UNIT="folio"/>hym, cherefully / &amp; wythoute labour, &amp; that not for the drede of hell he dooth it, but for feruent loue þat he hath to god by a custome &amp; delyte of<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS245">Caxton: <HI REND="I">of</HI> (end of line) <HI REND="I">of vertue</HI>.</NOTE> vertue / þe whyche grace is yeuen of þe holy gooste.</P>
<P>How the seruyse of god is to be doone at his howres acordyng to the tyme / is shewid in the hole rule distynctly by chaptours, where it is noted in þe ende þat euery weke, begynnynge on the sonday, shal be songe the hole sawter of dauid wyth anthemes &amp; other appropryed therfore / &amp; finally it is so of vs to doo in regarde of holy faders afore tyme, þat dide deuoutly rendre &amp; say euery daye of the yer þe seyde hole sawter, as we rede.</P>
<P>Sith it is so that our bileue is, that god is presente in euery place &amp; beholdyth at eche howre both the gode &amp; the euyll / thenne it is to truste wythoute ony dowte / þat moche more whan we be occupied in his seruyce in þe chirche or ony other holy place / wherfore he is to be serued in drede by the counseyle of the prophete / &amp; wysely remembring his presence with innumerable  angels / the whyche ben theyr surely at <MILESTONE N="aa viija" UNIT="folio"/>dyuyne seruyce / and lete vs euer soo syng and saye that our mynde accorde to our voys and the sentence / of the dyttee.  Amen.</P>
<P>Yf we shulde make ony suggestion to a state temporall / we wolde not presume to doo it but with mekenes &amp; reuerence / thenne how moche more owe we to oure lorde god wyth all mekenes and clennesse<PB REF="" N="127"/> deuoutly to make our prayer and supplicacion, &amp; that not in haste and moche seyenge, but in clennesse of the herte &amp; compunccion wyth wepyng / þat we may the rather be herde in our prayer &amp; petycion.</P>
<P>Of the eleccyon of the deanes &amp; offycers of the religyon and of theyr good lyfe / &amp; of their charges / by the whyche the souereyn maye in partie be discharged, And how they owe to be chosen for theyr good lyfe / theyr lernynge and wysdom / And how they shal be correct and blamed / and also depryued, if thei amende not after theyr defawte / And how that other better disposyd shall occupye their place, and soo other offices / and also in what maner they shall slepe in their clothes gyrde; <MILESTONE N="aa viijb" UNIT="folio"/>And how offenses and sinnes, grete &amp;  lesse dyuersly, owen to be corrected / And how þe souereyn owe to be dilygent aboute suche as a goode leche or phisicien in all charite &amp; prayer; And also how they that oft haue ben corrupt &amp; correcte wyll not amende by noo punysshement reguler, that prayer to god &amp; good exhortacyon is thenne euer to be had vnto theim; Yf they wyll not dispose theim so to be reconsiled &amp; to take grace, how that thenne they shall departe from the congregacyon, leest that suche a moreyne shepe / empoysen and enfecte the residue of þe flocke; And also how those þat ones by their owne foly goone out of the religyon ben receyued ayen; And how childern nouyces arn to be chastised: al thys afore wryten ben ordeyned afore by saynte benet in þe complete rule in seuerall chapitours full heuenly.</P>
<P>The cellerer of the place is to be chosen of the congregacyon, suche one that is wyse, quicke, well condycyoned, &amp; sobre, not prowde, impacient, not trowbelous, ferefull, nor large / but euer dredynge god / beyng as a fader or a louyng moder to al þe congregacion. <MILESTONE N="bb ja" UNIT="folio"/>¶ They must haue grete laboure &amp; thought for all theim /  doyng noo thyng wythout þe commaundement of the souereyn / the whiche agreyng to god and the rule is euer to be kept / soo that they cause not ony of the couent to<PB REF="" N="128"/> grutche or be heuy / Yf cace be that ony aske a thynge vnresonable / yet they owe not to dysdeyne suche one or dispyse, makyng theim heuy with theyr countenaunce or answere / but reasonably wyth all mekenes and cheyrfull countenaunce in softnes of spiritte denie their petycion. This sayd charge is dredefull and also meritorious; for the apostle seyth:  "He or she that mynystrith wel / shal haue grete rewarde &amp; crowned in heuen."  Morouer theyr charge is to see diligently and well to the seke / and to Infauntes, to strangers and to power peple / Remembring that wythout doubte / þat they shall yeue a streyt rekenyng and accompte for all theys / and for the leest thyng in theyr office myskepte or myspendid, atte ferefull daye of dome / All the vesels of þe place they owe to kepe well / in that aswell as though thei were the sacrate  vesels of the awter / Noo thynge they shulde doo neclygently<MILESTONE N="bb jb" UNIT="folio"/> / or to be couetous or ouerlarge or prodigous / but all thynges to doo mesurably wyth discrecyon &amp; after the commaundement of the souereyn / And specially in thys offyce thei must haue mekenesse / &amp; whan they haue not the thyng that is askyd of theym / thenne at leest to yeue an esy &amp; gentill answer / For it is writen: a soft &amp; esy answere is a-boue ony yeft.  The refresshynge and fode that is to be yeuen to the couent or congregacyon is to be done euer without grutchyng or taryeng, so that thei haue noo cause to compleyne for<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS246">Caxton: <HI REND="I">compleynefor</HI>.</NOTE> the minystracyon / All thynges is to be askyd in dew houres / soo that none be trowbled or made pensy in the housholde of our lorde.</P>
<P>For the other stuff of the monestary, and vesture of the couent wyth other necessaryes / þe souereyn owe to prouide suche officers of whos lyf &amp; good maners he and other may be sure, for the kepyng therof &amp; gaderyng of the same / and for delyueryng of hem to theym þat haue nede / Of the whiche stuff the souereyn shall haue wrytynge / wherby he maye delyuer the percels to  the offycers as they chaunge / so þat <MILESTONE N="bb ija" UNIT="folio"/>it maye be well knowen what is yeuen and what is receyued / Who so<PB REF="" N="129"/> euer neclygently or sluttisshly entretyth ony thyng of the place / anone be they rebukyd &amp; punysshid /</P>
<P>The grete vice &amp; syn of properte in relygyon is namely to be cutte awaye by þe rote / Presume none in relygyon to yeue ony thyng, or to take, wythout the wyll &amp; commaundement of the souereyn / nor it is leefull ony to haue a thyng to theyrself propre / not as moche as their owne body / or to haue their own wyll in their power / All thynges to theim necessary is to be had of the souereyn accordynge to theyr nede, not acceptynge ony persone more than an other, but accordyng to nede &amp; in-firmyte / And all thynges must be commyn emonge theym accordyng to the lyfe of þe apostles / None presume to sey: suche a thynge is myne.  Yf ony be founde gylty in this venemouse offence of properte / lete hem twyes or thries be correct / yf they doo not amende / see thenne to<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS247">Caxton: <HI REND="I">to</HI> (end of line) <HI REND="I">to their chatysment</HI>.</NOTE> their cha[s]tysment / Yf at ony tyme one nede a lytyll thyng / thanke he our lorde and say he euer: "Deo gracias," not beyng sory that another<MILESTONE N="bb ijb" UNIT="folio"/> that nede hath /  that pite is shewid vppon hym / And he that hath suche pite shewyd vpon hym shal not therof be proude by contenaunce or by worde / and thus shall all the congregacyon be in rest and charitee / and grutchynge layd a syde / the whiche is perilous to be had eyther by worde or sygne / Yf ony therin be founde culpable, anone put theim to streyt disciplyne.</P>
<P>Eche one be besy to serue other, &amp; none is to be exscusid from þe dressing bord of þe kechyn / wythout they be seke or other wyse occupyed for þe commyn well.  In suche meke &amp; low seruice is goten grete mede / charite and rewarde / and whan they shall departe wekely from the kechyn by cours / they owe to make al thynges clene at theyr departyng / and þe clothes þat the couent hath fyled with theyr handes or fete they shall delyuer clene also wyth all mekenes.  And moreouer theyr owne fete they shall make clene in theyr departyng, and delyuer al the naprye and clene clothes to the celerer.<PB REF="" N="130"/> Suche seruytoures by þe rule may take a lytyll refresshing of mete &amp; drynke afore high dyner / for by-cause of their attendaunce &amp; seruyse at þe same.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb iija" UNIT="folio"/>Grete attendaunce is to be had aboute seke persones aboue all other thynges: as though it were to criste hymselfe / the whiche doutlesse is seruyd in theym that is seke / as he seyth hymselfe:  "I was seke and ye visited me, and that ye dide vnto the leest of theym that were seke, ye dide it vnto me" / Wherfore those that ben seke shulde considre that suche seruyce is doon to theym for the loue &amp; honour of god, and therfore they shulde be righte ware to cause ony heuynese to theyr seruytoures by ony superfluite or vncurtees demenour. Not for thy, for theyr sekenes they owe pacyently to be suffred / for of suche is goten<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS248">Caxton: <HI REND="I">goton</HI>.</NOTE> grete rewarde herafter in heuen.  The souereyn may not be neclygent to the ouersyght of suche seke persones, serchyng wel that thei lacke noo helpe or comforte / or ony thing that is necessary for theim, as is wasshing, bathynge, and medicynes, yeuyng as oft as nedeth / and to suche is grauntid by the rule for theyr sooner amendement for to ete flesshe; so þat after thei recouer thei absteyn in ony wyse therfro.  Prouyde alwey þat fauour be had to Infantes / seke persones &amp; aged.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb iijb" UNIT="folio"/>At all refeccyons and meles / redyng &amp; lecture must be had / And the reder after the masse on the sonday shall entre / and humbly desire of all the congregacyon to pray for hym, makynge a crosse in his forhede / for the euyll spirite of pryde and other / and after the blessyng yeuen begyn to rede / and all the tyme of refeccyon or meles / none to be soo hardy to speke / but to kepe high silence as speche, noys, or other wyse, preuy or aperte / how be it, the souereyn maye a lytyll speke of the processe that is rad or of other for edefieng of his ghestes or of other that here hym / and not els<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS249">Caxton: <HI REND="I">cls</HI>.</NOTE> / Also þe congregacion shal be seruyd of al thynges necessary to theym at that tyme / so that none haue nede to aske ony thynge /<PB REF="" N="131"/> Yf cace be þat suche nede befall / thenne signes must be vsid and no speche / The reder may afore his lecture take a lytyll refeccyon that is callyd mixtum / yf nede be for by-cause of his redyng atte mete / And suche owe to rede euer / the whiche by theyr redyng may best edyfye the herers / And the same is to be obseruyd in all syngyng and redynge in the chirche or in prechyng / and that <MILESTONE N="bb iva" UNIT="folio"/>to be done in mekenes / sadnesse and drede. </P>
<P>It folowyth in the rule of the mesures of mete and drynke / and what howres after the season and tyme of the yere / the congregacyon shall take theyr repast and meles / And also how the souereyn must soo tempre and dispose all suche thynges wyth other, so that the soules of his subgettes may be saaf.</P>
<P>To the seruyce of god as sone as is herde ony bell or token / all thynges set aside, the couent owe to come in all godely haste and relygyously therto / For noo thynge owe to be preferryd before the seruyce of god.  And they that come late therto / shal not goo to their owne place in þe quere / but to the place assigned for suche late commers / to theyr rebuke, penaunce, and amendement.  How they shall be punysshid that come late to meles / and of theyr sequestracyon from the feliship / and of theyr etynge alone in penaunce after other / the rule with<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS250"><HI REND="I">with</HI>, Caxton: <HI REND="I">whiche</HI>.</NOTE> his expositour dooth specifye /</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb ivb" UNIT="folio"/>Tho that fayle in psalmody / respons / anthemes or  lessons, yf they meke not theyr-selfe openly afore all the congregacion / as puttynge theyr hede downe to the grounde or other wyse by the rule for a satysfacyon / els they must haue afterwarde more largelier &amp; greter penaunce for their offence / And children euer for theyr trespace must be bette.</P>
<P>Who that euer in his laboures / as in the kechyn, in celary / in the gardyn, or in ony other occupacyon, offendyth or brekyth ony thyng / or els<PB REF="" N="132"/> lesith, and wyll not knowleche his offence to the hede and souereyn or to the congregacyon / they owe to haue grete penaunce, yf it be openly knowen, the offence / yf it be not knowen but oonly to hym selfe / thenne lete hym shew it bi confessyon to the souereyn or to his goostly fader and take his penaunce.</P>
<P>Idilnesse is the enmye of þe soule / wherfore lyke as the couent ben occupyed certeyn howres aboute the seruyce of god / soo certeyn other howres ben thei occupyed in redyng and studyeng of heuenly thynges /  and in laboures<MILESTONE N="bb va" UNIT="folio"/> wyth theyr body in thynges that is good and necessary to theim or þe place / for thenne thei ben very religious, whan thei thus folowe holy faders and doon as the apostles dyden.</P>
<P>In the tyme of lent echon by theyr-selfe haue the bible / the whiche they owe to rede complete and hole besyde theyr seruyse / and the seyde bible is to be delyuerd vnto theym atte begynnynge of lent.  And the serchers of the relygyon owe to see warely about þat they be occupyed in lecture therof sonday and other / &amp; not aboute fables / Iapes or sluggisshenes.  Yf ony suche be founde / see that they be spoken vnto sharply ones or twyes / &amp; yf they amende not theyr-wyth / lete theym be correct / soo that all other maye beware by theym.  If theyr be ony so slouthfull or neclygent, that they maye not or wyll not be occupied in redyng or holy medytacyon / thenne lete theym be assigned to other occupacyons to doo / so that they be neuer vnoccupied in vertu / If they be seke or feble for age / thenne such an occupacyon is to be put vnto theym þat they maye awaye wyth / &amp; not to be ydyll, by þe discrecion of the souereyn.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb vb" UNIT="folio"/>How be it that a relygious<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS251">Caxton: <HI REND="I">relygions</HI>.</NOTE> persone owe euery tyme to kepe lent / yet for by-cause that fewe haue thys vertu / therfore we aduise and counseyll, seyth saynt benet, all of the relygyon spiritually theys xl. dayes of lent to kepe in all clennesse of lyfe / and to put vtterly<PB REF="" N="133"/> awaye all theyr neclygences and olde custome of synne / and thenne more spiritually to gyue theim to prayer waylyng and wepinge<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS252">Caxton: <HI REND="I">wepnige</HI>.</NOTE> / redinge / and abstinence in mete and drynke / wythdrawynge somwhat of theyr takynge in mete and drynke other wyse than they dide afore, and that wyth good wyll, offerynge it in his mynde to god and to the poore peple; And to wythdrawe some what of slepe and speche and wanton behauour.  And as for abstynence of mete and drynke, it owe to be doon wyth the consente euer of the souereyn and the helpe of prayer.  For yf it be otherwyse doon / it is to be taken of presumpcyon and vayne glory / and thenne it hath noo mede.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb vja" UNIT="folio"/>Noo thynge is to be spoken in the chirche but  prayer / And after that ony seruyce is there doon / all they owe to departe wyth silence and lowe reuerence doon to god.  Yf ony after woll praye of deuocyon / none shall let hym by theyr noyse or ony other vncurteys delynge / and thenne suche owe secretly to praye wyth deuocyon and not on high, but wepynge for his synnes and the Ignoraunce of the peple and theyr synnes wyth all meke intencyon of herte and soule.  All other not soo there occupyed owe to avoyde.</P>
<P>Al strangers or ghestes arn to be receyued for god &amp; as god.  For here-after they shal here hym saye to theim / "I was a stranger &amp; ye toke me In / and gaue me mete &amp; drynke and lodgynge" / and soo of other dedes of mercy / Euery persone is to be honourid for the ymage of god / thenne moche more those that ben of cristen religion and that commen for god / Whan euer it is shewyd that a stranger is come / anone the souereyn or his bredern shulde <MILESTONE N="bb vjb" UNIT="folio"/>quykly goo to hym wyth all charyte /  and after theyr prayer togider made and knyt togider in goddis peas / kissyng togyder and salutyng other / with after refresshing theim with mete and drynk and other necessaryes to their power / redynge amonge the lawes of god to theyr edyfieng of soule / The souereyn may breke his<PB REF="" N="134"/> mele for a stranger, wythout it be a spirituell fastynge daye / and thenne he owe not to breke it / The bredern may not breke ony faste for strangers.  Also the souereyn wyth the congregacion shulde with all mekenes folow oure lorde / and wasshe the fete of the strangers, sayenge certeyn prayers / for in theim and poore folke is to be had diligent watche and cure / for crist in theym is surely receyued / He þat is asygned for suche gestes or poore folke, to gyue vnto theim necessaries, shulde drede god gretly and haue mekenes and pacience / and doo all thynges with wisdom / and silence, euer fulfillyng the souereyns commaundement / &amp; whan they ony other mete or see / they owe to enclyne mekely and salute theim departyng with silence.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="bb vija" UNIT="folio"/>Noo wyse be it leefull to ony broder to take or receyue of fader or moder ony letters, tokens, or yeftes / or els to sende hymself or to yeue ony without the wyll and comaundement of his hede and souereyn / the whiche had, he thenne maye receiue theim / not forthy the souereyn after may yeue suche stuff to suche as it shall please hym, and he that it was sent vnto shall take it in worthe &amp; cherefully / in that an other hath it /<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS253"><HI REND="I">it /</HI>, Caxton:<HI REND="I"> / it</HI>.</NOTE> leest that occasion of grutchinge inwarde or outwarde be yeuen to the by thy goostly enmye.</P>
<P>Clothynge to the couent, and habyte, is to be yeuen accordyng to the hete of the yere or to the coldenes of the countre that they dwell in, lasse or more as nede is / And the souereyn must haue consideracion therof / and to bye suche cloth that is made in that countre or prouynce, of the vilest and lyghtest pryce / And as oft as they shal take new / thenne to rendre vp the olde for the vse of pore peple / Of other thynges necessary for theyr body daye &amp; nyght in wynter and somer, and of theyr celles and lodgyng, and of their behauour in theim with other / the hole rule certifieth.  And how the souereyne  shal dyligently serche that thei lacke no <MILESTONE N="bb vijb" UNIT="folio"/>thyng to theym necessary / soo that all occasion of grutchyng, or for ony<PB REF="" N="135"/> thynge werkynge, or for ony thynge kepyng / haue no place in þe relygyon / euer remembryng the wordes wrytyn in the actes of the apostles, where it is seyde / that it was distribute &amp; delyuerd to echone of theym as theyr nede required.</P>
<P>The borde or table of the souereyn is to be garnysshid wyth pilgrymes or ghestes / And whan there ben few strangers / the soouereyn maye call vnto hym some of the brederen / so that parte of the senyours be left wyth the couent for theyr awe and disciplyne.</P>
<P>Whan ony commyth from the worlde to entre in-to religion / a light or soden entree is not to be grauntyd; but for to doo after the apostle, preuynge the spirites / yf they be of god.  Yf cace be that suche one be abydynge in hys purpose / and founde pacyent for ony Iniuryes done vnto hym / or for delayeng of his entree, &amp; suche other, thenne after iiij or v. dayes may be graunted vnto hym entree / abidyng after by <MILESTONE N="bb viija" UNIT="folio"/>certeyn  space in the ghestys chambre / and after in the cell for nouices / theyr to be for a tyme in prayer and medytacyon / and for to ete and drynke.  And a senyoure of the relygyon is to be assigned vnto hym / the whyche is apt to gete sowles to god / the whyche shall see vnto hym warely and vysely that he be vertuously occupyed / sekynge our lorde by prayer, and to folow hym by obedyence and suffryng of repreues / All the hardnesse and sharpnesse of the ordre is to be tolde hym playnly / by the whiche he must goo to heuen.  And yf he promyse to contynwe and to be stable in his purpoos, thenne after two monethes / the rule shall be red hole by ordre vnto hym / and thus it shall be seyde vnto hym:  "Beholde here the lawe vndyr whyche thou must sore laboure and fyght / Yf thou thynkyst that thou maye kepe it, come in / and yf thou may not / goo<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS254"><HI REND="I">/ goo</HI>, Caxton: <HI REND="I">goo /</HI>.</NOTE> free ayen where it plesith þe."  Yf he yet contynewe by hys promyse, thenne he shall be brought ayen to the nouyces cell to be preued ayen, and yet ayen<PB REF="" N="136"/>  after in all pacience; <MILESTONE N="bb viijb" UNIT="folio"/>&amp; thenne after six monethes the rule ayen shall be red vnto hym / soo that he may well know wherfore he entryth in-to relygyon / and yf he contynue styll iiij. mounthes after / yet not for thy þe rule ayen shall be red vnto hym / And yf he promyse thenne vtterly to kepe all thynges that is so ofte red vnto hym and to be obedient, thenne atte firste shall he be taken in-to the congregacyon / knowlechyng thenne that he is bounde to the law of the rule / and thenne after he may not departe from<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS255"><HI REND="I">from</HI>, Caxton: <HI REND="I">fōr</HI>.</NOTE> þe monestarye / nor exscuse him, but that he is vnder the yocke of þe seyd rule to his deth. ¶ Thenne whan he is admyttid and taken in-to the chirche to be professid afore all the peple / there he shall promytte of his stabylnesse and amendyng of his maners / &amp; there-vpon make his obedience afore god and his sayntes / the whiche is to be done with all his mynde and herte, leest that he mocke our lorde god to his dampnacyon / Of his promyse and profession he shall make a peticyon in writynge to god and to all sayntes / whos relykes ben in that chirche and to the souereyn assygned therto / the  whiche he shal wryte with <MILESTONE N="cc ja" UNIT="folio"/>his owne hande / or els an other of hym required, yf that he can not write / &amp; marke it with his owne sygne / the whiche he shall put vpon þe awter afterwarde wyth his hande; &amp; seye certayn prayers ther-wyth / And after this he shal fall downe prostrate at fete of the couent / prayeng theym to praye for hym / and after thys he shall be nombrid for euer / and named for one of the congregacyon / Suche stuff that he hath not yeuen before to folke þat ben poore or other wyse, openly shall he thenne yeue to the monestary / noo thyng reseruyng vnto hym-selfe; for after that tyme he may haue noo propirte / not as moche as his owne body / And whan in þe chirche he shall doo of his seculer arraye and be cladde with the habite of the place / those that he puttyth of shall be kept in the vestuary / leest that the enmye the fende perswade and cause hym after / the whiche god defende, for to departe from the religion / and thenne he must haue his seculer clothes ayen / and put out for euer. But his petycyon in wrytinge, that he put on the awter in<PB REF="" N="137"/> his firste entree / ought euer to remayn and to be kept in the monestary.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="cc jb" UNIT="folio"/>Yf a man of worship offre a yong childe, his sone,  to god and to the religion, thenne shall he or his frendes make the peticion, as is<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS256">Caxton: <HI REND="I">as it</HI>, for <HI REND="I">as is</HI>, or <HI REND="I">as it is</HI>.</NOTE> wryten afore, for him with writyng / and their offryng wyth the hande of þe childe / the whiche shall be rollyd togider in the pall or in the towell of the awter / How poore children and seculer prestes / &amp; how mounkes strangers owe to be receyued / and of the ordynacion of prestes &amp; of dekens wythin þe selfe religion, is shewid folowyngly in the complete rule by large processe / the whiche I passe ouer for the grete change that is in that religion, and the length.</P>
<P>Whan euer the bredern mete togider / the yonger shall meke hymselfe / desirynge the blessynge of hys senyour / And whan ony senyour commyth at ony tyme before hym / he shal arise and gyue place to sytte; and the sayd Ionger shall stande tyll he be commande to sitte.  Yonge children of the religion both in chirche and at table &amp; elswhere shall kepe theyr place after their age in relygion / and they shal haue ouerseers, techinge theym &amp; gyuynge disciplyne / tyll they come to the age of vnderstondyng.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="cc ija" UNIT="folio"/>To the gate of the monestary an aged persone, wise  and well manerd, is to be assigned / the whiche can take an answere wittely or a message / Whose good disposicyon woll not suffre hym to wandre aboute or to be idle / The whiche broder owe to lodge nygh the gate / soo that strangers that come maye euer fynde hym redy / of whom they shall take an answere. / And whan someuer ony knockyth at gate, or els that the poore peple crye, anone he shall seye:  "Deo gracias" cherefully, and gyue theym an awnswere comfortably in all mekenes and softnesse and drede of god / The whiche broder portar shall haue helpe of an other yonger broder, yf grete nede requyre. Suche a monestary is to be sette in suche a place where all<PB REF="" N="138"/> thynges necessary soone maye be had / so that the couent nede not to passe the boundes of the clausures therof / the whiche yf thei dide / shulde be perylle for theyr soules / Saynt benet woll that the rule be red effectuelly oftymes in the yere afore the congregacion / for by-cause none of hem shal pretende Ignorance or ony exscuse.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="cc ijb" UNIT="folio"/>Whan ony of the bredern must doo a Iourney without the clausure of the place, after licence had, he shall commende hym to the prayer of his souereyn / and euer at last oryson in the seruyse of god / shal a prayer be sayd for him and all þat is absent / And the daye that they come home ayen / they shal lye prostrate all the seruyse tyme / &amp; desyre the couent to praye for theym for theyr excesses done in the iourney / as in syght, heryng of ony vanytees / or euyll thynges, or ony voyde wordes / And they shall not tell ony thyng þat they sawe or herd in theyr iourney, for it is a grete meane to þe destruccion of suche a place of relygion / And he that presumyth to doo the contrary or to goo oute of the clausure of the monestary to ony place / thought it be neuer so lytil, wythout commandement or licence of the souereyn / owe to be streytly punysshyd.</P>
<P>If ony greuouse or impossible thynges be put vnto a broder<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS257">Caxton: <HI REND="I">abroder</HI>.</NOTE> of his souereyn to doo / he shall wyth all mekenesse and obedience take the commaundement vpon hym:  Yf cace be that it passe his power in ony wise to fulfill it, thenne wyth all lowlynesse he shal tell it to  <MILESTONE N="cc iija" UNIT="folio"/>his souereyn / and the cause of impossibilytee.  And yf cace be the souereyn contynew in his sentence &amp; wyll / thenne the broder owe to know that it is to hym right profitable yet to obeye, puttynge his trust in the helpe of god / whiche woll not forsake all theym that truste in him.</P>
<P>Eche one shuld beware þat he exscuse not or defende an other in ony cause, though al he were neuer soo nygh to hym of blode / For of it lightly wolde<PB REF="" N="139"/> growe grete occasion of sclaundre to the religion / Who þat is founde fawty in this trespace owe to be punysshid greuosly.</P>
<P>It is ordeyned also that it is not lefull to ony of the couent to punisshe or to bete an other of the same / but suche one as the souereyn hath yeuen power vnto / Those that offende openly / must be repreuyd and punysshid openly / that other maye be the rather aferd to offende / Children to the xv. yere of age shall stande euer vndir streyt awe and diligent discipline / &amp; all thynges er to be doon vnto theym mesurably with discrecyon and reason / &amp; vndir the commandement euer of the souereyn / And he that otherwise dooth / shall be correct wyth <MILESTONE N="cc iijb" UNIT="folio"/>reguler disciplyne / for it his writen in the gospell / All  thynges that ye wolde þat other shuld doo vnto you / doo ye it to theym / and that ye wolde not haue done to you / doo it not to theim.</P>
<P>Obedience is not oonly to be yeuen of al the couent to the souereyn / but also echon to other must obeye / knowyng that by þe way of obedience thei shall come vnto heuen.  Whan the commaundement of the souereyn<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS258">Caxton: <HI REND="I">soueuereyn</HI>.</NOTE> is doon by the subgette / saynt Benet woll that besyde that / þat euer the yonger in religion obeye theyr senyours in all charite / dilygence, &amp; mekenesse; who þat woll not must be correct / Yf ony brother be blamed of his souereyn for ony cause / though it be right small / as soone as that he knowyth that his souereyn or his senyour is greued wyth hym or trowbled, though it be right lityll / anone he owe to fall downe prosstrate at his fete / so longe to the tyme he that is greued be satisfied &amp; plesid for his humyliacyon.  Yf ony disdeyn to doo thys / lete hym be punysshid on the nakyd body / and yf he be obstynate / put hym out of the monestary.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="cc iva" UNIT="folio"/>As there is an euyll ȝele / loue, or affeccyon / the  whiche departyth one from god and bringith hym to hell / soo there is a ȝele or affeccion the whiche<PB REF="" N="140"/> departyth one from synne and bryngith hym to god to euerlastyng lyfe, the whiche is to be had in religion in all feruent desire / for by it echone gladly woll reuerence other, and echone suffre other for ony infirmytee or condycions / and that wyth all pacience / and moreouer echone be glad who can best meke hymselfe and to be obedient / neuer folowyng that thyng the whiche he demeth to be profitable oonly to hymselfe / but moche more that thyng that is profitable for other.  Echone shewe charitee to other as brethern in all clene &amp; chaste loue / dredyng euer god / and louynge theyr souereyn in charyte vnfeyned, preferryng euer goddis cause and mater afore all other / the whiche woll brynge hem all to-gider to reygne in the lyfe / the whiche is eternalle.  AMEN.</P><TRAILER>Explicit.</TRAILER><TRAILER>¶ Of your charite praye for the translatour of thys sayd treatyse.</TRAILER>
</DIV1>

<DIV1 TYPE="text"><PB REF="" N="141"/>
<HEAD>IV. THE NORTHERN LANSDOWNE RITUAL FOR THE Ordination of Nuns.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(Lansdowne MS. 378, British Museum.)</HEAD>
<P><MILESTONE N="43a" UNIT="folio"/>This is þe furme how A Nouice sall be made &amp;  resaiuid to religiun.</P>
<P>In þe first begining, when sho hase made hir peticiun, And askid þe howse, &amp; priores and þe Couent hase graunt hir it, þan sall sho cume to þe priores and knele downe be-fore hir on hir kneis.  And þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS259">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">e</HI>.</NOTE> priores schall take hyr hende in hirs and kisse hir, and sho sall be resauid.</P>
<P>Efterwarde, when þai likis to bringe hir to þe chaypitur for to be examend, þai sall aray hir in þat wede þat sho sall vse þe first ȝere to sho be profest. And þan, when chaipitur is done, sho þat sall be hir maistres sall say to þe priores: "þare is a Nouice for to be examend."</P>
<P>And þan [þe] priores<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS260">MS. <HI REND="I">þan priores</HI>.</NOTE> sall byd bring hir in.  And hir maistres sall bring hir in.  And when sho comes whare þe cuuent takis þare venyse, þan sall sho prostrate downe. And þan þe priores sall aske hir: "dere doughtir, what is þi asking?"  And ligand still, sho sall say:  "þe mercy of god and ȝoures."  And þe priores sall garre hir rise, and say tyll hir on þis wyse: "What is þat mercy þat þu<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS261">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">u</HI>; similarly p. 142, l. 12.</NOTE> askes?" and sho sall say: "for to dwelle in þis <MILESTONE N="43b" UNIT="folio"/>place  in þe abet of religiun to serue godde, &amp; for to punysce my sinnis, &amp; for amendment of my life, &amp; finally for saluacion<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS262">MS. <HI REND="I">finally of saluacion</HI>.</NOTE> of my saule."  And þan þe priores sall say a-gayn: "Dere doghtir, þis thing þat þu askis is a harde thing &amp; a strate.  Neuir-þeles, to þam þat [god] inspires<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS263">MS. <HI REND="I">þat inspires</HI>.</NOTE> &amp;<PB REF="" N="142"/> giffis grace, will, and power to fulfil it, &amp; standis stabill in-to þe purpose þat þa be-gane, it is bott light, meritory, &amp; medefull, &amp; spedand to þe lif þat euir sall last.  Bott at þe begining of þis spiritual life, thre thyngis þar ar þat þe behuvis: to forsake þine awne propir will, &amp; liffe vndir obedience, &amp; be obediant principally to þi priores &amp; to þi elders in þe ordir In all lefull þingis &amp; honeste.  The secunde is, þat þe behouis liue in wilfull power[te],<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS264">MS. <HI REND="I">power</HI>.</NOTE> na thing awand with-owtyn wittyng of þi priores, na nathing take of nane of þi frendis, golde ne siluir, no na other gifte, bot at þi priores se it, And þat it fully be disposid at hir will, þat þu be noght propirtarij and falle in owre-hegh daunger enence þi religiun.  For wha sa euir hase ani thing, golde,  siluir, iuel, or ony propirte, with-outen <MILESTONE N="44a" UNIT="folio"/>þe witting &amp; sufferans of hir priores, sho standis curste.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS265">MS. <HI REND="I">siluir or ony iuel with outen þe witting &amp; sufferans of hir priores propirte sho standis curste</HI>.  In a prior copy of the ritual, the word <HI REND="I">propirte</HI> was probably written in the margin.  The scribe entered it in the wrong place, also putting <HI REND="I">or ony</HI> before <HI REND="I">iuel</HI> (jewel).</NOTE>  The thirde is, þat þe behouis to liue chaiste, and take god to þi<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS266">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">i</HI>.</NOTE> spouse, and forsake all þi lust, &amp; þi liking of þi flesche; þe behouis to giue þe to abstinens &amp; faste, when oþir men etis; þe behouis to rise to þe seruise of godde, when oþir men slepis; þe be-houis gife þe to praier &amp; deuocion for to purches grace, and stifly stande<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS267">MS. <HI REND="I">stifly and stande</HI>.</NOTE> in þe purpose þat þu takis þe to.  And dohtir, giue þu seis þat þu mai fulfill with þe grace of god all þeis poyntes þat I haue reherced, Sais now her be-fore þe cuuent: what is þi wille?"  And þan þe nouyce, if sho will abide in hir purpose, sall say on þis wise: "The gude purpose þat I haue tane, I sall fulfill it to my liuis ende thrugh þe grace of god and ȝure gude informaciun."  And þan þe priores sal say tyl hir: "Dere doghtir, godd of his grete grace, he giue þe gude perseuerans. Ga with þi maistres in þe name of crist."  And hir mastres sall haue hir to þe Nouycery, &amp; infurme as religiun will.  And when twa monethes er passid, hir maistres  salle <MILESTONE N="44b" UNIT="folio"/>expone hir þe rewle and all þe poyntis and stratenes of religiun, na thing lanande fra hir.  And when hir maistres hase exponed hir þe rewle, sho sall be examned<PB REF="" N="143"/> a-gain in þe chaipitur on þe same wise os es be-fore saide. And giffe sho standis in hir purpose eftir þe space of sex monethes, þe rewle eftir sone sall be exponed til hir of hir maistres.  And þan sall sho be examend in þe chaipitur in þe maner be-fore saide.  And giffe sho ȝitte abide fully in hir purpose to hir ȝere ende, þan on þe day þat sho sall be profest, sho sall be broght in-to þe chaipitur, &amp; þe fourte tyme be examend, as be-fore es rehercede.  And þan if sho fully agre hir to þe beheste þat sho made before, Efter þe gospell on þe day þat sho sall be profeste, hir maistres sall cum til hir &amp; lede hir til þe gree.  And þare sho sall rede hir professiun, The preste þat singis þe messe standand at þe right corner of þe auter.  And when sho hase redde hir profession, hir maistres sall gyffe hir a penne with ynke, &amp; þe nouyce sal make a crosse on þe buke of hir profession, and sa wende vp to þe <MILESTONE N="45a" UNIT="folio"/>hee auter, and hir  maistres with hir, &amp; lay it on þe right ende of þe auter, and kys þe auter, and encline deuotelie, and gange againe to þe gree, &amp; singe þare thrise: "Suscipe me, domine" &amp;c.; þe couent, all-way standant in þare stallis, sall reherce þe same again thrise, and "Gloria patri."  Þan þe nouice sall prostrate downe be-fore þe gree, when "Kirieleison, Christeleison, Kirieleison."  And þan þe preste sall say or sing: "Et ne nos."  "Sed libera nos," sall þe qwere answer.  And þan þe chantur sall be-gine þis salme: "Miserere mei, deus," þe ta side a verse, &amp; þe toþir a-noder, And "gloria patri," "Sicut."  And when þis salme es endit, þan þe preste sall cume fra þe hee awter to þe gree, and on hir: "Saluam<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS268">MS. <HI REND="I">Saluum</HI>; cf. p. 144, l. 20, and p. 148, l. 2.</NOTE> fac ancillam tuam." And þe qwere sall answer: "Deus meus, sperantem in te."  And efter sune þe preste sall singe: "Mitte ei, domine, auxilium de sancto."  The qwere sall answer: "Et de sion tuere eam."  Þe preste: "Esto ei, domine, turris fortitudinis."  Þe qwere: "A facie inimici."  And þan þe preste: "Nichil <MILESTONE N="45b" UNIT="folio"/>proficiet inimicus in ea."  And  þan þe quere: "Et filius iniquitatis non apponet nocere ei."  Þe preste: "Domine, deus virtutum, co[n]uerte<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS269">MS. <HI REND="I">couerte</HI>.</NOTE> nos." Þe quere: "Et ostende faciem."  Þe preste: "Dominus<PB REF="" N="144"/> vobiscum."  Þe quere: "Et cum."  Þe preste: "Oremus." And þan he sall say fore colettis oure hir,<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS270">After <HI REND="I">hir</HI> nearly half a line is left blank.</NOTE> The nouice ligand prostrate be þe gree, And þe priores and þe couent standand in þer stallis, and þar facis turned to þe autir. And when þe collettis are all endid, þan þe nouice sall stand qwil þe vaile es in halowyng.  And when þe preste hase halowid it, thre or fowre of hir sistirs with hir mastres sall cum oute of þe qwere &amp; stand a-bowte hir, qwil hir vales ar in doyng on, All þe oþir remanant of þe couent standand in þare stallis.  Þan, when sho is arayid vp in hir valis, þe chantir sall be-ginne solemply þis hym: "Veni, creator," þe quere a verse, þe toþir a-noþir.  And in þe mene time sall þe Nouice make hir profession to þe priores, kneland on hir kneis, saiand on þis maner: "Promitto tibi obedienciam secundum regulam sancti  benedicti."  <MILESTONE N="46a" UNIT="folio"/>And þe priores sais þan: "Det tibi Deus uitam eternam."  And on þe same wise sall sho ga downe þe priores side, and syne þe toþir syde.  And when sho sall cume again, þare [sall] sho<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS271">MS. <HI REND="I">þare sho</HI>.</NOTE> prostrate and ligge hir downe. And þan þe preste at makis hir sal sai or sing: "Saluam<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS272">MS. <HI REND="I">Saluum</HI>.</NOTE> fac," "Nichil proficiet," As be-fore es saide, and þir colettis: "Deus, qui caritatis," "Acciones nostras," "Fidelium deus."  Qwen þir thre colettis ar said, þe priores sall cume &amp; lede hir til þe stall, whare sho sal stande, and þe preste sall ga to þe awter and be-gynne þe crede.  And at þis [ah] hir<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS273">MS. <HI REND="I">þis hir</HI>.</NOTE> to be howslid.</P>
</DIV1>

<DIV1 TYPE="text"><PB REF="" N="145"/>
<HEAD>V. THE VESPASIAN RITUAL FOR THE Ordination of Nuns.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(Cotton MS. Vespasian A. 25, British Museum.)</HEAD>
<HEAD><MILESTONE N="120a" UNIT="folio"/>The Method of makeing a Nunn.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS274">The heading is in a later hand.  The English text (with some short Latin expressions) is underlined in red ink.</NOTE></HEAD>
<P>Here bygyns þe manere forto make a nun.  At þe first be-gynnyng þe mese salbe of our lady.  þe offece of þe mese sall be "Salue, sancta parens."  þe Epistil &amp; þe godspel &amp; all þe tother salbe als þe tyme of þe ȝer askes.  Att þe bygynnyng of þe mese þe madyn þat salbe mayde nun sal sit in þe quere a-pon a stole be-for þe priores stayle with hir prouese in hir hand.  And at þe offerand tyme þe Priores sal lede þe madyn til þe toumbe in-mydes þe quer, &amp; þer sal scho betech hir vntil hir next frendes.  And þai sal lede hir vp vnto þe hegh auter. And þe Priores &amp; þe conuent sal folow vp vnto þe auter. And þen hir frendes sal offer hir vp tyl þe auter, &amp; þan byken hir to þe priores ogayn.  And þe same tyme al þat wil may offir.  And þen þai al sal sit down &amp; here þe preching, And scho with hir professe-boke in hir hand. And when þe preching es done, þe Priores sal hafe hir befor þe auter &amp; vncleth hir of hir seculer clething.  And in þe same tyme þe prelet sall halow hir habete with-outyn note, þer sayand: "Dominus vob[iscum]!</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="120b" UNIT="folio"/>Deus, qui vestimentum salutare et indumentum eterne  iocunditatis tuis fidelibus promisisti, clemenciam tuam suppliciter exoramus, vt hec indumenta, humilitatem cordis et contemptum mundi significancia, quibus famula (-e) tua (-e) N. sancto visibiliter est (sunt) informanda (-e)<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS275">25 ff. The letters and words here placed within parentheses are, in the MS., written above (the endings of) the corresponding words.</NOTE><PB REF="" N="146"/> propocito, propicius benedicas, et beate castitatis habitum, quem te inspirante susceperit (-perint), te protegente custodiat (-ant).  Per christum dominum nostrum.</P>
<P>Deus, bonarum virtutum dator et omnium benediccionum largus infusor, exaudi preces nostras, et hanc (-as) vestem (-es), quam (-as) famula (-e) tua (-e) N. pro conseruande castitatis signo se ad-operiendam (-das) exposcit (-cunt), benedicere et sanctificare digneris.  Per christum.</P>
<P>Þe blissing our þe vayle: "Dominus vobiscum!</P>
<P>Caput omnium fidelium, deus, et tocius corporis saluator, hoc (-ec) operimentum (-ta) velaminis (-num), quod (que) famula (-e) tua (-e) propter tuam tueque genitricis beatissime sancte semper virginis marie amorem suo capiti est (sunt) impositura (-re), tua dextera et hoc, quod per illud (-a) mistice datur intelligi, tua semper custodia corpore pariter et animo incontaminato custodiat (-ant), vt quum ad perpetuam sanctorum remuneracionem uenerit (-int), cum prudentibus virginibus et ipsa (-e) preparata (-e)  te perducente ad <MILESTONE N="121a" UNIT="folio"/>perpetue felicitatis nupcias intrare meriatur (-an-).  Per dominum."</P>
<P>Efter þeir orisons kast haly watter o-pon þe clethyng, and þan þe prelete sal gyf þe madyn hir clethyng: first hir cote, sayand with-outen note:</P>
<P>"Accipe uestem! indue sanctitatis decorem! ornare habitu sancte religionis cum timore &amp; reuerencia, quem interueniente beata dei genitrice Maria cum bonorum obseruancia operum ignita castitatis lampade suffulta immaculatum [ante] tribunal<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS276">MS. <HI REND="I">maculatum tribunal</HI>; cf. p. 147, l. 2.</NOTE> christi perferas.<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS277">MS. <HI REND="I">perfer/ras</HI>; cf. p. 2, ll. 3, 7, footnotes.</NOTE> Qui viuit et regnat cum deo patre."</P>
<P>And sythen sal þe prelete gif hir þe mantill, sayand: "Accipe uestem," vt supra.</P>
<P>Efter þis, þen sal þe<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS278">MS. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">e</HI>.</NOTE> prelete with a payr of schers be-gyn forto kut hir hair befor at þe toppyng, sayand: "In nomine patris" — "et filii,"  behind — &amp; "spiritus sancti" — "Amen," on aþer side.  And þen sal þe priores kut o-way þe remnaunt of þe hair.  And þen sal þe prelete gif hir hir wimpil, sayand:</P>
<P><PB REF="" N="147"/>"Accipe peplum sacrum, puella, quod perferas sine macula ante tribunal domini nostri iesu christi, cui flectitur omne genu celestium, terrestrium, &amp; infernorum, in secula seculorum."</P>
<P>And þan þe prelete <MILESTONE N="121b" UNIT="folio"/>sal lay þe vayle apon hir hede,  sayand:</P>
<P>"Accipe velum sacrum, puella, quod perferas sine macula," vt supra.</P>
<P>And þan sal he gif hir þe girdyl, sayand: "Accipe ȝonam," &amp;c.;  Þis orison "Accipe" salbe sayd at iij thynges, þat es to wit: at þe gyfyng of þe wimpil, &amp; of þe vayle, &amp; of þe girdyl, als it es sayd be-for.</P>
<P>Efter þis sal þat nun nouece stand stil befor þe auter &amp; rede hir prouesse with note, sayand:</P>
<P>"Ego soror N., deo data, promitto stabilitatem meam et conuersionem morum meorum et obidienciam secundum regulam sancti Benedicti coram deo &amp; omnibus sanctis eius in hoc monasterio, quod constructum est in honorem sancti N., in presencia domne N. priorisse."—Þe profession on english: "I sister N., giffyn to god, I hete my stabilnes &amp; turnyng of my maners &amp; buxsumnes efter þe rewle of sant Benett, befor god &amp; all his halows in þis mynster, þat es set in þe wirchep of sant N., in þe presence of daym N. priores."</P>
<P>When scho hase red <MILESTONE N="122a" UNIT="folio"/>hir professe, scho sal wend vp to  þe auter, And lay hir profession-boke a-pon þe auter, &amp; þe ryng with-al.  And þan þe priores sal wind or lap þe maydyn handes in þe halowd towel of þe auter, &amp; þan sal þat nun nouece gay down be-nethen þe grece of þe auter, turnand hir vp vnto þe auter, standand, &amp; sayand þis vers with note: "Suscipe me, domine, secundum eloquium tuum, et viuam."  And in þas wordes sayng, sal scho fall down to þe erth, And þan rise vp &amp; turn hir to þe pepil, sayand: "Et non confundas me ab exspectacione mea;"  And lowte; &amp; þis vers sal scho say iij tymes on þis maner. And þis same vers al þe congregacion, þat es to wit, al þe conuent, sal answer thris, sayand with-outyn note: "Suscipe me, domine" &amp;c.; with "Gloria patri;" And þan "kyrieleison, christeleison, kyrieleison," "Pater noster." And þan sal þe nun be layd down grofelyng on lenghe befor<PB REF="" N="148"/> þe ryght end of þe auter.  And þan þe prelet sal say oue[r]<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS279">MS. <HI REND="I">oue</HI>; cf. Notes.</NOTE> hir with note: "Et ne nos," "Saluam (-as) [fac] ancillam<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS280">MS. <HI REND="I">Saluam (-as) ancillam</HI>; cf. p. 143, l. 29.</NOTE> (-as) tuam (-as)!  Mitte ei (-is), domine, auxilium de  sancto.  Nichil <MILESTONE N="122b" UNIT="folio"/>perficiat inimicus in ea (-is).  Esto ei (-is), domine, turris fortitudinis.  Domine, exaudi oracionem meam.  Presta, quesumus, domine, huic (-iis) ancille (-is) tue (-is) renuncianti (-bus) secularibus pompis gracie tue ianuas aperire, que despectis mundi illecebris confugit (-unt) sub titulo christi, uenientem (-es) ad te sereno vultu suscipere, ne de ea (-is) valeat inimicus triumphare; tribue ei (-is), quesumus, infatigabile brachium auxilii tui; mentem eius (-arum) fidei lorica circumda, vt felici muro uallata (-e) mundum se gaudeat (-ant) euasisse.  Per eundem dominum nostrum" &amp;c.;—And þen sal þe prelete, kneland be-for þe auter, begyn with note þe yme: "Veni, creator spiritus."  And þe quere sal syng þe same vers to end. And þe prelete sal be-gyn<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS281">MS. <HI REND="I">salbe gyn</HI>.</NOTE> ilka vers of þe yme kneland, &amp; when he hase sayd al þat vers til end, he sal stand vp to þe tyme he begyn a-noþer vers; &amp; on þis maner sal he do til þe yme<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS282">MS. <HI REND="I">þe tyme</HI>.</NOTE> all be endydde, &amp; þe quer sal syng þe remnant.</P>
<P>"VEni, creator spiritus, mentes tuorum visita, imple superna gracia que tu creasti pectora, Qui paraclitus diceris, donum dei."</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="123a" UNIT="folio"/>when "veni, creator" es endyd, þe prelete sal say ouer hir with note þer orysons:</P>
<P>"Sancte spiritus, qui te deum ac dominum reuelare mortalibus dignatus es, immensam tue bonitatis graciam postulamus, vt sicut ubi-uis spiras, sic &amp; huic ancille tue affectum deuocionis indulgeas, &amp; que tua sapiencia est condita, tua quoque prouidencia gubernetur, quam iuxta consuetam graciam unccio tua de omnibus doceat, et per intercessionem beatissime dei genitricis Marie eam a vanitate seculi ueraciter conuerte, &amp; sicut es omnium peccatorum remissio, deprimentes impietatis obligaciones in ea dissolue ad obseruanciam sancte castitatis vel virginitatis; fac eam certatim feruere in tribulacionibus &amp; angustiis; tua difficiente consolacione valeat respirare, vt sobrie, iuste,<PB REF="" N="149"/> &amp; pie, per veram humilitatem atque deuocionem in christi caritate fundata, quod te donante desiderat felici perseuerancia compleat in te; cui est honor et gloria cum patre &amp; filio per omnia secula seculorum.  amen.</P>
<P>Respice, domine propicius, super hanc famulam tuam N., vt virginitatis sancte propocitum, quod te inspirante suscepit, te gubernante custodiat.  Per christum dominum.</P>
<P>Da, quæsumus, Omnipotens deus, vt hec famula tua, que pro spe retribucionis eterne tibi domino desiderat consecrari, plena fide animoque in <MILESTONE N="123b" UNIT="folio"/>sancto propocito  permaneat; tu eam, omnipotens pater, sanctificare et benedicere et imperpetuum conseruare digneris; tribue ei humilitatem, castitatem, obedienciam, caritatem, &amp; omnium bonorum quantitatem.  Da ei, domine, pro operibus gloriam, pro pudore reuerenciam, pro pudicicia sanctitatem, vt ad meritum possit glorie peruenire; per christum.</P>
<P>Benedicat te conditor celi et terre, deus, pater omnipotens, qui te elegere dignatur ad sancte marie matris domini nostri iesu christi consorcium, vt integram et inmaculatam virginitatem, quam professa es coram domino et angelis eius, conserues, propocitum teneas, castitatem diligas, pacienciam serues, &amp; coronam virginitatis accipere meriaris; per eundem christum.</P>
<P>Benedicat te deus pater &amp; filius &amp; spiritus sanctus in omni benediccione spirituali, vt maneas sine macula sub vestimento marie, matris domini nostri iesu christi. Per dominum.</P>
<P>Benedicat te &amp; custodiat semper diuina maiestas patris et filii &amp; spiritus sancti.  Amen."</P>
<P>And þan cast hali water a-pon hir &amp; encens hir.  And þe priores &amp; þe couent sal þen go down into þe qwer in-to þer stalles, &amp; þan sal þe sub-priores lede þe ȝong nun to þe priores, &amp; scho sal hald vp <MILESTONE N="124a" UNIT="folio"/>both hir handes, &amp; þe priores  sal tak hir handes be-twene hir handes &amp; kis hir, &amp; swa sal scho mak hir obedience, &amp; swa forth til al þe couent, &amp; þan sall scho be set in þe vttermest stale in þe quer, vnto þe "Agnus dei" of þe mese be down, &amp; þen sal þe subpriores lede hir vp to þe auter; &amp; qwen þe prelete hase vsede &amp; rineside, þan sal scho be howseld of hym, &amp; þan<PB REF="" N="150"/> sal þe quer sing þe comune of þe mese, &amp; þen sal þe subpriores lede hir be-for þe lady auter, &amp; þair sal scho sit in hir prayers vnto þe mete-tym.  &amp; þes iij days sal scho not spek vnto þe iiij day, þat scho hafe leue of þe priores. And at euyn, when scho es in hir bede, þe priores &amp; þe couent sal cum vp in-to þe dortour, &amp; þe prest &amp; þe clerk with torch-lyght forto halow hir bed; &amp; he sal say withoutyn note: "Ecce, non dormitabit neque dormitet Dominus vobiscum.</P>
<P>Benedic, domine, hoc famularum tuarum dormitorium, qui non dormis neque dormitas, qui custodis israel; famulam tuam in hac domo quiescentem post laborem custodi ab illusionibus, fantasmatis sathane, vt vigilans in preceptis tuis meditetur, dormiens te per saporem senciat,  &amp; hic &amp; vbique defensionis<MILESTONE N="124b" UNIT="folio"/> tue auxilio muniatur, Per dominum nostrum."</P>
<P>And efter þis orison sal he say "In principio"; &amp; when þat es sayd, þen sal he kest haly water, &amp; encence hir &amp; þe bede, &amp; þe ij nyghtes efter þe conuent sal do þe same.</P><TRAILER>//Amen.//<NOTE PLACE="marg" N="*" ID="DLPS283">[<HI REND="I">Here follows, in a later hand, a Latin prayer</HI>, Benediccio Annule.]</NOTE></TRAILER>
</DIV1>

<DIV1 TYPE="notes"><PB REF="" N="151"/>
<HEAD>NOTES.</HEAD>
<DIV2 TYPE="version notes">
<HEAD>NORTHERN PROSE VERSION.</HEAD>
<LIST>
<LABEL>1/14-16.</LABEL><ITEM>THE negations, being double, have got out of gear.  Lat. <HI REND="I">ut non solum ut iratus pater suos non aliquando filios exheredet, sed nec ut metuendus dominus .. tradat</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2/13.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">þaim</HI>, probably referring to <HI REND="I">lippis</HI>: "that thy life may follow thy lips."  Cf. <HI REND="I">sey euer the trouth in herte &amp; mouth</HI>, 122/2.  But the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">inquire pacem et sequere eam</HI>; the Common Version: <HI REND="I">sec sibbe and hyre ȝefolȝa</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>3/31-4/1.</LABEL><ITEM>The passage is poetical (Introd. § 3) and deviates from the original text.  Perhaps <HI REND="I">þare may help þe here to</HI> is a corruption of <HI REND="I">þat þare may help þe, here do!</HI> = Lat. <HI REND="I">agendum est modo quod in perpetuum nobis expediat</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>4/4.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">stresce</HI>; thus I read the MS.  It is well known that <HI REND="I">st</HI> and <HI REND="I">sc</HI> are easily confused (as <HI REND="I">storid</HI> for <HI REND="I">scorid</HI>, p. 153, l. 10).  Is not Halliwell's <HI REND="I">streste</HI> due to a mistake?</ITEM>
<LABEL>4/24.</LABEL><ITEM>"So must be said of them as of the gold that thou mayst see, which .."</ITEM>
<LABEL>4/29.</LABEL><ITEM>"who neither want to be resident—but to go from place to place do they want—nor stay long (at each temporary abode)."</ITEM>
<LABEL>6/1.</LABEL><ITEM>"For need's sake he may place one before another as to reverence (due to them), if he does not wish to have (or keep) each one in his order, as he takes it."</ITEM>
<LABEL>7/3.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">of litil oresun</HI>, "unable to pray much (and eloquently)."  But the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">ne causetur de minori forte substantia</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>7/8.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Nichil de-esse</HI>; the Lat. text: <HI REND="I">Nihil deest timentibus eum</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>7/23.</LABEL><ITEM>"let her keep to the one which is best."</ITEM>
<LABEL>7/30.</LABEL><ITEM>Lat. <HI REND="I">omnes magistram sequantur regulam</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>7/32.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Yef any sal take discipline, gruching sal sho make nane</HI>.  But the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">quod si presumpserit quisquam, disciplinae regulari subjaceat</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>10/26.</LABEL><ITEM>An addition like "yea, it beseems you" would be quite in the style of the rule; see Introd. § 138.  Another possibility: <HI REND="I">for þi sal tu quite þe wid scrift, ye[f] it bi-timis yu</HI>; cf. 17/6.</ITEM>
<LABEL>13/13-15.</LABEL><ITEM>Lat. <HI REND="I">Probasti nos, inquit, deus, igne nos examinasti, sicut examinatur argentum; induxisti nos in laqueum, posuisti tribulationes in dorso nostro</HI>.  Thus <HI REND="I">laqueum</HI> is the Lat. word apparently corresponding to <HI REND="I">lay</HI>, and the latter may be a corruption of <HI REND="I">las</HI>, "snare." Cf. Introd. § 45.</ITEM>
<LABEL>13/21.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">weris taim</HI>, "wears them" (i. e. the mantles).  The whole passage is quite different from the original text: <HI REND="I">auferenti tunicam dimittunt et pallium</HI>, etc. (cf. Luke vi. 29).</ITEM>
<LABEL>14/32.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">and helpis noht</HI>, "and is no use."</ITEM>
<LABEL>15/29 ff.</LABEL><ITEM>The Lat. rule speaks of vigils (2 a.m.), a short interval, matins (at day-break).  Here: night-service, a short interval, work at day-break.</ITEM>
<LABEL>16/30.</LABEL><ITEM>"in that same above-mentioned order."<PB REF="" N="152"/></ITEM>
<LABEL>17/10.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">feste-dais .. sexe salmis</HI>.  But the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">dominico die .. sexagesimus sextus psalmus.</HI></ITEM>
<LABEL>18/6.</LABEL><ITEM>And (MS. <HI REND="I">At</HI>) <HI REND="I">o niht ryse</HI>, Lat. <HI REND="I">et nocte surgamus</HI>.  Seven <HI REND="I">at</HI>'s before in those two lines!</ITEM>
<LABEL>18/10 ff.</LABEL><ITEM>Thus: 1. the verse "Deus," 2. the hymn, 3. three psalms, 4. a lesson, etc.—For <HI REND="I">te salme</HI> the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">psalmi</HI> (pl.).</ITEM>
<LABEL>18/30-33.</LABEL><ITEM>Not in the original.  Cf. Luther's "Winkelmesse."</ITEM>
<LABEL>19/31.</LABEL><ITEM>Where the Lat. rule makes an exception for <HI REND="I">affectu inspirationis</HI>, this version puts <HI REND="I">mis-trouz</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>24/31.</LABEL><ITEM>"and for utensils and other things she shall provide such of whose life and deed she is sure."  Cf. 128/29 ff.</ITEM>
<LABEL>25/27.</LABEL><ITEM>"To the needy shall she (i. e. the sound sister who gives) humble herself in their illness, and she (i. e. the sick sister) shall not.."</ITEM>
<LABEL>30/9.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">þe gloria patri of þe Venite</HI>, the "Glory be to the Father," etc., which is sung after the 94th psalm.</ITEM>
<LABEL>35/6.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Alle .. And</HI>; Lat. <HI REND="I">omnibus congruus honor exibeatur, maxime domesticis fidei et peregrinis</HI>.  Cf. p. 102, l. 1929.</ITEM>
<LABEL>35/13.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">alure</HI> is a suspicious form.  Murray, under the verb <HI REND="I">allure</HI>, quotes: <HI REND="I">God's love alure</HI> (1616), <HI REND="I">alluring the mercy of God</HI> (1622).  Thus, certainly, it does not seem altogether impossible that the idea of worship, expressed by <HI REND="I">anure</HI> (Lat. <HI REND="I">honorare</HI>) and <HI REND="I">aure</HI> (Lat. <HI REND="I">adorare</HI>) was, at an early period, associated with the verb <HI REND="I">alure</HI>.  But the expression <HI REND="I">ouþir wid þe heuidis ouþir wid al þe bodi</HI> would go better with an <HI REND="I">alute</HI>, "bow down in deference or worship"; the Lat. has: <HI REND="I">inclinato capite vel prostrato toto corpore in terram</HI>; and, as is well known, the letters t and r were easily confused (cf. 2/27).  A third possibility is the assumption of a simple blunder for <HI REND="I">anure</HI> or <HI REND="I">aure</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>36/20.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">In caald cuntre es nede of warmer hend</HI> makes the impression of being a proverbial saying.  The Lat. has: <HI REND="I">in frigidis regionibus amplius indigetur</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>38/39.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">þat sho</HI>, etc.  The Lat. conveys quite a different thought: <HI REND="I">ut si aliquando suadente diabolo consenserit, ut egrediatur de monasterio, quod absit, tunc exuta rebus monasterii proitiatur</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>39/18.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Sain Benet hauis te sperance of þoþir</HI> means essentially the same as the Lat. <HI REND="I">quod absit</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>39/21.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">þat we</HI>, etc., i. e. that we may act up to our high calling, our relatives having offered us to God.</ITEM>
<LABEL>39/34.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Yef þar</HI>, etc.  Here our version, or its pattern, deals rather freely with the original text.</ITEM>
<LABEL>40/6.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">hym-selfe, He</HI>, erroneous masculine forms (Introd. § 6).</ITEM>
<LABEL>40/18.</LABEL><ITEM>Possibly an original <HI REND="I">swilk</HI> was misread as <HI REND="I">hvilk</HI> and changed into <HI REND="I">whilk</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>42/16.</LABEL><ITEM>"that she may refer, for testimony, both to the New and to the Old Testament."</ITEM>
<LABEL>42/25.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">beli pipe</HI> answers to the Lat. <HI REND="I">calamum quassatum</HI> (Common Version: <HI REND="I">tocwysede hreod</HI>), but it is hard to account for the form.  A participle like <HI REND="I">berid</HI>, beaten, bruised, would seem acceptable.  Or has <HI REND="I">beli-pipe</HI>, "bag-pipe" (not in N.E.D.), been introduced through some misunderstanding?</ITEM>
<LABEL>43/6.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">þat gafe</HI>, etc., Lat. <HI REND="I">qui erogavit triticum conservis suis in tempore suo</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>43/18.</LABEL><ITEM>Lat. <HI REND="I">materia ei datur superbiendi</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>47/19.</LABEL><ITEM>"For holy men, who lead a good life . . , such things may support (be a help to keep) this life."</ITEM></LIST>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="version notes"><PB REF="" N="153"/>
<HEAD>NORTHERN METRICAL VERSION.</HEAD>
<HEAD>(B. = Böddeker; H. = Holthausen; K. = Kölbing; cf. Introd. § 1, F.)</HEAD>
<P>I commence by giving a list of erroneous readings left uncorrected by K.: sely 1, here 116 ('123'), hafs 150 ('159,' in the note), amendes 204 ('215'), Commers in þe kingdom 250 ('262'), lighth 301 ('314'), folc 406 ('424'), þe 509 ('529'), ne 569 ('591'), honour 673 ('698'), bocksum 682 ('707'), te 883 ('918'), asaide 954 ('991'), haly 991 ('1028'), deuocion 1191 ('1235'), nunces 1209 ('1253'), chastyng 1244 ('1289'), That 1262 ('1306'), fast 1265 ('1309'), chastisyng 1356 ('1401'), omission of: id <HI REND="I">est</HI> 1360b ('1406'), celararii 1420b ('1467'), storid 1536 ('1589'), witsununday 1703 ('1764'), seruise 1896 ('1959'), wer 1997 ('2063'), hir mayne 2141 ('2210'), chaisted 2456 ('2533').</P>
<P>Some of these errors, and others not mentioned here, are of a more or less harmless nature.  But sense and construction, and statements in grammars, essays, and dictionaries, are concerned when a text offers <HI REND="I">sely</HI> for <HI REND="I">lely</HI>, <HI REND="I">commers</HI> for <HI REND="I">comuners</HI>, <HI REND="I">lighth</HI> for <HI REND="I">lightli</HI>, <HI REND="I">ne</HI> for <HI REND="I">not</HI>, <HI REND="I">bocksum</HI> (!) for <HI REND="I">bowsum</HI>, <HI REND="I">nunces</HI> for <HI REND="I">nouices</HI>, <HI REND="I">That</HI> for <HI REND="I">what</HI>, <HI REND="I">fast</HI> for <HI REND="I">tast</HI>, <HI REND="I">storid</HI> for <HI REND="I">scorid</HI>, <HI REND="I">wer</HI> for <HI REND="I">whor</HI>, etc.</P>
<P>Fresh errors introduced by the collator: Thurch 34 ('35'; B. is right; the 't' is distinct enough both here, in l. 39, and other places), fulfillyd 78 ('82'), gudenes 160 ('169'; see below), Ne 570 ('592'), awm 712 ('737'; for B.'s 'awn'; both are wrong), it ho 890 ('925'; certainly 'who,' as B. prints it, although not unlike 'it ho'), fonne 1078 ('1117'; for B.'s fone; both are wrong), mihi 1098b, 1312b ('1138b, 1357b'), Subpriores 1553 ('1607'), III 1576 ('1631'; see below), &amp; ȝapli 1674 ('1733'; it is B.'s '&amp; apli,' not his 'apli,' that is to be corrected into 'ȝapli'), loquantur 1728b ('1790'; see below), þam 1736 ('1798'; B. is right), modo 1802b ('1865b'), Sicut (the first letter is n o t totally red; it is black with a perpendicular red stroke through it), 2154 ('2224').</P>
<P>Part of the inaccuracies and errors mentioned in these lists are due to inadvertency.  Others—the majority — were deliberately accepted or advanced.</P>
<P>I may add that K. corrects B.'s þerfourn into parfourn 224 ('236'), but parfection into perfeccion 2486 ('2564').</P>
<LIST>
<LABEL>30 ('31').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">þi</HI>, ms. <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">i</HI> (= <HI REND="I">þai</HI>).'  B.  Of course <HI REND="I">þ</HI><HI REND="sup">i</HI> means <HI REND="I">þi</HI>, and nothing else; cf. p. 48, footnote.</ITEM>
<LABEL>55 ('56').</LABEL><ITEM>B. punctuates: <HI REND="I">Þe whylk yf þay dyde, wele myght wend</HI>, and adds the explanation: '<HI REND="I">dyde</HI>, i. e. be worthy.'  Similar specimens of B.'s punctuation are to be found in 267 ('280'), 373 ('390'), 422-424 ('440-442'), 452 ('471') 1159 ('1202'), 1531 ('1584') ff., 1586 ('1641') ff., etc.  Some others have been corrected by H.</ITEM>
<LABEL>97 ('103').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">Als so say</HI>, der sage es.' B.  I render the line: "I am desirous, also, to speak of him."</ITEM>
<LABEL>129 ('136').</LABEL><ITEM>B. substitutes <HI REND="I">we</HI> for <HI REND="I">he</HI>.  In either case the pron. must refer to the man who wishes to be saved.</ITEM>
<LABEL>145-146 ('154-155').</LABEL><ITEM>B. puts the comma after <HI REND="I">noy</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>159-160.</LABEL><ITEM>
<P>The lines may, as also H. suggests, have run something like this: <HI REND="I">For thúrth oure míghtes mór no mýn Máy we nónekyns gúde begýn</HI>. K. declares that the MS. has <HI REND="I">gudenes</HI> and that H.'s emendation thus 'sich erledigt.'  But there is not even the slightest trace of another syllable after <HI REND="I">gude</HI>; and as B. saw the MS. in 1872, K. in 1896, the whole thing appears somewhat mysterious.  Nor could I accept K.'s reading even as an emendation; it is not supported by the evidence of the text itself.  For <HI REND="I">gudenes</HI> is not used anywhere else in the whole version, whereas <HI REND="I">gude</HI> occurs substantively<PB REF="" N="154"/> twice on the same leaf (of my print): ll. 109 and 168, the latter passage answering very closely to the line in question.  And the words <HI REND="I">alkin(e)s, alkin (-kyn), nokins, whatkyn</HI>, in all the nine instances in which they occur, are accentuated —˘, followed as they are by a monosyllabic word (usually a rhyme-word).</P>
<P>The collocations <HI REND="I">mor no min, mor or les</HI>, etc., gradually wore down into mere expletives, or nearly so.  Partly on this account, it is sometimes hard to decide whether the words should be looked on as pure adjectives, as adjectives used substantively, or as adverbs.</P></ITEM>
<LABEL>275 ('288').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">mekli</HI> . ., lies <HI REND="I">mekil</HI>.' H.  See Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>331 ('345').</LABEL><ITEM>[<HI REND="I">in</HI>] <HI REND="I">werld</HI>. B.  But see Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>334b.</LABEL><ITEM>Properly <HI REND="I">spiritum adopcionis</HI> (Rom. viii. 15); but to judge from <HI REND="I">gaste of mede</HI>, the corruption must have been already in the copy used by the author.</ITEM>
<LABEL>340 ('355').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">þer</HI> . . st. <HI REND="I">ȝer</HI>.' H.  But see Introd. § 58, 1 (§ 59, 1).</ITEM>
<LABEL>372 ('389').</LABEL><ITEM>'das verbum <HI REND="I">be</HI> fehlt vor oder hinter <HI REND="I">dampned</HI>.' H. True in a sense.  But see Introd. § 128.</ITEM>
<LABEL>459 ('478').</LABEL><ITEM>B. substitutes <HI REND="I">let</HI> for <HI REND="I">set</HI>.  But see Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>588 ('610').</LABEL><ITEM>Lat. <HI REND="I">nihil amori Christi preponere</HI>; Common Version: <HI REND="I">nan þing beforan Cristes lufe settan</HI>.  B. supplies: [god].</ITEM>
<LABEL>592.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">for to sake</HI>, possibly for original <HI REND="I">to forsake</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>627.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">praers</HI> can hardly be explained as the direct object of <HI REND="I">schriue</HI>, the pronoun <HI REND="I">vs</HI> in such a case being the indirect object: "and prayers to God we should prescribe for ourselves as penance."  Such a construction of the verb is not recorded elsewhere (as far as my knowledge goes). In all probability the original had <HI REND="I">In</HI>.  As <HI REND="I">in</HI> was also a worn-down form of the conj. <HI REND="I">and</HI> (2007, 2260), and the whole passage (607 ff.) is full of <HI REND="I">and</HI>'s, the substitution of <HI REND="I">And</HI> for <HI REND="I">In</HI> seems easily accounted for.  Thus properly: "In prayers to God we should confess (and take penance)." B. makes the same emendation.</ITEM>
<LABEL>677 ('702').</LABEL><ITEM>'Der text ist wahrscheinlich zum theil corrumpirt.' B.  'Die verderbniss des textes ist leicht zu beseitigen, wenn wir . . <HI REND="I">And</HI> streichen.' H.  <HI REND="I">And</HI>, however, can be satisfactorily explained (whether used by the poet, or added by a scribe).  In Northern languages, the corresponding <HI REND="I">och</HI> (å', etc.) is freely used after an adj. or a quality-noun to introduce the expression for that in which the quality consists, or what it concerns: <HI REND="I">han hade den vänligheten å' komma</HI> (he had the kindness to come); <HI REND="I">jag var färdig å' gråta</HI> (I was on the point of crying).  And in our texts, p. 44, ll. 20-21, we actually find: <HI REND="I">þat þai . . alle timis finde hir redi and speke with þaim</HI>.  This sentence might, with a different word-order, easily have turned into: <HI REND="I">redi and with þaim (for) to speke</HI>.  Thus, in 677, <HI REND="I">And . . to</HI> is practically the same as "to," and from our point of view we may term it pleonastic.  But that, I believe, is all.</ITEM>
<LABEL>699.</LABEL><ITEM>I am not certain of this <HI REND="I">bown</HI>.  Cf. however 317-318.</ITEM>
<LABEL>796.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">mekenes</HI> is the subject (misunderstood by B. in Engl. Stud. ii, p. 364).</ITEM>
<LABEL>801.</LABEL><ITEM>Even if <HI REND="I">crakes</HI> might have been tolerably understood as "talks," "tales" (?), there is not the smallest doubt but it is a corruption of <HI REND="I">clerkes</HI>. <HI REND="I">Als clerkes tels</HI> is, like <HI REND="I">who likes to loke</HI>, etc., one of those favourite phrases which, with various modifications (cf. 2459, 773, 461, 858, 836), were used in mediæval poetry both to give a stamp of authority to the exposition and to supply a convenient rhyme.  The latter object is served by phrases like <HI REND="I">in feld and town, arely and late, be day and night, loud and still</HI>, which also meet us so often here and elsewhere.  Cf. J. Ullmann's treatise on Richard Rolle de Hampole in Engl. Stud. vii, pp. 415 ff. (specially pp. 428-454).<PB REF="" N="155"/></ITEM>
<LABEL>867.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">in ȝarning</HI> (MS.) would certainly give some sense: even before it has become a thought or deed.  Yet the alteration, made also by B., is probably right.</ITEM>
<LABEL>897.</LABEL><ITEM>I might have mentioned that the two words <HI REND="I">þat hase</HI> in 896 were thoughtlessly repeated after <HI REND="I">fader</HI>, but immediately crossed out again.</ITEM>
<LABEL>915.</LABEL><ITEM>To supply the missing line is out of the question.  It may have conveyed a thought like: <HI REND="I">For þi he shewed swilk bowsumnes</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>924 ('959').</LABEL><ITEM>'wir haben ohne zweifel für þai einzuführen þam.' B. (Eng. Stud. ii, p. 360).  But see Introd. §§ 37, 114.</ITEM>
<LABEL>929 ('964').</LABEL><ITEM>On account of the preceding <HI REND="I">þai, þer, þam</HI>, 'ist auch hier <HI REND="I">þer</HI> statt <HI REND="I">our</HI> einzusetzen.'  H.  But see Introd. § 138.</ITEM>
<LABEL>938, 940 ('974, 976').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">sofferand</HI> st. <HI REND="I">souerand</HI>.' H.  But cf. Introd. §§ 55, 89, 90, and <HI REND="I">vnsouerable</HI>, Wallace, ed. Jamieson, l. 267, etc.</ITEM>
<LABEL>942.</LABEL><ITEM>The line has fared badly:<HI REND="I"> r þi sake for</HI> is written on an erasure, <HI REND="I">r sa e fo</HI> being much blurred; <HI REND="I">to</HI> is squeezed in afterwards between <HI REND="I">for</HI> and <HI REND="I">be</HI>; traces of the old letters are left.  In its present shape, it is cumbrously long.  <HI REND="I">Al (þe) dáy for þí sake tó be sláyn</HI> would run smoothly.</ITEM>
<LABEL>965 ('1002').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">o bouen</HI> [<HI REND="I">vs</HI>].' B.</ITEM>
<LABEL>972 ('1008').</LABEL><ITEM>'Vor <HI REND="I">oþer</HI> fehlt offenbar <HI REND="I">þat</HI> oder <HI REND="I">þet</HI>.' H.  But cf. Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1045 ('1084').</LABEL><ITEM>'nach dem beispiele, das zu ersehen ist an denjenigen.' B.  Misconstruction.  See Introd. § 135.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1070 ('1109').</LABEL><ITEM>B., misunderstanding the function of <HI REND="I">laghter</HI>, transposes <HI REND="I">at</HI> and <HI REND="I">be</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1126 ('1167').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">be</HI> st. <HI REND="I">bi</HI>.' H.  But cf. Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1131 ('1172').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">þe</HI> statt des ersten <HI REND="I">al</HI>.' H.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1172 ff.</LABEL><ITEM>The lines give fairly good sense without an alteration: "since we may see (from Scripture), that everything we do," etc.  Nevertheless it is not unlikely that the first <HI REND="I">we</HI>, as H. suggests, stands in the place of an original <HI REND="I">þai</HI>: "since they can see all that we do."</ITEM>
<LABEL>1221 ('1265').</LABEL><ITEM>'ergänze <HI REND="I">þai</HI> vor <HI REND="I">vse</HI>.' H.  This does not improve the metre (cf. 1829).  Yet it may be right.  In both the lines (605 and 1221) where I wish to explain <HI REND="I">no</HI> as "none" (like <HI REND="I">a</HI> = "an"), something may be omitted.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1198b ('1242b').</LABEL><ITEM>What I expand as <HI REND="I">Quomodo sanctimonialles</HI>, K. explains as <HI REND="I">Quod singillatim</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1253-54.</LABEL><ITEM>The omitted line may as well have been the first in the pair, <HI REND="I">for</HI> being wrong for <HI REND="I">fro</HI>, like in 1259, etc.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1266 ('1310').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">fullyng</HI> zu mlat. <HI REND="I">fullare</HI>, neuengl. <HI REND="I">to full</HI>.' B.  But see Glossary, and Introd. § 99.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1269 ff.</LABEL><ITEM>Although <HI REND="I">comyn</HI> might be, and might have been, taken for an adj. ("familiar," "communicating") and <HI REND="I">cum</HI> for a participle, I believe, like B., that <HI REND="I">If</HI> is omitted: "If a nun .. communes .. or comes."  Lat. <HI REND="I">Si qua soror presumpserit</HI>; Winteney Version: <HI REND="I">Gyf hwilc swuster .. ȝedyrstlæcð</HI>.  In a prior copy, a blank had probably been left for the word; cf. 2179 and the footnotes on 923, 2151, 2481.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1306 ('1351').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">arest</HI> (=<HI REND="I">arested</HI>) st. <HI REND="I">warest</HI>.' H.  But see Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1317 ('1362').</LABEL><ITEM>K. corrects B.'s <HI REND="I">found</HI>, but puts a (!) after <HI REND="I">faund</HI>, thus appearing to misunderstand the word.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1403.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">Or els</HI> regularly means "or else;" thus: "or else rebellious rise against her."  But it is tempting to compare the line with 440: "or as a rebel rise against her."  Then <HI REND="I">els</HI> would be a corruption, or possibly a weakened form, of <HI REND="I">als</HI>; cf. <HI REND="I">es</HI> (8/3) = <HI REND="I">as</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1434 ('1481').</LABEL><ITEM>The end of the line, where all the letters stand rather<PB REF="" N="156"/> far apart, may be transcribed <HI REND="I">her to</HI>, as I have done, or <HI REND="I">herto</HI>, as B. did. But the sense is "to her," not "hereto."</ITEM>
<LABEL>1457 ('1506').</LABEL><ITEM>B. substitutes <HI REND="I">serue</HI> for <HI REND="I">saue</HI>.  Uncalled for.—B. prints <HI REND="I">selu</HI>, K. says the MS. has <HI REND="I">seln</HI>.  It is quite true that the last character looks like an n.  However, if K. had compared it e.g. with the fourth letter in <HI REND="I">wayue</HI> 444, he would have found that the last-mentioned letter has the same claims on being rendered by an n.  But the word being a rhyme-word, K. silently put u.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1468.</LABEL><ITEM>In M.V. <HI REND="I">what so</HI> means "whatever;" in P.V. the same words would have meant "what she."  The latter signification suits the context much better and probably belonged to the original metrical text.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1476 ('1526').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">þe enournmentes</HI>.' H.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1490 ('1540').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">er</HI> st. <HI REND="I">es</HI>.' H.  But see Glossaries.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1517 ('1568').</LABEL><ITEM>For B.'s erroneous <HI REND="I">falted</HI> H. substitutes <HI REND="I">failed</HI>.  K. states that the MS. has <HI REND="I">falled</HI> and accepts H.'s emendation.  Cf. however Introd. §§ 78, 99.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1576 ('1631').</LABEL><ITEM>B. correctly prints <HI REND="I">in like</HI>.  K. declares the MS. has <HI REND="I">III like</HI>, and refers to the Lat. <HI REND="I">addatur et tercium</HI>!  Cf. ll. 408, 1635.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1633 ('1691').</LABEL><ITEM>B. expands <HI REND="I">leuerty</HI>, which is impossible.  The omission of a syllable (cf. 142/8) need not be supposed either.  The meaning is, that they should not possess anything, but rather receive what is necessary to each one.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1728b ('1790').</LABEL><ITEM>B.'s reading, loquatur, is wrong, K.'s is impossible. But I wavered between loq<HI REND="I">ua</HI>nt<HI REND="I">ur</HI> and loqu<HI REND="I">an</HI>t<HI REND="I">ur</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1756 ('1818').</LABEL><ITEM>K. thinks <HI REND="I">day</HI> was altered into <HI REND="I">þay</HI>.  I admit that this would appear more natural.  But the d-part of the hybrid character is written with specially black, bold strokes, as if intended to predominate.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1780 ('1843').</LABEL><ITEM>'ergänze <HI REND="I">be</HI> vor <HI REND="I">ianglyng</HI>.' H.  See my note on 372.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1868-70.</LABEL><ITEM>The Lat. text mentions no other hour than <HI REND="I">terciam</HI> and <HI REND="I">decimam</HI>.  Line 1780 seems as weak as <HI REND="I">in Descember</HI> 1121.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1878 ('1941').</LABEL><ITEM>'ergänze <HI REND="I">be</HI> vor <HI REND="I">writ</HI>.' H.  I would rather insert it before the participle.  Cf. Introd. § 128, end.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1890 ('1953').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">þai s</HI> ist wol zu streichen.' H.  This would be a metrical disimprovement.  And cf. passages mentioned in Introd. § 138.</ITEM>
<LABEL>1929.</LABEL><ITEM>"who are known to be pilgrims."</ITEM>
<LABEL>1968.</LABEL><ITEM>The line corresponds to <HI REND="I">in medio templi tui</HI> 1966b,<HI REND="I"> I-middis ti tempil</HI> 35/24.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2008 ('2074').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">Less</HI> st. <HI REND="I">Sich</HI>, vgl. das original: <HI REND="I">in calidis uero minus</HI>.'  H.  Cf. Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2027 ('2093').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">wend</HI>.' H.  Cf. Introd. § 60, 2.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2076. ('2145')</LABEL><ITEM>'ergänze <HI REND="I">men</HI>, man, vor <HI REND="I">hir</HI>.' H.  I have substituted <HI REND="I">þai</HI> for <HI REND="I">þat</HI>.  My supposition is that the original had the shorter conjunctional phrase <HI REND="I">Or tyme</HI>, followed by the pron. <HI REND="I">þai</HI>.  Equivalent to <HI REND="I">or tyme</HI>, and just as common, was the fuller <HI REND="I">or tyme þat</HI> (2286), analogously to <HI REND="I">fro time</HI> (2201) and <HI REND="I">fro time þat</HI> (1719), <HI REND="I">do wilis</HI> (2/7) and <HI REND="I">to whilis þat</HI> (40/29, 33).  Thus the slip was easily made.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2190 ('2262').</LABEL><ITEM>'lies <HI REND="I">lay</HI> st. <HI REND="I">law</HI>.' H.  Cf. Introd. § 41, and Glossary.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2354 ('2430').</LABEL><ITEM>B. incorrectly substitutes <HI REND="I">as</HI> for <HI REND="I">at</HI>.</ITEM>
<LABEL>2346 ('2421').</LABEL><ITEM>'B. ändert <HI REND="I">strengh in</HI> zu <HI REND="I">strengthen</HI>, was aber gar keinen sinn giebt.  Es is einfach <HI REND="I">þam</HI> vor <HI REND="I">in</HI> einzuschieben.' H.  <HI REND="I">þam</HI> is very acceptable, but does not seem quite necessary: "then God shall grant strength in their deed."</ITEM>
<LABEL>2385 ('2462').</LABEL><ITEM>'<HI REND="I">to play</HI> giebt in diesem zusammenhange keinen rechten sinn.  Ich vermute, dass <HI REND="I">to play</HI> für ursprüngliches <HI REND="I">o-way</HI> geschrieben ist.' H.  But cf. the opening lines of the chapter, and the statement in<PB REF="" N="157"/> W. Dugdale's Monasticon Anglicanum, vol. ii, p. 474a (London 1846), that a lady superior was allowed 'to go out of the monastery to one of her manors, to take the air and divert herself.'</ITEM>
<LABEL>2432.</LABEL><ITEM>Cf. Introd. § 136.</ITEM></LIST>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="version notes">
<HEAD>CAXTON ABSTRACT.</HEAD>
<LIST>
<LABEL>119/4.</LABEL><ITEM>"in order that they may often read and execute the whole rule, and keep it so much better than it is kept."</ITEM>
<LABEL>120/19.</LABEL><ITEM>"to make arrangements wisely and carefully, and about all things in the place."  Possibly <HI REND="I">and</HI> is due to an inadvertency.</ITEM>
<LABEL>125/5.</LABEL><ITEM>"is this, when (<HI REND="I">when .. þat</HI>) they will confess to their superior, meekly and with repentance, all evil thoughts," etc.</ITEM>
<LABEL>128/14.</LABEL><ITEM>"to keep well, so well as though .."</ITEM>
<LABEL>129/7.</LABEL><ITEM>"that anyone should have," "for anyone to have."</ITEM>
<LABEL>133/33.</LABEL><ITEM>"and after their prayer (has been) made together and joined together in God's peace, (there shall be) kissing together and saluting of each other, with subsequent refreshing of themselves."</ITEM>
<LABEL>134/37.</LABEL><ITEM>"occasion to grumble, or to work anything, or to keep anything."</ITEM></LIST>
</DIV2>

<DIV2 TYPE="text notes">
<HEAD>LANSDOWNE RITUAL.</HEAD>
<LIST>
<LABEL>148/2.</LABEL><ITEM><HI REND="I">oue</HI>[<HI REND="I">r</HI>].  Thus I read the MS., referring to 144/2, 146/10, 148/26. Possibly: <HI REND="I">one</HI>, "on"; cf. 143/29.  The spelling <HI REND="I">one</HI> for <HI REND="I">on</HI>, however, occurs in no other instance in all the five texts.</ITEM></LIST>
</DIV2>

</DIV1>
</BODY></TEXT></EEBO>
</ETS>
